Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.

GK-1 

CATALOG-HANDBOOK 

TENTH EDITION 

Stocked & 

Distributed by 

NORMAN 

EQUIPMENT 

COMPANY 

800-323-2710 

-COMPLIANT 

MACHINE GUARDING 

SAFETY PRODUCTS 

• Programmable Safety Controller 

• Safe Speed Monitors 

• Safety Interlock Switches 

• Non-Contact Safety Sensors 

• Emergency Cable-Pull Switches 

• Safety Controllers 

• Safety Light Curtains 

• Electronic Safety Sensors 

• Serial Diagnostic Gateways 

• Hinged Safety Interlocks 

• Safety Edges/Bumpers 

• Safety-Rated Limit Switches 

• Safety Foot Switches 

• Safety Pressure Mats 

Turning Workplaces Into Safe Places ®

Safer 

by 

Design 

Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY 

800-323-2710

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Topic 

Page 

Alphanumeric Product Index 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii 

About Schmersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 

Man-Machine Safeguarding Products Selection Guides 

Section 1 

Keyed Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Section 2 

Keyed Interlock Switches with Solenoid Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Section 3 

Application Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

Section 4 

Emergency Cable-Pull Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Section 5 

Non-Contact Safety Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 

AES Series Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 

Section 6 

Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Section 7 

Hinged Safety Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 

Safety Rated Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 

Section 8 

Safety Light Curtains & Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 

Section 9 

Safety Category 3 Pressure Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

Fail-To-Safe Safety Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 

Section 10 

Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 

Safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

Safe Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Appendices 

Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 

Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 

Selected Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 

Copyright © 2011 by SCHMERSAL All Rights Reserved. 

SCHMERSAL is continuously working to improve our product designs. Therefore we reserve the right to change product specifications/ratings 

and other information contained in this catalog without notice. Proper installation and use of our products remains the customer’s responsibility. 


800-323-2710 

i

ALPHANUMERIC PRODUCT INDEX 

Product 

Series 

Page 

Product 

Series 

Page 

AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 

AZ15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 

AZ16zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 

AZ17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

AZ17zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 

AZ200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 166 

AZ3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 

AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

AZM170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

AZM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 172 

AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 

AZR31S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 

AZS2305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 

B25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

BNS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 

BNS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

BNS33S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 

BNS36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 

BNS250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 

BNS260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 

BNS30 & BNS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

BNS303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

BNS333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

BNS-B20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

BZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

C50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 

CSS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 198 

CSS30S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 194 

CSS 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 188 

CSS 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 182 

ES95 SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

FWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370–380 

MZM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 178 

PDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 

Protect PSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

S900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 

SDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 

SHGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 

SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 

SEPK(G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 

SLC, SLG & SLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 

SMS4, SMS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

SRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 

SSW301HV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 

ST14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 

T.C 235/236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 

TESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 

TESZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 

TFA/TFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 

TFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 

TG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 

TKF/TKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

TVS335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 

TZF/TZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 

TZG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

TZKF/TZKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 

Z332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 

Z/T235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 

Z/T236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 

Z/T335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 

Z/T336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 

ZQ700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

ZQ900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

ZS71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 

ZS75S (Bidirectional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 

ZS80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

ZSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 

ii 


800-323-2710

ABOUT SCHMERSAL 

K.A. SCHMERSAL GmbH & Co. was founded as a family 

business in 1945. The firm initially focused on the design 

and manufacture of electromechanical switches for 

industrial applications. 

Our first products included heavy-duty, cast-encapsulated 

limit switches for (post-war) civil engineering and construction 

applications. This program quickly expanded to 

include: 

• grey cast iron limit switches 

• light metal limit switches 

• robust precision limit switches 

• spindle limit switches 

• gear motor switches 

• elevator switch gears 

• CENELEC position switches 

• miniature snap-acting switches, and 

• command devices for machine and crane control 

systems. 

With this early post-war product program, the firm quickly 

established itself as a specialist in monitoring, switching, 

and controlling elevators, material handling systems, 

machine tools, and other industrial equipment. 

Many of these initial products satisfied unique requirements 

for safety switches. Such products included: 

• explosion-proof switches for gasoline pumps 

• door contacts and locks for personnel/freight 

elevators 

• cable monitoring switches for mountain cablecar 

systems, and 

• snap-acting limit switches featuring positive-opening 

contacts for lignite diggers, construction cranes, and 

other machinery. 

Today the Schmersal Group has grown to include 5 

manufacturing facilities around the world, producing over 

20,000 different switching and control devices – making 

Schmersal one of the largest machine safety suppliers. 

The Schmersal product family has developed to include 

the latest designs in Electro-Mechanical Interlocks, 

Electronic Safety Sensors, Programmable Safety 

Controllers, and Optoelectronic Safety devices. 

Headquartered in Wuppertal, Germany, the Schmersal 

Group of companies has direct operations in 17 countries 

employing over 1200 people around the world. A 

global reach, combined with our focus on Man-Machine 

Safety, enables Schmersal to remain committed to 

customer’s safety application requirements. 

This customer driven approach has given Schmersal the 

ability to continually develop products to meet the latest 

application needs and market trends around the world. 

SYSTEM SAFETY: PROTECTION 

FOR MAN AND MACHINE 

Safety requirements for workers in almost all industries 

have evolved to insure that safety in the workplace is 

no longer an option. Government organizations around 

the world have made worker safety a priority for companies 

which has drawn even greater attention to the topic 

of safety. The latest product developments from the 

Schmersal Group have focused on advanced safety 

systems designed to satisfy the most current safety 

standards and regulations. 

GLOBAL COVERAGE: 

Technical support and 

inventory in more than 

22 countries. 

iii

MAN-MACHINE SAFETY 

THE SCHMERSAL SYSTEM: 

A 360° APPROACH 

For over 60 years the SCHMERSAL group of companies 

has been dedicated to understanding machine safety. We 

have made it our mission to continuously develop safety 

controls utilizing the latest technologies to keep 

pace with the evolution in the world of 

machinery safety. This safety controls catalog 

is a compilation of information that 

addresses the latest and most stringent 

safety standards from around 

the world aimed to meet a multitude 

of industry applications. 

The day-to-day study of modern 

workplace safety is filled with 

the minutiae of industry regulations 

and standards. But philosophically 

we look to a higher 

standard in the work of one of 

the world’s greatest engineers, 

Leonardo da Vinci. A true Renaissance 

genius, he was a man 

whose fascination for the human body 

and the principles of physics resulted in 

his meticulous anatomical drawings, numerous 

intricate machines, and even a robotic knight 

that consisted of a system of cables and pulleys that controlled 

the movement of articulated limbs. Arguably the 

world’s first ergonomic engineer, Leonardo truly understood 

man and his physiological relationship to machinery. 

Like Leonardo, we at SCHMERSAL take a 360- 

degree approach to safety. We evaluate from 

every angle the potential for accidents 

and their prevention. We recognize the 

wide differences in each work 

station. We take into account 

specific guard design, as well as 

the environmental and physical 

considerations necessary to support 

machinery operation and 

provide maintenance. We even 

understand the frustrations and 

all-too-human temptation some 

machine operators feel to override 

(bypass) the safety system. 

As a world-wide leader in the manufacturing 

and supply of reliable and flexible 

safety solutions, we are well aware that 

different markets are subject to different 

regulations. Great consideration is given so 

that our products are designed to comply with 

safety standards around the globe. 

iv 

International 

symbol for 

Positive-Break 

contacts 

CHANGING MAN-MACHINE 

SAFEGUARDING RULES 

In today’s industrial world, worker safety has become a 

priority with manufacturers from all industries as well as 

government’s around the world. In North America there 

are several government organizations with formal 

safety guidelines such as OSHA, ANSI, 

MOL and CSA. In addition to the North 

American regulations there are 

developing European and international 

safety standards which 

have been adopted in the USA 

and Canada. 

Specific industry standards 

and guidelines developed to 

achieve a greater level of 

safety can be found at 

www.schmersalusa.com or by 

ordering our MAN-MACHINE 

SAFERGUARDING REQUIRE- 

MENTS & TECHNIQUES handbook. 

There you will find information 

you need to help determine 

what level of safety you may require to 

comply with today’s safety standards. 

NEW SAFETY CONCEPTS 

AND TECHNIQUES 

The common goal of the latest safety standards 

and regulations is to provide a heightened 

level of protection to machine operators, 

maintenance personnel and any other 

person who may come in contact 

with a machine. In order to reach 

this goal there have been several 

new safety concepts developed 

to help minimize the risk of 

injury as well as integrate the 

safety components into the 

machine automation controls. 

These concepts include: 

• Connectivity 

• Safety System Performance 

• Component Reliability 

• Safety System Structure 

Due to the potential complexity of machine 

safety, these latest concepts are considered 

when designing a safety system to help simplify 

the process. In addition other “classic” 

safety concepts are utilized such as positive

eak, tamper resistant and fault detection to help construct 

a safety system which suits an application best. 

“SAFETY-SPECIFIC” COMPONENTS 

New switches, sensors and controls have been designed 

specifically for safety applications. Each is intended to 

overcome one or more of the limitations of conventional 

“non-safety” components…and to satisfy one or more of 

the current safety requirements inherent in the latest 

industry standards and guidelines. 

These safety-specific components are the subject of this 

catalog. They include: 

• programmable safety controller 

• electronic safety sensors 

• safe speed monitors 

• serial diagnostic gateways 

• keyed interlock switches 

• keyed interlock switches with solenoid latching 

• sealed non-contact safety sensors 

• safety foot switches 

• push/pull operated emergency cable-pull switches 

• two-hand controls 

• positive-break hinged safety switches 

• safety light curtains/beams 

• fail-to-safe safety edges 

• safety pressure mats 

• safety-rated limit switches 

• safety controllers 

Each of these components is designed to help the safety 

specialist and equipment designers to better address 

their responsibility…to ensure that machinery, built or 

purchased, does not expose the operators, helpers or 

maintenance personnel to hazards. 

GUIDE TO APPLICATION SYMBOLS USED 

THROUGHOUT THE CATALOG 

Sliding Guard Applications 

Hinged Guard Applications 

SATISFYING YOUR NEEDS 

We trust that this Catalog-Handbook, its companion catalogs, 

and our tutorial Manual and videos, will be useful 

tools in the selection of suitable components to satisfy 

your unique application requirements.Your needs are our 

most important concern. 

Lift-off Guard Applications 

v

Optional M12 

quick-connect 

termination 

Up to 3 contacts, 

for dual-channel 

reliability with 

signalling 

AZ16 

Anatomy of the world’s 

best-selling interlock switch 

normally-closed 

contacts (ensure circuit interruption) 

Self-lifting terminal clamps (for 

speedy installation) 

3 threaded 

knock-out 

conduit entry 

points for easy 

installation 

Electricallyinsulated 

contacts 

for added safety (no 

potential for crossover) 

Molded-in, easy-to-read terminal 

markings (help ensure proper wiring) 

IP67 sealed housing 

(tolerant to hostile environments) 

Difficult-to-defeat 

multiple-cam 

actuating mechanism 

(mechanical life: 10 million) 

Integral, non-removable 

actuating head resists bypassing 

by preventing access to operating 

plunger 

Internationally accepted 

(CE, UL, CSA, BG, SUVA, 

SA, NEMKO, TUV, and 

others) 

High-strength, corrosion-resistant 

polymeric housing (no ground 

connector required) 

7 lbs. of built-in key holding 

force resists guard opening 

due to shock or vibration 

(other holding force 

options) 

4 actuator-key 

entry points, 

for ease of 

mounting 

And the industry's broadest 

range of optional features & 

accessories… 

• Adjustable ball latch 

• Magnetic door latch 

• Flex-mounted actuator keys 

• Individually-coded actuator keys 

• Solenoid-locking (Model AZM161) 

• Gold contacts 

• Signal lamps (Pilot light or built-in LED) 

• Explosion-proof models (ATEX-compliant) 

• Key entry closure caps 

• Optional funnel entry 

• Optional M12 connector 

vi 

Rugged, tamperresistant, 

stainless 

steel coded actuator 

key (Individuallycoded 

keys available) 

Optional “maintained” or 

“ejecting” actuator key 

(for application 

versatility)

KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES 

1 

Switch 

Series 

SELECTION GUIDE 

Housing 

Material 

Envelope 

Dimensions 

Contact 

Configurations 

Catalog 

Page 

ST14 

Glass-fiber, 

reinforced thermoplastic 

3 

⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2" 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

2 

AZ17 

AZ17zi 

Glass-fiber, 


1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2" 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

4 

8 

AZ15/16 

AZ16zi 

Glass-fiber, 


1 1 ⁄4" × 2" × 3" 

1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

12 

18 

AZ200 

Glass-fiber, 


2 PNP Safety Outputs 

1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2" 22 

1 Diagnostic Output 

TZG 

Glass-fiber, 


1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 3 3 ⁄4" 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

SDG Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 6" 2 NO & 1 NC 

28 

3 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ3350 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4 1 ⁄2" 

2 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

32 

3 NC 

SHGV 

(Key Transfer) 

Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4" 1 NO & 1 NC 36 

AZ415 Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 4" 2 NO & 2 NC 38 

24 

1

SERIES AZ17 

Compact Tamper-Resistant Movable 

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch 

Features & Benefits 

• Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space 

is limited. 

• Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) … facilitates 

fast, easy installation. 

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements. 

• Eight optional key entry locations … depending upon 

mounting arrangement. 

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple 

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure. 

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of 

safety circuit upon actuator key removal. 

• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant to 

mechanical abuse without damage. 

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre 

reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile 

environments. 

• “Padlockable” key for added security during 

maintenance. 

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements 

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of 

EN 954-1. 

• Several styles of actuator key … accommodates a wide 

variety of movable guards. 

Description 

The compact Series AZ17 is designed for use with movable 

machine guards/access gates which must be closed for 

operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a 

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven 

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And 

their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple 

tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67 

rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in 

hostile environments. 

Operation 

The AZ17 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists 

of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique 

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard. Upon 

opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are forced to open 

through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with the 

actuating key. These positive-break NC contacts assure circuit 

interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the 

actuator key. (The NO contact closes upon key removal.) 

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC 

contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open. 

Note: Available with optional M12x1 quick-connect. 

SPACE-SAVING 

IDC CONTACTS 

& CONNECTOR 

Typical Applications 

The AZ17 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on 

movable machine guards which, when open, expose the 

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical 

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access 

doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable 

guards. 

4 

® 

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZ17 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS 

(Actuator key must be ordered separately) 

Part Number Contacts Connection 

AZ17-11ZK 

AZ17-11ZRK 

1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ17-02ZK 

AZ17-02ZRK 

2 NC 

IDC Connection 

AZ17-11ZK-ST 

AZ17-11ZRK-ST 

1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ17-02ZK-ST 

AZ17-02ZRK-ST 

2 NC 

M12x1 Quick Connect 

Solenoid-latching models available. (Model AZM170) See page 44 

Individually-coded key models available (Model AZ17zi) 

(For extra security in “high-risk” applications) See page 8. 

Notes: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. Add 

suffix “2243” for front of unit cable entry or suffix “2243-1” for 

rear cable entry. 

“ST” models use M12, 4 pin connections. Order connection 

cable A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-1-X-A-1, or please see page 94 

for connector cable descriptions. 

ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES 

Part Number 

Description 

AZ17/170-B1 

AZ17/170-B5 

AZ17-B6 

AZ17/170-B11 

AZ17/170-B15 

AZ17/170-B1-2245 

AZ17-B25-L-G1 

AZ17-B25-L-G2 

AZ17-B25-R-G1 

AZ17-B25-R-G2 

MS AZ 17-P 

MS AZ 17-R/P 

Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

Right-angle key 

(7.87" minimum closing radius) 

Flexible, close-radius key 


Elongated standard straight key 


Elongated right-angle key 


Standard straight key with vibration-resistant 

mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

B25 door handle actuator with star grip for 

left hand hinged guard 

B25 door handle actuator with T grip for 

left hand hinged guard 

B25 door handle actuator with star grip for 

right hand hinged guard 

B25 door handle actuator with T grip for 

right hand hinged guard 

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting. 

AZ17-B6 key required. See page 6. 

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or 

perpendicular mounting. AZ17-B6 key 

required of units with B6 keys. 

1 

SELECTED ACTUATOR KEYS (See page 7 for more details) 

AZ17/170-B1 

AZ17/170-B5 

AZ17-B6 

B25 DOOR HANDLE ACTUATORS 

DIMENSIONS 

Note: For detailed information on the B25 Door Handle Actuator, see page 82. 

5

AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA 

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Housing 

Glass-fibre reinforced, 

self-extinguishing thermoplastic 

Actuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301 

Degree of Protection IP67 

Holding Force 

zk models: 1.2 pounds 

zrk models: 7 pounds 

Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches) 

Closing Force 

Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds) 

Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F 

Mechanical Life 

> 10 6 operations 

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE 

EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

EN 954-1 

CSA 

Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with AZ17-B6 actuator key) 

7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15 

actuator key) 

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Contacts 

Fine silver 

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break with 

electrically separated contact bridges 

Contact Rating 

4A/230VAC 

2.5A/230VA (with “ST” quick-connect) 

Switching Action 

Slow-action, positive-break NC 

contacts 

Short Circuit Protection 6A (time-delay) 

Rated Isolation Voltage 250V 

Type Terminals 

Insulation displacement contacts & 

connector for 18AWG flexible 

stranded wire (0.75 mm 2 ) 

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS 

AZ17-11z 

AZ17-02z 

13 

21 

14 

22 

11 

21 

12 

22 

0 

4,2 

7,6 

8 

11 

13-14 

21-22 

0 

4,2 

8 

8 

11 

11 

11-12 

21-22 

MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT 

MS AZ17-P 

AZ17-B6 key only 

MS AZ17-R/P 

AZ17-B6 key only 

6


DIMENSIONS 

24 

.94 

Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models) 

1 

23 

.91 

ø 4,2 

.17 

31 

1.22 

22 

.87 

8,2 

.32 

22 

.87 

60 

2.36 

BLACK 

BLACK 

BLUE 

BROWN 

BROWN 

BLUE 

BLACK 

BLACK 

ø19 

.75 

AZ17-02z 

Connections 

AZ17-11z 

Pg M169 

5 

.2 

8 

.31 

20 

.79 

AZ17-02z 

AZ17-11z 

same polarity; type four enclosure 

22 

.87 

30 

1.18 

ø 4-8 

.16-.31 

30 

1.18 

mm 

inch 

0.670" 

(17) 

(Remove outer sleeve 

from cable) 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

AZ17/170-B1 

AZ17/170-B5 

AZ17/170-B11 

30 

1.18 22 

30 

1.18 

22 

30 

1.18 22 

5,5 

.27 

.87 

20 

.79 

4,3 

.17 

7,5 

.30 

.87 

20 

.79 

4,3 

.17 

12 

.47 

.87 

20 

.79 

33 

1.30 

10 

.40 

23 

.91 

2 

.08 

AZ17/170-B15 

30 

16 

1.18 

.63 

25 

.98 

8 

.31 

36 

1.41 

13 

.51 

23 

.91 

2 

.08 

23 

.91 

2 

.08 

30 

1.18 

22 

.87 

20 

.79 

AZ17-B6 

4,2 

.18 

48 

1.89 

24 

.94 

12 

.47 

23 

.91 

2 

.08 

11 

.43 

6 

.24 

12 

.47 

4,3 

.17 

7 

.28 

8 

.31 

60,5 

2.38 

33 

1.30 

37,5 

1.48 

4,3 

.17 

AZ17/170-B1-2245 

8 

.31 

ø11 

.43 

ø4,2 

.17 

18 

.71 

b 

a 

13 

.51 

36 

1.42 

a 

b 

30 

1.18 

20 

.79 

22 

.87 

30 

1.18 

28 

1.10 

23 

.91 

23 

.91 

7

SERIES AZ17zi 

INDIVIDUALLY-CODED 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

Individually-Coded Movable 



• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult 

to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces 

liability exposure. 

• Individually-coded actuator key … provides extra security 

in high-risk applications. 

• Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space 

is limited. 

• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance. 

• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation 

flexibility. 

• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit 

interruption upon actuator key removal. 


• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates 


• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the 

most hostile environments. 

• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse 

application requirements. 

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment 

maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 

Description 

The compact Series AZ17zi are designed for use with 

movable machine guards which must be closed for operator 

safety. Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC 

contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than 

conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can 

weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for 

interlocking safety guards in hostile environments. 

Operation 

The AZ17zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock 

switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an 

individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The 

key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard. 

Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC) 

contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) 

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break 

NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine 

stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO 

contacts close upon key removal.) 


contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The 

tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools, 

bent wires or other readily available means. 

SPACE-SAVING 

IDC CONTACTS 

& CONNECTOR 


The AZ17zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on 



applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged 

covers, access panels and other movable guards. 

8 

® 


AZ17zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 

AVAILABLE MODELS 

(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key) 

Part Number Actuator Key Type Contacts 

Units with 1.2 lbs key retention force: 

AZ17-11Zi-B1 Straight key 

AZ17-11Zi-B5 Right Angle key 

AZ17-11Zi-B6R Flexible mounting – right 

1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ17-11Zi-B6L Flexible mounting – left 

AZ17-02Zi-B1 Straight key 

AZ17-02Zi-B5 Right Angle key 

AZ17-02Zi-B6R Flexible mounting – right 

2 NC 

AZ17-02Zi-B6L Flexible mounting – left 

Units with 7 lbs key retention force: 

AZ17-11ZRi-B1 Straight key 

AZ17-11ZRi-B5 Right Angle key 

AZ17-11ZRi-B6R Flexible mounting – right 

1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ17-11ZRi-B6L Flexible mounting – left 

AZ17-02ZRi-B1 Straight key 

AZ17-02ZRi-B5 Right Angle key 

AZ17-02ZRi-B6R Flexible mounting – right 

2 NC 

AZ17-02ZRi-B6L Flexible mounting – left 

Note: Models also available with M12x1 Quick connect, add "-ST" to 

part number before key type (AZ17-02Zi-ST-B1) 

Part Number 

MS AZ 17-P 

MS AZ 17-R/P 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Mounting kits require use of the -B6 key 

Description 

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel 

mounting of units with B6 keys. 

(See installation on Page 10) 


perpendicular mounting of units with 

B6 keys. (See installation on Page 10) 

1 

IDC CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS 

9

AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing 

thermoplastic 

Actuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301 


Key Retention Force zi models: 1.2 pounds 

zir models: 7 pounds 


Closing Force 





Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 EN 954-1 

EN 60947-5-1 CE 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

BG-GS-ET-15 CSA 

Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6L or B6R actuator key) 

7.87" (with B1 or B5 actuator key) 



Contact Configuration 



Short Circuit Protection 

Rated Isolation Voltage 


Fine silver 

Double-pole, double-break with 

electrically separated contact 

bridges 

4A/230VAC 


contacts 

6A (time-delay) 

250V 

Insulation displacement contacts 

& connector for 18AWG flexible 

stranded wire (0.75 mm 2 ) 

Note: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. See 

optional accessories. 


AZ17-11zi 

13 

21 

14 

22 

0 

4,2 

7,6 

8 

11 

13-14 

21-22 

AZ17-02zi 

11 

21 

12 

22 

0 

4,2 

8 

8 

11 

11 

11-12 

21-22 

MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT 

(Eases installation and facilitates 

adjustments due to guard misalignment) 

MS AZ17-P 

(for parallel 

mounting) 

MS AZ17-R/P 

(for parallel or 

perpendicular mounting) 

10


DIMENSIONS 

B1 Actuator Key 

0.177" 

(4.5) 

R min. 7.87" (200) 

0.59" 

(15) 0.314" 

(8) 

R min. 5.51" (140) 

0.393" 

(10) 

1.18"(30) 

0.866"(22) 

0.787"(20) 

0.078" 

(2) 

1.30" (33) 

0.216" 

(5.5) 

0.169" 

(4.3) 

0.905" 

(23) 

B5 Actuator Key 

0.177" 

(4.5) 

0.59" 

(15) 

R min. 7.87" (200) 

0.314" 

(8) 

R min. 5.51" (140) 

1.42" (36) 

0.511 

(13) 

0.216" 

(5.5) 

1.18"(30) 

0.866"(22) 

0.787"(20) 

0.169" 

(4.3) 

0.472" 

(12) 

22 

.87 

0.905" 

(23) 

0.078" 

(2) 

0.314" 

(8) 

0.787"(20) 

0.866"(22) 

1.18"(30) 

0.169" 

(4.3) 

Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models) 

B6L Actuator Key 

B6R Actuator Key 

1.18" (30) 

0.866"(22) 

0.944"(21) 

0.472" (12) 

0.165" 

(4.2) 

8 

5 

1 

24 

.94 

23 

.91 

ø 4,2 

.17 

8,2 

.32 

Pg M169 

.31 

60 

2.36 

31 

1.22 

22 

.87 

22 

.89 

.20 

ø19 

.75 

20 

.79 

30 

1.18 

ø 4-8 

.16-.31 

30 

1.18 

mm 

inch 

0.787"(20) 

RED 

WHT 

GRN 

BLK 

GRN 

WHT 

RED 

BLK 

0.314" 

(8) 

0.433" 

(11) 

0.157" 

(4) 

0.944" (24) 

0.236" 

(6) 

AZ17-02zi 

Connections 

AZ17-11zi 

0.078" 

(2) 

0.905" 

(23) 

0.433" 

(11) 

R min. 1.97" (50) 

0.590" 

(15) 

R min. 1.97" (50) 

0.590" 

(15) 

R min. 1.97" (50) 

0.314" 

(8) 

R min. 1.97" (50) 

AZ17-02zi 

AZ17-11zi 

0.314"(8) 

same polarity; type four enclosure 

(Minimum radius: 50mm) 

0.670" 

(17) 

(Remove outer sleeve 

from cable) 

All dimensions in 

inches (mm) 

11

SERIES AZ15/16 

Description 

The Series AZ15/16 is designed for use with movable 

machine guards/access gates which must be closed for 

operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a 







Tamper-Resistant Movable 








flexibility. 

• Individually-coded actuator key option … provides extra 

security in high-risk applications. See AZ16zi on page 18. 



• High key-retention force (7 pounds) … eliminates 

inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration. 









maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 

• Explosion-proof model and M12x1 quick-connect (“ST”) 

available (Please consult factory). 

Optional Safety 

Controller. 

See Page 320. 

Operation 

The AZ15/16 electromechanical safety interlock switch 

consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique 

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable 

guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are 

forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical 

linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC 

contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage) 

upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes 

upon key removal.) 


contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open. 


The AZ15/16 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 

on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the 



doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable 

guards. 

12 

® 


AZ15/16 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter** 

Actuator Key Sold Separately) 

Part Number 

AZ15ZVK (key spring returned) 

AZ15ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 

AZ16ZVK (key spring returned) 

Contacts (with 

actuator key inserted) 

1 NC 

1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ16ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ16-02ZVK (key spring returned) 

2 NC 

AZ16-02ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 2 NC 


1 NO & 2 NC 

AZ16-12ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 2 NC 


3 NC 

AZ16-03ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 3 NC 

*Feature 7 pound key retention force. For lighter key retention force 

(1-2 pounds) add suffix "2254". 

**To order unit with cordgrip instead of 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter, add suffix 

"CG" to part number...eg. AZ15-zvk-CG. 

Add suffix -1637 to basic part number for Gold contacts 

Add suffix “-ST” to part number for M12x1, 4 pin quick-connect and 

order connection cable A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-1-X-A-1, or see page 94 

for connector cable descriptions. 

Part Number 

AZ15/16-B1 

AZ15/16-B2 

AZ15/16-B3 

AZ15/16-B6 

AZ15/16-B1-2177 

AZ15/16-B6-2177 

AZ15/16-B1-KRH 

AZ15/16-B1-2024 

AZ15/16-B1-1747 

AZ15/16-B2-1747 

AZ15/16-B3-1747 

AZ15/16-B1-2053 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

Description 

Standard Key (5.9" minimum closing radius) 

Small radius actuating key (1.8" minimum 

closing radius) 

Small radius actuating key (1.3" minimum 

closing radius) 

Flexible-movement actuating key 

Funnel entry adapter with elongated 

straight actuating key 

Funnel entry adapter with elongated 

flexible-movement actuating key 

Key Removal Hand-Grip Assembly with Key 

Retention Chain (for use with AZ15...zvrk 

and AZ16...zvrk) 

Actuator key with gasketed key caps 

Actuator key with door holding magnet kit 

(7 pound holding force) 

(for use with AZ16…zvr-2254 models) 

Actuator key with ball latch kit 

(Adjustable holding force up to 22 pounds) 

(For use with AZ16...zvrk) 

1 

ACCESSORIES 

for AZ15/16 Keyed-Interlock Switches 

AZ16-STS30-01 

AZ16-STS30-02 

Part Number 

Description 

AZ15/16-1476 Key entry closure caps (for unused entry slots) 

M20-CG 

Cord grip (cable gland) 

M20- 1 ⁄2"NPT-P Plastic 1 /2" NPT adapter 

M20- 1 ⁄2" Metal 1 /2" NPT adapter 

PL-M20-24V 24VAC/DC pilot light kit 

AZ16-STS30-03 

AZ16-STS30-04 

AZ16-STS30-05 

AZ16-STS30-06 

AZ16-STS30-07 

AZ16-STS30-08 

STS Door Handle kits for use with AZ16 

switches. (See page 77 for details.) 

PL-M20-120V 

120VAC/DC pilot light kit 

SZ16/335 

Actuator Key Lockout Device 

(Accepts up to 6 padlocks) 

AZ15/16-AP Alignment Pins (Set of 2) 

MS AZ 15/16-P 

MS AZ 15/16-R/P 

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting 

(See illustration Page 16) 

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel and 

perpendicular mounting 

(See illustration Page 16) 

MS mounting kits require the use of the -B6 key 

ST PIN CONNECTIONS 

Actuator Key Removal Handle 

AZ15/16-B1-KRH 

Lockout Device SZ16/335 

(padlock not included) 

AZ15/16-2053 with ball catch 

Holding force up to 

22 pounds 

AZ15/16-1747 

with holding magnet 

Holding force 7 pounds 

13

AZ15/16 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 


thermoplastic 

Actuator Key 

Stainless steel (defeat-resistant 

design) 



Key Ejection Force "-zv" models: 3N ( 0.7 pounds) 

Key Retention Force "-zvr-2254 models: 5N (1.2 pounds) 

"-zvr" models: 30N (7 pounds) 

Closing Force 




> 1 million operations 

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

EN 60947-5-1 UL 

EN ISO 13849-1 CSA 

EN 954-1 

TUV 

CE 

Minimum Closing Radius 1.3" (with B3 actuator key) 

1.8" (with B2 actuator key) 

5.9" (with B1 actuator key) 

DIMENSIONS 




Contact Gap 





Rated Impulse Withstand 

Voltage 

Type Terminals* 

* Units available with M12x1 quick-connect. 

(Please consult factory). 

Fine silver 



bridges 

2×2mm (minimum) 

4A/230VAC (A600) 

2.5A/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect) 

Slow-action, positive-break 

NC contacts 

Fuse 6A (time-delay) 

500VAC 

6kV 

Screw terminals with self-lifting 

clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible 

stranded wire (2.5mm 2 ) 


13 

21 

14 

22 

AZ16z 

0 

2,3 5,2 

5,5 

8 

13-14 

21-22 

“Make before 

break” 

AZ16-02z 

11 

21 

12 

22 

0 

2,3 

5,5 

5,5 

8 

8 

11-12 

21-22 

AZ16-12z 

13 

21 

31 

14 

22 

32 

0 2,3 5,2 

5,5 8 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

11 

21 

31 

12 

22 

32 

AZ16-03z 

0 2,3 

5,5 8 

5,5 8 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

AZ15/16-2053 Ball Latch Kit 

AZ15/16-2024 Gasketed Key Caps 

14

AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS 

AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key 


with AZ15/16-1747 

Holding Magnet Kit 

1 

Minimum 

actuating radius 

with actuator B1/B1-1747 

5 

1 

AZ15/16-B1-2177 Actuator Key 

40 

1.58 

ø5,5 

.22 

5 

.2 

34,3 

1.37 

2 

0.08 

11 

.43 

56 

2.24 

16 

.64 

Minimum 

actuating radius 

with actuator 

B1/B1-1747 

23,3 

0.93 

27 

1.08 

Actuator B1 is standard for AZ15/16; it allows a 

minimum actuating radius of 150 mm. Please note 

that the center of rotation must be in the same 

plane as the upper edge of the safety switch. 

4 

Ordering example: 

Switch, holding magnet and 

actuator: AZ16-zv/B1-1747 



with AZ15/16-1747 


mm 

inch 

Minimum 

actuating 

radius with 

actuator 

B2/B2-1747 

Actuator B2 is particularly suitable for small 

actuating radii over the wide edge of the 

actuator (R=45 to 150mm). The basic setting 

(angle 15°) provides a minimum radius of 

45mm=1.8 in. For larger radii, the angle has 

to be adjusted correspondingly by turning the 

set screw counter-clockwise. 



with AZ15/16-1747 


Minimum actuating 

radius with actuator 

B3/B3-1747 

Actuator B3 is particularly suitable 

for small actuating radii over the narrow 

edge of the actuator (R=32 to 

150mm). The basic setting (angle 

10°) provides a minimum radius of 

32mm=1.3in. For larger radii, the 

angle has to be adjusted correspondingly 

by turning the set screw 

clockwise. 

15

AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS 

AZ15/16-B1-2177 Funnel Entry Adapter 

(with straight actuating key) 

AZ15/16-B6 Flex Actuator Key 

a 

56 

2.24 

ø5,5 

.22 

56 

2.2 40 

1.6 

7 

0.28 

16 

0.63 

11 

.43 

10 

.4 

16 

.64 

40 

1.58 

ø5,5 

.22 

5 

.2 

b 

34,3 

1.37 

11 

.43 

16 

.64 

2 

0.08 

75° 79° 

23,3 

0.93 

27 

1.08 

27 

1.08 

27,3 

1.09 

16 

64 

10,9 

.44 

6 

.24 

52 

208 

31,4 

1.26 

28 

1.12 

MS AZ 15/16 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT 



8 

.32 

14 

.56 

MS AZ 15/16-R/P 



MS AZ 15/16-P 

(for parallel mounting) 

16

1 

Safer 

by 

Design 

17

SERIES AZ16zi 

Description 

The Series AZ16zi are designed for use with movable 

machine guards which must be closed for operator safety. 

Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC 

contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than 

conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can 

weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for 

interlocking safety guards in hostile environments. 

Operation 

The AZ16zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock 

switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an 

individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The 

key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard. 

Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC) 

contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) 

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break 

NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine 

stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO 

contacts close upon key removal.) 


contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The 

tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools, 

bent wires or other readily available means. 

Individually-Coded Movable 






• Individually-coded actuator key … provides extra security 

in high-risk applications. 



flexibility. 








• Tamper-resistant key mounting screws … deter 

bypassing. 




maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 

Patented geometrically-unique tumbler 

configuration 


The AZ16zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on 



applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged 

covers, access panels and other movable guards. 

18 

® 


AZ16zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key and 

1 

⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter) 

Part Number 

AZ16-12zi-B1 

AZ16-03zi-B1 

AZ16-12zi-B1-1747 

AZ16-03zi-B1-1747 

AZ16-12zi-B1-2024 

AZ16-03zi-B1-2024 

AZ16-12zi-B1-2053 

AZ16-03zi-B1-2053 

AZ16-12zi-B1-2177 

AZ16-03zi-B1-2177 

Description 

Contacts (with 

actuator key inserted) 

1 NO & 2 NC 

Standard unit 

3 NC 

Standard unit with 

built-in key actuator 

1 NO & 2 NC 

magnet latch 

3 NC 


built-in slot rubber 

1 NO & 2 NC 

seals on key actuator 3 NC 


built-in ball-latched 

1 NO & 2 NC 

key actuator 

3 NC 


funnel entry adaptor 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

Part Number 

M20-CG 

M20- 1 ⁄2"P 

M20- 1 ⁄2"M 

AZ15/16-1476 

SZ16/335 

PL-M20-24V 

PL-M20-120V 

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES 

Description 


Spare Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter 

(One supplied with each unit) 

Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter (optional) 

Key entry closure caps 

(for unused entry slots) 

Lockout Device 

(accepts up to 6 padlocks) 

24VAC/DC LED Pilot Light Kit 

110VAC/DC Pilot Light Kit 

1 

EXAMPLE OF INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS 

provide extra security in high-risk applications 

19


Housing 


plastic 

Actuator Key 

Stainless steel 


Travel for Positive-Break 0.315 inches (8 mm) 

Key Ejection Force 3 N (0.7 pounds) 

Insertion Force 




1 million operations 

Conformity to Standards UL EN 954-1 

CSA 

BG-GS-ET-15 

EN ISO 13849-1 CE 

Key Withdrawal Speed 2 meters/second (maximum) 

Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm) 


13 

21 

31 

14 

22 

32 

AZ16-12zi 

0 

5,5 

5,6 

8 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 






Rated Insulation Voltage 

Thermal Current Rating 

Current Rating 

Rated Impulse 

Withstand Voltage 



Fine silver 


electrically-separated contact 

bridges 

2 × 2 mm 


NC contacts 

A600 

500VAC 

10A (300VAC) 

6A @ 120VAC 

4A @ 230VAC 

2.5V/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect) 

6kV 

Fuse 6A (slow-blow) 


clamps for up to 2.5 mm 2 

(AWG13) wire 

AZ16-03zi 

11 

21 

31 

12 

22 

32 

0 

5,5 

5,5 

8 

8 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

“-2177” Funnel Entry Adapter 

(Order as part of base switch… 

e.g. AZ16-02Zi-B1-2177) 

DIMENSIONS 

5,5 

.22 

11 

.43 

10 

.4 

5 

.2 

40,7 

1.63 

mm 

inch 

23 

.9 

40 

1.58 

56 

2.24 

16 

64 

10,9 

.44 

52 

208 

31,4 

1.26 

28 

1.12 

14 

.56 

8 

.32 

6 

.24 

20

AZ16zi INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS 

1 

Applications: harsh environments 

(coarse dirt, chips, flour…) 

For holding light to medium-weight guards closed 

21

SERIES AZ 200 

Pulse-Echo Based 

Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch 


• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and 

actuator required for operation. 

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability. 

• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no 

additional door handles are needed. 

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states 

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors … 

satisfy requirements of Safety PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, 

Control Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note on next page. 

• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be 

left quickly and safely. 

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door 

opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding 

actuator. 

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application 

versatility. 

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, 

max 200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to 

safety performance level. 

Description 

The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is 

designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates 

which must be closed for operator safety. 

The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit 

with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The 

actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the 

actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing 

pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can 

have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the 

interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in 

turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo 

technology provides diagnostic information and detects and 

indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different 

actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards. 

The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit 

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up 

to 250 mA. It features one electronic diagnostic output that 

can signal errors before the safety outputs are switched off, 

thus enabling a controlled shutdown of the machine. 

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of 

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors, 

up to 31 AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic 

output can be wired in series without detriment to the safety 

performance level/control category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1/ 

Category 4 to EN 954-1). 


The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 




panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for 

both sliding guards and hinged guards. 

22 

AVAILABLE AZ200 MODELS 

Part Number 

Description 

Screw Terminals 

AZ200SK-T1P2P 

Door detection sensor, diagnostic 

output, 2 PNP safety outputs 

AZ200SK-TSD2P 

Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic 

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs 

M23 x1 quick connect, 8+1 pin 

AZ200ST1-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic 


AZ200ST1-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic 


M12x1 quick connect, 8 pin 





* Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with 

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways. 

ACTUATORS 

Part Number 

Description 

AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from 

left 

AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from 

left with inside emergency door 

release 

AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from 

right 

AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from 

right with inside emergency door 

release 

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left 

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left 

with inside emergency door release 

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right 

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right 


Note: For appropriate connector cable for ST models, please 

see page 94. 

For ST1 models, order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23... 

For ST2 models, order cable staring with A-K8P-M12...

SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS 

Part number: SZ200 

Description: 

Lockout tag, 

up to 5 padlocks 

1 

Safety Control Module Requirements 

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP 

semiconductor outputs. See page 320 for 

recommended SCHMERSAL safety control 

modules. 

*Note: A safety control module may be required 

for reset function and/or feedback monitoring 

functions, as well as increased output current 

requirements. 

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see 

page 166 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section. 

23

SERIES TZG 

Description 

The Series TZG is designed for use with movable machine 

guards/access gates which must be closed for operator 

safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a 







Operation 

The Series TZG electromechanical safety interlock switch 










contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open. 


The Series TZG is intended for use as a safety interlock 

switch on movable machine guards which, when open, 

expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine 

hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective 

gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels 

and other movable guards. 

Movable Machine Guard 

Safety Interlock Switch 





• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator 

head provides installation versatility. 



• High key retention force (5 pounds) … eliminates 



• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates 




• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse 



maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 

• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment. 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter. 

Actuator Keys Sold Separately) 

Part Number Contacts Description* 

TZG01.103 

TZG01.110 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

Keyed interlock switch 

with front* key entry and 

slow action contacts. 

*Field-rotatable actuator head for key entry from right, left or rear. 

Part Number 

TZ/CO 

TZ/CW 

TZ/COR 

TZ/CK 

TZ/CWR 

TZ/COF/HIS.1 

TZ/COF/HIS.2 

OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS 

Description 

Standard straight actuator key 

(13" minimum closing radius) 

Right-angled straight actuator key 


Radial entry actuator key 


Short straight actuator key 


Right-angled bent actuator key 


Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted) 


Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted) 


TZ/CORF/HIS.1 

TZ/CORF/HIS.2 





24

TZG TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing 

thermoplastic 

Actuator Key 

Galvanized steel 

(defeat-resistant design) 


Holding Force 

20N (4.8 pounds) 

Travel for Positive-Break 12.5mm 

Force to Reach 



Closing Force 

Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds) 



1 million operations (minimum) 

Shock Resistance >30g / 18ms 

Vibration Resistance >15g / 10…200Hz 


EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key 

used. Please see actuator key 

selection chart. 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 

2 × 3.5 mm 

8A (250VAC) 


contacts (TZG models) 

Snap-action, positive-break NC 

contacts (TZGP models) 

10A (slow-blow) – TZG models 

6A (slow-blow) – TZGP models 

250VAC 

4kV 


clamps for up to 13 AWG solid 

wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG 

stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire 

1 

DIMENSIONS 

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS 

Dimensional base for actuator 

1NO/1NC 

2NC 

25

SERIES TZG ACTUATORS 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

TZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR 

TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2 

TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK 

26

1 

Safer 

by 

Design 

27

SERIES SDG 

Description 

The Series SDG is designed for use with movable machine 









Operation 

The Series SDG electromechanical safety interlock switch 










contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open. 


The Series SDG is intended for use as a safety interlock 

switch on movable machine guards which, when open, 

expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine 

hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective 

gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels 

and other movable guards. 

Movable Machine Guard 






• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator 




• Built-in retention force (1.2 pounds) … eliminates 



• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical 

abuse without damage. 

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates 

the most hostile environments. 





EN 954-1. 

• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment. 

• Other 2-contact configurations available … please 

consult factory. 

Part Number Contacts Description* 

SDG01.1044 

SDG01.1103 

SDG01.1110 

Part Number 

BO 

BOW 

BOR 

BOWR 

BOF/HIS.1 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter. 

Actuator Keys Sold Separately) 

2 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

AVAILABLE ACTUATOR KEYS 

Description 





Radial entry actuator key 


Right-angled bent actuator key 


Keyed interlock switch 

with front* key entry and 

slow action contacts. 

*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear. Units are supplied 

with tamper-resistant (one-way) screws to replace the standard 

screws after rotating the actuator head for desired direction 

of key entry. 


(13.8" Minimum closing radius) 

BOF/HIS.2 


(13.8" Minimum closing radius) 

28

SDG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


Housing 

Cast aluminum with enamel paint 

Actuator Key 

Steel (chromated) 


Degree of Protection IP67 (Switch housing) 

IP00 (Reversing and locking head) 

Holding Force 

5N (1.2 pounds) 





Closing Force 





Shock Resistance >30g / 18ms 

Vibration Resistance >15g / 10…200Hz 


EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key 

used. Please see actuator key 

selection chart. 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 

2 × 3.5 mm 

8A (250VAC) 


contacts 

10A (slow-blow) 

250VAC 

4kV 





1 

DIMENSIONS 

M20x1 

M20x1 

5.5mm 

M20x1 

29

SDG TECHNICAL DATA 


SDG01.1044 SDG01.1103 SDG01.1110 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

BO 

BOW 

BOR 

BOWR 

BOF/HIS.1 

BOF/HIS.2 

30

1 

Safer 

by 

Design 

31

SERIES AZ3350 




• Rugged, corrosion-resistant die-cast aluminum housing 

… tolerates the most hostile environments. 

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption 

upon actuator key removal. 




• Four optional key entry locations … depending upon 

orientation of rotatable actuator head. 

• High-strength actuator key … tolerant to mechanical 


• Funnel shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment. 



EN 954-1. 

• Wide selection of actuator keys … to meet diverse 


• Optional M12x1 quick-connect … please consult factory. 

Description 

The AZ3350 Series is designed for use with movable machine 





the switch’s tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with 

simple tools, bent wires or other readily available means. 

Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal 

for interlocking safety guards in industrial and hostile 

environments. 

Operation 

The AZ3350 electromechanical safety interlock switch 



guard. Upon opening of the guard, the NC contact(s) are 




upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contacts close 



contact(s) to close, and the NO contacts to re-open. 


The AZ3350 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 




doors/panels, perimeter access gates, hinged covers and 

other movable guards on textile machinery, packaging 

equipment, machine tools, assembly machinery, robot work 

cells and food/chemical processing equipment. 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter. Actuator keys sold separately) 

Part Number Contacts (with key inserted) 

AZ3350-12ZUEK 1 NO & 2 NC 

AZ3350-03ZK 3 NC 

Please note: Standard models have the actuator head facing forward. 

See page 78 for units with the actuator head rotated to the left (U90) 

or right (U270) for use with STS door handles. 

Part Number 

AZ3350-B1 

AZ3350-B1R 

AZ3350-B5 

AZ3350-B5R 

AZ3350-B6 

AZ3350-B6H 

AZ3350-STS30-01 

AZ3350-STS30-02 

AZ3350-STS30-03 

AZ3350-STS30-04 

AZ3350-STS30-05 

AZ3350-STS30-06 

AZ3350-STS30-07 

AZ3350-STS30-08 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

Description 

Straight actuator key 

Bent radius actuating key 

Straight actuator key, right angle mounting 

Bent radius actuating key, right angle mounting 

Pivoting straight actuator key, rear mounting 

Pivoting straight actuator key, top mounting 

STS Door Handle kits for use with AZ3350 

switches. (See page 77 for details.) 

32 

® 




Housing 

Diecast light alloy with baked 

enamel finish 

Actuator Key 

Chromated steel 



Travel for Positive-Break 10.7 mm (0.4 inches) 

Closing Force 


Operating Temperature –30°C to +90°C 



Key Holding Force 30 N (7 pounds) (“R” models only) 

Conformity to Standards EN ISO 13849-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

EN 60947-5-1 UL 

EN 954-1 

CSA 

CE 

Minimum Closing Radius B1 & B5 keys: 150mm 

B6, B5-Flex & B6-Flex keys: 100mm 

Actuating Speed 

Max 0.2 m/s 

Actuating Frequency Max 1200 operations per hour 



Fine silver 

Contact Configuration Type Zb double-break contact or 

3 NC contacts with galvanically 

separated contact bridges. 


2 × 1.25mm (minimum) 


4A (230VAC) 

4A (24VDC) 



contacts 

Short Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay) 

Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC 

Rated Impulse 

4kV 


Type Terminals Screw terminals (min 0.75mm 2 , 

max 2.5mm 2 – including 

conductor ferrules) 

1 

DIMENSIONS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS 

31 16 24 

29 12.5 

AZ3350-12ZUEK 

60 

2.36 

30,5 

1.20 

13 

21 

31 

14 

22 

32 

5,3 

0.21 

7,3 

0.29 

17 

0.67 

AZ3350-03ZK 

11 

12 

30 

1.18 

40,5 

1.59 

M20 

38 

1.50 

21 

31 

22 

32 

33

AZ3350 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

AZ3350-B1 

AZ3350-B5 

AZ3350-B1R 

AZ3350-B5R 

AZ3350-B6 

AZ3350-B6H 

34

1 

Safer 

by 

Design 

35

SERIES SHGV 

Cable-less Keyed Mechanical Safety Guard 

Interlock with Key Transfer System 


• Highly tamper resistant … difficult to defeat with simple 

tools, thereby reducing liability exposure. 

• Four optional key entry positions … provides installation 

versatility. 

• Three optional locking cylinder locations … provides 

installation versatility. 

• Corrosion resistant … tolerates hostile environments. 

• Funnel shaped entry … forgiving of mechanical actuator 

key misalignment 

• Low cost guard locking … eliminates wiring at the guard. 



EN 954-1. 

Description 

The SHGV Series consist of a guard-mounted mechanical 

locking device and a 2-position key operated selector switch 

for control panel mounting. This unique key transfer system 

assures the removal of power before allowing the access 

control guard to be open … without the need for electrical 

wiring at the interlocked machine guard location. 

Operation 

When the machine guard is open the transfer key (for 

operating the 2-position selector switch) cannot be withdrawn 

from the guard locking mechanism. 

Upon closing of the guard, the mechanical actuator key 

permits the transfer-key to be turned (locking the guard) and 

withdrawn. The transfer-key can now be removed and inserted 

into the 2-position selector switch, allowing it to be operated 

(e.g. power to be turned on) … trapping the transfer key in the 

“on” position. 

To unlock (open) the guard, the selector switch must be 

turned to the off position. The transfer-key can now be 

withdrawn and inserted into the guard-locking mechanism for 

release of the mechanical actuator key and opening of the 

guard. 

The two lock barrel version allows the removal of a second 

transfer key when the mechanical actuator key has been 

released. This second transfer key prevents the removal of the 

“power control” transfer key from the keyed interlock. Thus it 

can be removed from the interlock by the operator to protect 

against the inadvertent start-up of the equipment. 

Part Number 

SHGV/L1 (*) ESS21S2/103 

SHGV/R1 (*) ESS21S2/103 

SHGV/B1 (*) ESS21S2/103 

SHGV/LD1 (*) / 

(*) ESS21S2/103 

SHGV/RD1 (*) / 

(*) ESS21S2/103 


Lock Barrel Left 

Description 

Lock Barrel Right 

Lock Barrel Rear 

Lock Barrel Left & Lock Barrel 

in Front Cover 

Lock Barrel Right & Lock Barrel 

in Front Cover 

Includes guard device SHGV with standard BO actuator 

element, keyed selector switch ESS21S2, and contact block 

EF103 ( 1NO/1NC) 

(*) Individual key identification code stamped on selector 

switch cylinder. 

Note: 

This system is recommended for applications in which there 

is no residual motion or hazard after the removal of power. 

For applications in which there is residual motion or the 

presence of a hazard immediately following the removal of 

power, a solenoid-locking console ( Model SVE) is recommended. 

Please consult factory. 


Recommended for use where wiring directly to the movable 

guard is cost prohibitive or subject to damage due corrosive 

chemicals or other harsh environmental conditions. 

36 

® 


SERIES SHGV TECHNICAL DATA 


Protection Class IP 65 (Housing) IEC/EN 60529 

IP 00 (Control Head) IEC/EN 60529 

Actuating Forces Insertion of actuating element - 15 N 

Withdrawal of actuating element - 5 N 

Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 70 °C 

Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C 

Material ALsi 12 painted signal red (RAL 3000) 

Housing 

Steel passivated with 

SHG Cover 

Perbunan seals(oil and gasoline resistant) 

Mechanical life 2 x 10 6 operating cycles 

Shock resistance > 30 x g / 18ms 

Vibration resistance > 15 x g/10 ... 200 Hz 

Climatic resistance 40/91 to DIN 50015 FW 24 to DIN 50016 

Conformity to EN ISO 13849-1 CSA 

Standards EN 954-1 EN ISO 13850 

CE IEC 60947-5-1 

UL 


Conformity to Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

Protection Class IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529 


Fine silver 

Rated breaking capacity 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A 

Rated operating current 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A 

Rated insulation voltage 400VAC / 450VDC 

Thermal test current 10 A 

Utilization Category 

AC-15; DC-13 

Max. fuse rating 

10 A (slow blow) 

Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 80 °C 

Switching frequency 6000 s/h 

1 

DIMENSIONAL DRAWING FOR SHGV GUARD LOCKING DEVICE 

37

SERIES AZ415 




• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat. 


upon key removal. 


• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical 


• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the 


• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds 

… permits use of switch as door latch. 



EN 954-1. 

Description 

The AZ415 Series is designed for movable machine 






tools, bent wires or other readily available means. 

Operation 

The AZ415 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists 

of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique 

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard. 

Upon opening of the guard, the NC contacts are forced to 

open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with 

the actuating key. These NC contacts assure circuit 

interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the 

actuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.) 

In the closed position, the guard is held shut by an adjustable 

ball catch integral to the AZ415 housing. 


The AZ415 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on 




doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other 

movable guards. 


(Actuator key sold separately … see below) 

Part Number 

(AZ415 - Switch Block S1*/ 

Switch Block S2) 


with actuator key inserted 

(Switch Block S1*/Switch Block S2) 

AZ415-11/11ZPK 

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ415-02/20ZPK 

2 NC / 2 NO 

AZ415-02/11ZPK 

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZ415-02/02ZPK 

2 NC / 2 NC 

*Only Switch Block S1 has positive-break contacts. 

ACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIES 

Part Number 

AZ/AZM415-B1 

AZ/AZM415-B2 

AZ/AZM415-B3 

AZ/AZM415-B4PS 

AZ415-STS30-01 

AZ415-STS30-02 

AZ415-STS30-03 

AZ415-STS30-04 

AZ415-STS30-05 

AZ415-STS30-06 

Description 

Linear entry actuator key 

Small radius x-axis entry actuator 

key (9.8" minimum closing radius) 

Small radius y-radius entry actuator 

key (9.8" minimum closing radius) 

Slide bolt actuator key 

STS Door Handle kits for use with 

AZ415 switches. See page 77 for 

details. 

AZ415-STS30-07 

AZ415-STS30-08 



See Page 333. 

MP-AZ415-22 

SZ415-22-1 

SZ415-22-2 

SZ415-1 

SZ415-2 

Mounting plate 

Lockout device for switch 

Lockout device for switch 

Lockout device for STS door handles 

Lockout device for STS door handles 

38 

® 




Housing 

Die-cast aluminum with blue 

enamel finish 

Actuator Key 

key shaft: Zinc coated brass 

mounting block: Zinc coated steel 


Travel for Positive-Break 0.2 inches (5mm) 


Depending upon ball catch setting 


(3.5 pounds minimum) 

Actuator Key 

Adjustable, 80 to 400 N 

Holding Force 

Operating Temperature -13°F to +175°F 




BG-GS-ET-19 UL 


EN 954-1 

Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250 mm) with B2 or 

B3 actuating key 









Rated Impulse 

Withstand 


Fine silver 



bridges 

2mm x 2mm 

4A (230VAC) 


contacts 


250VAC 

4kV 


clamps for up to 1.5mm 2 

(15AWG) flexible stranded wire 

1 

DIMENSIONS (mm) 

86 

3.39 8 

.315 

22 

.87 

60,5 

2.38 

ø6,5 

.26 

8,6 

0.34 

36,5 

1.44 

105 

4.13 

46 

1.81 

15 

.59 

26 

1.02 

8,6 

.34 

88 

3.46 

M20 

ø11 

.43 

mm 

inch 

Recommended key clearance 

less than 3 mm 

< 

> 3mm 

39


ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS 

B2 Actuating radii 

For hinged doors over the wide edge 

of the actuator 

B3 Actuating radii 

For hinged doors over the small edge 

of the actuator 

Dowel holes are also provided in the actuator 

body. With the use of dowel pins the 

removal of the actuator can be prevented. 

By turning the adjusting screw “a,” the 

actuator can be brought into any desired 

position. 

Both actuators can also be used on sliding 

doors. 

SWITCH TRAVEL AND WIRING DIAGRAMS 

AZ415-11/11 AZ415-02/11 AZ415-02/02 

AZ415-02/20 

11 

21 

12 

22 

S2 

11 

21 

12 

22 

S1 

40



55 

2.17 

0-6 

0-.24 

56 

2.20 

1 

125 

4.92 

8 

.35 

18,5 

69,5 

2.74 

9 

.35 

237 

9.33 

22 

.87 

10

42 

Safer 

by 

Design

KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES 

WITH SOLENOID LATCHING 

2 


Switch 

Series 

Housing 

Material 

Envelope 

Dimensions 




Page 

AZM170 

Glass-fiber, 


1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2" × 5" 

Many arrangements 

available 

see catalog page 

44 

AZM161 

Glass-fiber, 


1 1 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 5 1 ⁄8" 1NO/2NC & 1NO/2NC 50 

AZM200 

Glass-fiber, 


1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2" 



54 

MZM100 

Glass-fiber, 


1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4" 



56 

TZF/TZM 

Glass-fiber, 


1 1 ⁄2" × 4" × 5" 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NO & 2 NC 

58 

TKF/TKM Die-cast aluminum 2 1 ⁄2" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 8" 2 NO & 2 NC 62 

TZKF/TZKM 

Glass-fiber, 


1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 7" 

AZM415 Die-cast aluminum 2" × 5" × 5 1 ⁄2" 

Many arrangements 

available 

see catalog page 

2 NO & 2 NC 

3 NO & 3 NC 

66 

70 

43

SERIES AZM170 

Description 

The AZM170 Series is designed for machines/work cells 

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled 

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature 

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions, 

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have 

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay, 

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component. 

The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position 

and solenoid-latching pin position contacts. These permit the 

prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and 

the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position. 

The AZM170 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock 

switch joined to a solenoid-latching mechanism. Both the 

safety switch and solenoid mechanism feature “positive-break” 

contacts. In addition the actuator key features a built-in latch 

(unlocked key holding force of 7 pounds), and an auxiliary 

manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in 

installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when 

using the “unlocking by solenoid” model). 

Each unit is supplied with a cord grip and a cap to seal the 

unused key entry port in the solenoid-latching mechanism. 


The AZM170 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until 

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of 

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun, 

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical 

applications are textile machines, stamping presses, 

articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working 

equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery. 

Solenoid-Latching Machine Guard 



• Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 3" × 4 1 ⁄4". Ideal where space 

is limited. 




• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of 

safety circuit upon actuator key removal. 

• Two key entry locations … provide mounting flexibility. 

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre 

reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile 

environments. 

• High-strength stainless steel actuator key … tolerant to 


• Several styles of actuator key … accommodate a wide 

variety of movable guards. 

• “Power-on” or “Power-off” latching option … for 

application versatility. 

• Built-in manual unlatching release (via special 

triangular key) … for easier installation. 

• “Padlockable” key … for added security during 

maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 

• Units available with quick-connect “ST”, screw 

terminals, or insulation displacement connectors (IDC). 

Two optional key entrances 

44 

® 

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL 

Solenoid-latch bypass/override key “-2197” 

(for locking via spring models only)

AZM170 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Order desired actuator key separately) 

Part Number Contact Configuration Connections 

Spring to Lock/Power to unlock 

AZM170-02ZRK 2NC IDC 

AZM170-11ZRK 1NO & 1NC IDC 

AZM170-02ZRK-ST-2197-* 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170-11ZRK-ST-2197-* 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170SK-02ZRK-2197-* 2NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-11ZRK-2197-* 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170ST-11/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170ST-11/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170ST-12/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170ST-12/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170SK-02/01ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-02/10ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NO Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-11/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-11/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-12/00ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / no contacts Screw Terminals 

Power to Lock – see Note 1 below 

AZM170-02ZRKA-* 2NC IDC 

AZM170-11ZRKA-* 1NO & 1NC IDC 

AZM170-02ZRKA-ST-* 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170-11ZRKA-ST-* 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170SK-02ZRKA-* 2NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-11ZRKA-* 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170ST-11/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170ST-11/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170ST-12/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170ST-12/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect 

AZM170SK-02/01ZRKA-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-02/10ZRKA-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NO Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-11/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-11/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals 

AZM170SK-12/00ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / no contacts Screw Terminals 

*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via the addition of one of 

the following suffix codes: 

Voltage 

Add Suffix 

24VAC/DC 

-24VAC/DC 

110VAC 

-110VAC 

230VAC 

-230VAC 

Note: Models with xx/yy contact designations are available as 24VAC/DC only. 

Note: See page 94 for appropriate connector cables for use with ST models. 


Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard 

to be opened in the event of a power failure. 

Generally accepted safety standards/practices 

suggest this model only be used after 

conducting a thorough risk evaluation in 

the context of the application. 

Part Number 

Description 

AZ17/170-B1 

Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

AZ17/170-B5 

Right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

AZM170-B6 

Flexible, close-radius key (1.97" minimum closing radius) 

AZ17/170-B11 

Elongated standard straight key (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

AZ17/170-B15 

Elongated right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

AZ17/170-B1-2245 

Standard straight key with vibration-resistant mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius) 

AZM-KEY 

Solenoid latch bypass/override key (for locking via spring models only) 

AZM170-B25-L-G1 

Door Handle actuator with star-grip for left-hand hinged guard 

AZM170-B25-L-G2 

Door Handle actuator with T-grip for left-hand hinged guard 

AZM170-B25-R-G1 

Door Handle actuator with star-grip for right-hand hinged guard 

AZM170-B25-R-G2 

Door Handle actuator with T-grip for right-hand hinged guard 

MS AZM 170-P 

*Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting 

MS AZM 170-R/P 

*Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or perpendicular mounting 

*MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys 

2 

45

AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 


thermoplastic 

Actuator Key 



Unlocked Key Holding 30N (7 pounds) 

Force 


Closing Force 


Locking Force 

Approx. 1000N (225 pounds) 


Solenoid Operating –7°F to +140°F 

Temperature 




EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-19 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

EN 954-1 

CSA 

Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6 actuating key) 

7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15 

actuating key) 









Solenoid Supply Voltages 

PIN ASSIGNMENTS 

for M12x1 

connectors 

Fine silver 


electrically separated contact bridges 

4A/230VAC 


contacts 

6A (time-delay) 

250V 

Screw terminals (SK), M12x1 quick 

connectors (ST), or insulation 

displacement connection (IDC) 

24VDC/AC 

110VAC 40-60 Hz 

230VAC 40-60 Hz 

Max. 10 Watts 


(Power-to-unlock) 


(Power-to-lock) 

11zrk (SK and IDC) 

02zrk (SK and IDC) 

11zrkA (SK and IDC) 

02zrkA (SK and IDC) 

A 1 

A2 

A 1 

A2 

14 

13 

22 21 

32 

12 

11 

22 21 

32 

11zrk-ST 

02zrk-ST 

11zrkA-ST 

02zrkA-ST 

11/02zrk (SK and ST) 11/11zrk (SK and ST) 11/02zrkA (SK and ST) 11/11zrkA (SK and ST) 

Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized. 

46


SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & 

CONTACT SCHEMATICS 

(Power-to-unlock) 



(Power-to-lock) 

12/02zrk (ST only) 

12/11zrk (ST only) 

12/02zrkA (ST only) 

12/11zrkA (ST only) 

2 

12/00zrk (SK only) 

12/00zrka (SK only) 





Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized. 

47

48 


DIMENSIONS 

108 

4.25 

24 

.94 

15 

.59 

90 

3.54 

23 

.91 

17 

.67 

8,2 

.32 

ca. 24 

.94 

76,5 

3.01 

31 

1.22 

ø 4,2 

.17 

ø4-10 

.16-.39 

45 

1.77 

M16 

30 

1.18 

8 

.31 

22 

.81 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

30 

1.18 22 

.87 20 

.79 

23 

.91 

2 

.08 

10 

.40 

33 

1.30 

4,3 

.17 

5,5 

.27 

AZ17/170-B1 

30 

1.18 

30 

1.18 

22 

.87 

4,3 

.17 

25 

.98 

20 

.79 

12 

.47 

23 

.91 

16 

.63 

2 

.08 

48 

1.89 

AZ17/170-B15 

30 

1.18 22 

.87 20 

.79 

8 

.31 

23 

.91 

12 

.47 

2 

.08 

36 

1.41 

7,5 

.30 

13 

.51 

4,3 

.17 

AZ17/170-B5 

28 

1.10 

12 

.47 

11 

.43 

7 

.28 

24 

.94 

4 

.16 

32 

1.26 

2 

08 

22 

.87 

30 

1.18 

20 

.79 

23 

.91 

b 

a 

a 

b 

AZM170-B6 

30 

1.18 22 

.87 20 

.79 

23 

.91 

2 

.08 

60,5 

2.38 

37,5 

1.48 

33 

1.30 

4,3 

.17 

AZ17/170-B11 

ø11 

.43 

18 

.71 

8 

.31 

13 

.51 

ø4,2 

.17 

23 

.91 

36 

1.42 

30 

1.18 

AZ17/170-B1-2245 

mm 

inch 

M20


DIMENSIONS ST QUICK CONNECT MODELS 

B25 Door Handle Actuator 

2 

Note: For more information on B25 door 

handles, see page 82. 

MS AZM 170 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT 



MS AZM 170-P 

(for parallel 

mounting) 



perpendicular 

mounting) 

49

AZM161 

Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch 

Description 

The AZM161 Series is designed for machines/work cells 








and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. There is a mechanical 

linkage preventing the solenoid position contacts from 

changing unless the key is inserted (guard closed). 

The AZM161 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock 

switch section with “positive-break” NC contacts and an 

actuator key. In addition, the solenoid mechanism features 1 

NO and 2 NC solenoid-latching monitoring contacts, and an 

auxiliary manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid 

in installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when 


Operation 

The AZM161 electromechanical safety interlock switch 

assembly consists of a rugged switch-solenoid-latching 

mechanism and a geometrically-unique locking actuator key. 

The switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable 

machine guard. 

When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position 

by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be 

opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon 

model) the solenoid-latching mechanism. 

Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC 

contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) 

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts 

close upon key removal. 

The machine is prevented from starting until the actuating key 

is inserted (guard is closed) and the solenoid has locked it in 

the closed position. 


• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous 

areas until safe conditions exist. 





• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully 

inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before 

“closed” safety signal is provided. 

• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental 

requirements. 



• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile 

environments. 


flexibility. 

• Independent actuator key position and locking pin 

position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree 

of safety. 

• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking” 

models … for application versatility. 



EN 954-1. 




The AZM161 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 





applications are textile machines, stamping presses, 



Optional Safety Controller (see page 320) and 

Standstill Monitor (see page 363). 

50

AZM161 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter. 

Actuator key ordered separately.) 


Spring to Lock 

AZM161CC-12/12RK-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps 

AZM161CC-12/12RKT-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps 

AZM161CC-12/12RKN-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps 

AZM161SK-12/12RK-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals 

AZM161SK-12/12RKT-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals 

AZM161SK-12/12RKN-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals 

Power to Lock (see Note 1 below) 

AZM161CC-12/12RKA-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps 

AZM161SK-12/12RKA-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals 

* Please specify solenoid operating voltage: 

-024 for 24V AC/DC 

-110/230 for 110/230V AC 

Solenoid By-Pass Options (on spring to lock models): 

Suffix “T” indicates Emergency Exit Release 

(for units mounted inside hazardous area) 

Suffix “N” indicates Emergency Release 

(for units mounted outside hazardous area) 

See page 53 for diagrams 

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be 

opened in the event of a power failure. Generally 

accepted safety standards/practices suggest this 

model only be used after conducting a thorough 

risk evaluation in the context of the application. 

® 


AVAILABLE KEYS & ACCESSORIES 

Part Number 

MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys 

Description 

AZM161-B1 Standard actuating key 

AZM161-B1E Standard actuating key with heavy-duty 

mounting bracket 

AZM161-B6 Small radius actuating key 

AZM161-B6-2177 Funnel entry adapter with elongated 

flexible-movement actuating key 

AZM161-STS30-01 

AZM161-STS30-02 

AZM161-STS30-03 

AZM161-STS30-04 

AZM161-STS30-05 

AZM161-STS30-06 

AZM161-STS30-07 

AZM161-STS30-08 

AZM-Key 

M16-CG 

STS door handle systems for use with 

AZM161. See page 77 for details and 

selection guide. 

Solenoid-latch bypass key 


M16- 1 ⁄2"P Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter 

M16- 1 ⁄2"M Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter 

PL-M16-24V 

PL-M16-120V 

MS AZM 161-P 




Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting 


perpendicular mounting 

2 

MS AZM 161 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT 

(Eases installation and facilitates adjustments due to guard misalignment) 




MS AZM 161-P 

(for parallel mounting) 

51



Housing 


thermoplastic 

Actuator Key 




Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds) 

Travel for Positive-Break 8mm (0.315 inches) 


10N (Approx. 2.4 pounds) 


Closing Force 






EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-19 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

EN 954-1 

CSA 

Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (440 pounds) 

Key Return Force 0N 

Minimum Closing Radius 5.9" (150mm) with B1 and B1E 

actuating key 

3.7" (95mm) with B6 actuating key 



Fine silver 



bridges 


2 × 2 mm (minimum) 


4A (230VAC) 



contacts 

Short Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay) 


Rated Impulse 

6kV 


Type Terminals* 

Screw terminals 

Cage Clamps 

Available Solenoid 

24VDC, 110VDC, 230VDC 

Supply Voltages (Vs) 24VAC/50Hz 

115VAC/60Hz 

230VAC/50Hz 

Solenoid Power 

10W (maximum) 

Consumption 

Solenoid Duty Cycle 100% 

Solenoid Pull-in Voltage (0.85 to 1.1) Vs 

Solenoid Drop-out Voltage (0.2 to 0.75) Vs 

*Optional quick disconnect versions available. 


SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Solenoid-mechanism not energized) 

AZM 161SK-12/12rk 

AZM 161SK-12/12rka 

52 

Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.


DIMENSIONS (Switch & Actuator Keys) 

8 

.31 

40 

1.57 

78 

3.07 

72 

2.83 

Ø 4 

.18 

29 

1.14 

30 

1.18 

30 

1.18 

7 

.28 

18 

.71 

90 

3.54 

5,5 

.22 

M16 

M16 

M16 

130 

5.12 

56 

2.20 

30 

1.18 

10 

.39 

ø 5,5 

.22 

56 

2.20 

5 

.2 

40 + 

- 0 

1.57 

56 

2.20 

16 

.63 

32,7 

1.29 

32,7 

1.29 

30 

1.18 

14 

.55 

5 

2 

mm 

inch 

AZM161-B1 AZM161-B1E AZM161-B6 

b 

2 

.08 

.20 

ø5,5 

.22 

ø10,5 

.41 

11 

a 

16 

.63 

.43 

27 

1.06 

2 

.08 

27 

1.06 

2 

.08 

ø5,5 

.22 

40 

1.57 

a 

b 

Solenoid Latch By-pass Release examples (spring-to-lock models) 

standard model manual 

release point by-pass 

using separate 

AZM-Key 

Type "T" integrated Emergency Exit 

release lever for mounting 

inside hazardous area 

Type "N" integrated release 

lever for mounting outside 

hazardous area 

53

SERIES AZM 200 

Description 

The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells 







The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and 

actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit 

handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing, 

protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and 

injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator 

and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator 

still engages the interlock. 

Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle, 

the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during 

a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model). 

The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two 

short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can 

switch up to 250 mA. 



up to 31 AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in series 

without detriment to the safety performance level/control 

category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1/Control Category 4 to 

EN 954-1). 


The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 





applications are textile machines, stamping machines, 

metal working equipment, printing presses and 

packaging machines. 

54 


Non-Contact Solenoid Interlock 


• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous 



• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no 




satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1 Safety 

Control Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note Below. 


left quickly and safely—even during a power failure. 

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door opening … 

no risk of injury or damage from a protruding actuator. 

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility. 

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max 

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety 

performance level. 

AVAILABLE AZM200 MODELS 

Part Number 

Description 

Spring to Lock, Power to unlock 

AZM200SK-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals) 

AZM200SK-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw 

Terminals) 

AZM200ST1-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick 

connect, 9 pin) 

AZM200ST1-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1 

quick connect, 9 pin) 





AZM200ST-T1P2P-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton & 

LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin) 

Power to Lock, Spring to unlock 

AZM200SK-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals) 

AZM200SK-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw 

Terminals) 

AZM200ST1-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick 


AZM200ST1-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1 






AZM200ST-T1P2PA-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton & 


ACTUATORS 

Part Number 

Description 


left 


left with inside emergency door release 


right 



release 






with inside emergency door release

SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS 


Description: 

Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks 

Connector Cables for ST Models 

Please see page 94 for appropriate connector cable part numbers. 

ST1 versions use M12, 8 pin connectors 

(part numbers starting A-K8P-M12...) 


(part numbers starting A-K8+1-M23...) 

ST versions use M23, 12 pin connectors 


*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with 


2 

Safety Control Module Requirements Dualchannel 

safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. See 

page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL safety control modules. 

*Note: A safety control module may be required for 

reset function and/or feedback monitoring functions, 

as well as increased output current requirements. 

AZM200...2568 includes pushbutton 

for authorized release at switch site. 



55

SERIES MZM 100 

Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching Interlock 


• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous 

areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding 

force). 

• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear 

due to non-contact design. 



satisfy requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, Control 

Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note Below. 




• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical 

latching required (“r” version only). 

• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where 

high hygienic standards need to be maintained. 


AVAILABLE MZM100 MODELS 

Description 

The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells 


until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature 



abated. 

The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and 

actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N 

holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects 

and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor 

technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock 

of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal. 

The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel 

design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of 

which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently 

electronically measured and monitored. If the holding 

force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled, 

recognizing a dirty interlock. 



up to 31 MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired 

in series without detriment to the Safety Performance Level 

control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/Control Category 4 

per EN954-1). 


The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 






food processing equipment, metal working equipment, 

wood working and packaging machines. 

Part Number 

MZM100ST-1P2PA 

MZM100ST-SD2PA 

MZM100ST-1P2PRA 

MZM100ST-SD2PRA 

Description 

2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic 

output 

2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic 

output* 

2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic 

output, with variable latching (30N to 

240N) 

2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic 

output*, with variable latching (30N to 

240N) 



ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES 

Part Number 

Description 

MZM100-B1.1 

Actuator 

MS MZM 100-W 

Mounting Set 

Note: For appropriate connector cable, please see page 96. 

Order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23... 


Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor 

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL 

safety control modules. 

Note: A safety control module may be required for reset 

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as 

well as increased output current requirements. 

56

SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic 


Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only) 

Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds) 


Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C 

Response Time 

≤ 100ms 

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm 

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms 



Mounting 

40mm profiles 

Conformity to Standards CE BG 

EN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA 

EN 954-1 EN ISO 13849-1 

IEC 61508 


Mode of Operation Magentic & Inductive 

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10% 

Rated Operating Current 1.0A 

No Load Current 0.5A 

Residual Current 

≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 


Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC 

Safety Outputs 

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof 

Safety Output 

0.25A per output 

Operating Current 

Safety Output 

Max. 4V below rated 

Operating Voltage operating voltage 

Signaling Output 

PNP, short-circuit proof 

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A 





Termination 

Connector M23x1 

2 



57

SERIES TZF/TZM 

Description 

The TZF/TZM Series is designed for machines/work cells 








and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the 



The TZF/TZM Series consists of an electromechanical safety 

interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking 

actuator key. In addition, the TZFS model features an auxiliary 




Operation 

The TZF/TZM Series of electromechanical safety interlock 

switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated 

latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique 

actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to 

a movable machine guard. 


by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by 

energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the 

latching mechanism. 





The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and 

a NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC 

contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety 

switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting 

until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the 

solenoid has locked it in the closed position. 

Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching 



• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls 

access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist. 







“closed” safety signal is provided. 


requirements. 




environments. 

• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator 




of safety. 


maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 



• Special types for food industry … please consult factory. 


The TZF/TZM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock 

switch on movable machine guards which must not be 

opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the 

removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel 

overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. 

Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses, 



TZF (SPRING TO LOCK) RELEASE OPTIONS 

TZF…S manual keyed release 

Use TZ-69 or 

TZ-75 key to 

release solenoid 

and reset 

TZF…N Emergency release knob 

Pull knob to release Solenoid, 

reset with the 

TZ-69 or 

TZ-75 key 

58 

® 


SERIES TZF/TZM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter and 

TZ/CO Standard Actuator key) 

Part Number 

TZFS-* 

TZFCS-* 

TZFWS-* 

TZFCWS 

TZM-* 

TZMC-* 

TZMW-* 

TZMCW 

*Please indicate desired operation voltage: 

Voltage: 

Suffix: 

24VDC 

no suffix 

115VAC -115 

230VAC -230 


Spring lock / Power to unlock 

2 NC (series) & 1 NO 


2 NC (parallel) & 1 NO 


Power to lock / spring unlock (see Note 1 below) 





For Spring to Lock (TZF) models: 

For a manual emergency release, change “S” to “N” in the 

part number (TZFN) 

OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES 

Part Number 

Description 

TZ/CO 



TZ/CW 



TZ/COR Radial entry actuator key 


TZ/CK 

Short straight actuator key 


TZ/CWR Right-angled bent actuator key 


TZ/COF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted) 


TZ/COF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted) 


TZ/CORF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted) 


TZ/CORF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted) 


TZ-69 

Straight safety interlock auxiliary release key 

(for TZF models) 

TZ-75 

Right-angled safety interlock auxiliary release 

key (for TZF models) 

2 

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock 

model permits the guard 

to be opened in the event 

of a power failure. 

Generally accepted safety 

standards/practices suggest 

this model only be 

used after conducting a 

thorough risk evaluation 

in the context of the 

application. 

DIMENSIONS 

TZ/69 

Three-square socket wrench 

for versions TZF…(supplied) 

59

SERIES TZF/TZM TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 


thermoplastic 

Actuator Key 




Unlocked Holding Force 20N (4.8 pounds) 

Travel for Positive-Break 14.5 mm 




Closing Force 





Shock Resistance 30g / 11ms 

Vibration Resistance 20g / 10…55Hz 

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL 

EN 60947-5-1 CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 

EN 954-1 

CE 

BG-GS-ET-15 


Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key used. 

Please see actuator key selection 

chart. 









Rated Impulse 




Voltages 

Fine silver 



bridges 

Guard monitoring: 2 × 3.5 mm 

Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 3 mm 

8A (250VAC) 


contacts 


250VAC 

4kV 





24VDC 

115VAC 

230VAC 


8.8W (maximum) 




TZM (power-to-lock) models 


TZF (spring lock/power-to-unlock) models 

TZM 

TZMW 

TZFS 

TZFWS 

TZMC 

TZMCW 

TZFCS 

TZFCWS 

Note: Drawings show contact state with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized. 

60

SERIES TZF/TZM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

TZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR 

2 

TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2 

TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK 

61

SERIES TKF/TKM 

Description 

The TKF/TKM Series is designed for machines/work cells 








and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the 



The TKF/TKM Series consists of an electromechanical safety 

interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking 

actuator key. In addition, the TKFS model features an auxiliary 




Operation 

The TKF/TKM Series of electromechanical safety interlock 

switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated 

latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique 

actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to 

a movable machine guard. 


by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by 

energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the 

latching mechanism. 





The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and a 

NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC 

contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety 

switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting 

until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the 

solenoid has locked it in the closed position. 




• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls 

access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist. 







“closed” safety signal is provided (Series TKM). 


requirements. 



• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates 


• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator 




of safety. 


maintenance. 



EN 954-1. 



• Special types available for concealed installation … 

please consult factory. 


The TKF/TKM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock 


opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the 






62 

® 


SERIES TKF/TKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter. Actuator key sold separately) 

Part Number Solenoid Operating Voltage Contacts Description 

TKF/90 

TKF/*/90 

24VDC 

115/230VAC (50/60Hz) 

2NC & 2 NO 

(NC contacts 

in series) 

“Series” actuating key locked by spring and unlocked by 

energizing solenoid 

TKM/90 

TKM/*/90 

TKF/R/90 

TKF/R*/90 

24VDC 

115/230VAC (50/60Hz) 

24VDC 

115/230VAC (50/60Hz) 

2NC & 2 NO 

(NC contacts 

in series) 

2NC & 2 NO 

(NC contacts 

in series) 

“Series” actuating key locked by energizing solenoid and 

unlocked by spring (See Note 1 below) 

“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion) locked 

by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid 

2 

TKM/R/90 

TKM/R*/90 

24VDC 

115/230VAC (50/60Hz) 

2NC & 2 NO 

(NC contacts 

in series) 

“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion) 

locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring 

(See Note 1 below) 

TKF/L/90 

TKF/L*/90 

24VDC 

115/230VAC (50/60Hz) 

2NC & 2 NO 

(NC contacts 

in series) 

“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion) locked 

by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid 

TKM/L/90 

TKM/L*/90 

24VDC 

115/230VAC (50/60Hz) 

2NC & 2 NO 

(NC contacts 

in series) 

“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion) 

locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring 

(See Note 1 below) 

* Insert 115 for 115VAC model 

Insert 230 for 230VAC model 

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be opened in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted 

safety standards/ practices suggest this model only be used after conducting a thorough risk evaluation in the 

context of the application. 

Part Number 

TK/R/90 

TK/RF/90 

TK/P/90 

TK/PF/90 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

Description 

Standard “Series” actuator key (For sliding guards 

only) 

“Series” actuator key with telescopic section (For 

sliding guards only) 

“Parallel” actuator key for right- or left-hand 

insertion (10” minimum closing radius) 

“Parallel” actuator key (with telescopic section) for 

right- or left-hand insertion (10” minimum closing 

radius) 

63

SERIES TKF/TKM TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Cast aluminum, enamel finish 

Actuator Key & 

Steel, chromated 

Locking Bolt 



Unlocked Holding Force 5N (1.2 pounds) 

Travel for Positive-Break 72 mm (“Series” actuator) 

38 mm (“Parallel” actuator) 




Closing Force 


Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F 



Shock Resistance 30g / 18ms 

Vibration Resistance 20g / 2…100Hz 


EN 60947-5-1 CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 

EN 954-1 

CE 

BG-GS-ET-15 


Minimum Closing Radius 250mm (“Parallel” actuator) 









Rated Impulse 




Voltages 

Fine silver 



bridges 

Guard monitoring: 2 × 3 mm 

Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 2 mm 

8A (250VAC) 


contacts 


250VAC 

4kV 





24VDC 

115VAC/230VAC 


12.0W (maximum) 



DIMENSIONS 

64

SERIES TKF/TKM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS 

ACTUATOR KEYS 

“Series”TK/R/90 

(For sliding guards only) 

“Series”TK/RF/90 (With telescopic section) 


2 


“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/P/90 

“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/PF/90 (With telescopic section) 

65

SERIES TZKF/TZKM 

Description 

The TZK Series is designed for machines/work cells where 

access to a hazardous work area must be controlled until safe 

conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature permits 

locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions, which 

may exist immediately after removal of power, have abated. 

Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay, motion 

detector, position sensor or other suitable component. 

The unit’s contact arrangement permits the prevention of a 

machine restart until the guard is closed and in the locked 

position. 

Each unit is supplied with a 1 ⁄2" NPT conduit adapter. 

Operation 

The TZK Series electromechanical safety interlock switch 

consists of a rugged switch with a solenoid-latching 

mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The 

switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable 



by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be 



Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s ”positive-break” NC 











• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit interruption 

upon key removal. 

• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental sealing 

requirements. 

• Positive locking … integral mechanical interlock prevents 

solenoid latching until actuating key is fully inserted. 

• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical 






• Optional “floating” actuator key … tolerates up to 5mm of 

guard misalignment without damage. 



EN 954-1. 

• Rotatable actuating head … four user-selectable 90° 

positions for installation flexibility. 

• Funnel entry … forgiving of minor guard misalignment. 

• Optional spring-loaded actuator keys … tolerates axial 

misalignment of guard. 

• Built-in key entry dust cover … prevents ingress of dirt 

and dust when key is removed. 


The TZK Series is intended for use as a safety interlock 


opened until dangerous conditions, that may exist after the 




articulating robot arms, mixing machines, heavy working 


Release Options for TZKF (locking via spring models) 

TZKF…S 

Auxiliary Release 

TZ-75 

TZKF…N 

Emergency Release 

TZ-69 

66 

® 


SERIES TZKF/TZKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 


(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter. 

Order desired actuator key separately.) 

Part Number 

TZKF/BS* 

TZKF/CS* 

TZKF/ES* 

TZKF/HS 

TZKF/KS 

TZKF/MS 

TZKF/PS 

TZKM/B* 

TZKM/C* 

TZKM/E* 

TZKM/H 

TZKM/K 

TZKM/M 

TZKM/P 

Contacts (Key/Solenoid) 

Spring lock, Power to unlock 

1 NC / 2 NC 

1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO / 2 NC 

2 NC / 2 NC 

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC 

Power to lock, spring unlock (see Note 1 below) 

1 NC / 2 NC 

1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO / 2 NC 

2 NC / 2 NC 

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC 

*Please indicate desired operation voltage: 

Voltage: 

Suffix: 

24VDC 

no suffix 

115VAC -115 

230VAC -230 

Example: TZKF/CS-115 

For Spring to Lock (TZKF) models: 

For a manual emergency release, change 

"S" to "N" in the part number (TZKF/BN) 

Part Number 

TZK/CO 

TZK/CW 

TZK/COF 

TZK/CORF/7.5 

TZK/CORF/15 

TZK/APL 

TZ-69 

TZ-75 


Description 

Standard straight actuating key 

Standard right-angle actuating key 

Spring-loaded actuator key tolerates axial 

movement of +7.5°/-15° or -7.5°/+15° 

depending upon mounting orientation 

Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key 

tolerates axial movement of +7.5° or -7.5° 


Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key 

tolerates axial movement of +15° or -15° 


Mounting adapter plate facilitates easy 

alignment between actuating key and interlock 

Standard straight auxiliary release key 

(for TZKF models) 

Right-angle auxiliary release key 

(for TZKF models) 

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be 

opened in the event of a power failure. Generally 

accepted safety standards/practices suggest this 

model only be used after conducting a thorough 

risk evaluation in the context of the application. 

2 

DIMENSIONS (Basic Switch & Optional Mounting Adapter Plate) 

89 

3.50 32 

1.26 

12 

.47 

2,3 

.09 

TZK/APL 

Mounting Adapter Plate 

M6 

70 

2.76 

6 

.24 

50 

1.97 

12 

.47 

45 

1.77 

30 

1.18 

116 

4.57 

178 

7.01 

6 

.24 

6 

.24 

178 

7.01 

193 

7.60 

206 

8.11 

4,5 

.18 

72 

2.83 

M20x1 

12 

.47 

14,5 

5.7 

6,5 

.26 

24 

.94 

29,5 

1.16 

22,5 

.89 

6 

.24 

22 

.87 

17,5 

.69 

12 

.47 

41 

1.61 

mm 

inch 

67

7,5° 

SERIES TZKF/TZKM TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 


thermoplastic 

Actuator Key 




Key Insertion Force 10 N (2.2 pounds) 

Key Holding Force 20 N (4.4 pounds) 

(without solenoid-latching) 


Operating Temperature +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C) 


2 x 10 6 Operations (minimum) 

Mounting Orientation Any position 

Solenoid Override Manual release from front surface 

Slack Resistance 30g / 11ms 

Vibration Resistance 20g / 10-55Hz 

Switching Frequency 120 cycles/hour (maximum) 

Conformity to Standards IEC 947 CE 

EN 60947 UL 


EN 954-1 

BG-GS-ET-19 

Minimum Closing Radius 6.9" (175mm) for CO and CORF 

actuating key 

9.8" (250mm) for CW actuating key 

5.9" (150mm) for COF actuating key 



Silver-plated, gold 

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break, 


bridges 

Contact Rating 8A/250VAC (AC 15) 

13A/24VDC (DC13) 



NC contacts 

Short Circuit Protection 10A 


Rated Impulse Withstand 2.5 KV 

Voltage 



cable clamps for up to 13AWG 

flexible stranded wire (1.5mm 2 ) 

Available Solenoid Voltages 24VDC 

115VAC/50-60 Hz 

230VAC/50-60 Hz 


10W (maximum) 




TZK/CO Straight Actuating Key 

TZK/CW Right-Angle Actuating Key 

52 

2.07 

6,5 

.26 

53,5 

2.11 

3 

.12 

8 

.31 

11 

.43 

30 

1.18 

13,5 

.53 

20 

.79 

4,3 

.17 

48 

1.89 

6,5 

.26 

8,5 

.33 

57,5 

2.26 

25 

.98 

32 

1.26 

13,5 

.53 

40 

1.57 

13 

.51 

30 

1.18 45 

1.77 

TZK/CORF/15 Flexibly-Mounted “Floating” 

Actuator Key 

TZK/CORF/7.5 Pre-Tensioned 

Flexibly-Mounted Actuator Key 

48 

1.89 

6,5 

.26 

8,5 

.33 

57,5 

2.26 

3 

.12 

25 

.98 

32 

1.26 

3 

.12 

15° 

60 

2.36 

16,5 

.65 

48 

1.89 

16,5 

.65 

13,5 

.53 

13,5 

.53 

68

SERIES TZKF/TZKM TECHNICAL DATA 

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS — TZKM (power-to-lock) models 

TZKM/B 

TZKM/C 

TZKM/E 

TZKM/H 

2 

TZKM/K 

TZKM/M 

TZKM/P 

Note: 

Drawings show contact state 


and solenoid de-energized. 

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS — TZKF (spring lock/power to unlock) models 

TZKF/BS 

TZKF/CS 

TZKF/ES 

TZKF/HS 

TZKF/KS 

TZKF/MS 

TZKF/PS 

Note: 

Drawings show contact state 


and solenoid de-energized. 

69

SERIES AZM415 

Description 

The AZM415 Series is designed for movable machine guards 





abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time-delay, 


Latching may occur upon energizing or de-energizing the 

solenoid — depending upon model. In addition the AZM415 

features “positive-break” NC contacts, and an adjustable-force 

ball latch which maintains a holding force on the guard when 

the key is in the unlocked state. 

A two-key model is also available for guards which may be 

open in two directions (Model AZM415-33zpdk). 

Operation 

The AZM415 two-piece electromechanical safety interlock 

switch consists of a rugged switch and solenoid-latching 

mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The 

switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable 


When the guard is closed, the actuator key is locked in 

position by a toggle-lever system. The guard may only be 



Upon opening of the guard the switch’s “positive-break” NC 




70 

Safety controller see page 320, 

Speed monitors see page 363 






• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat. 




• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical 


• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the 


• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds 

… permits use of switch as door latch. 





EN 954-1. 

• *Increased locking force … up to 560 pounds. 

• Patented toggle-lever locking system … facilitates easy 

unlocking of (even heavily misaligned) guards. 

• Two-key model … for double-sided guards (AZM415-33zpdk). 

• Optional B4 Actuator Key … prevents unintentional guard 

closure. 


(Actuator key ordered separately) 

Part Number 

Contacts (solenoid/key) 

Spring to Lock 

AZM415-02/02ZPK-* 

2 NC / 2 NC 

AZM415-02/11ZPK-* 

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZM415-02/20ZPK-* 

2 NC / 2 NO 

AZM415-11/02ZPK-* 

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC 

AZM415-11/11ZPK-* 

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZM415-11/20ZPK-* 

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO 

Spring to Lock, with maunal release 

AZM415-02/02ZPKT-24VAC/DC 2 NC / 2 NC 

AZM415-02/11ZPKT 24VAC/DC 2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZM415-02/20ZPKT 24VAC/DC 2 NC / 2 NO 

AZM415-11/02ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC 

AZM415-11/11ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZM415-11/20ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO 

Power to Lock (see Note 1 below) 

AZM415-02/02ZPKA-* 

2 NC / 2 NC 

AZM415-02/11ZPKA-* 

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZM415-02/20-ZPKA-* 

2 NC / 2 NO 

AZM415-11/02-ZPKA-* 

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC 

AZM415-11/11ZPKA-* 

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC 

AZM415-11/20ZPKA-* 

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO 

*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of the 

following suffix codes: 

-24VAC/DC -110VAC -230VAC 

ACTUATING KEYS 

Part Number 

Description 

AZ/AZM415-B1 

Linear entry actuator key 

(For sliding lift-off guards) 

AZ/AZM415-B2 

Small radius (250mm) x-axis entry actuator 

key (For hinged guards) 

AZ/AZM415-B3 

Small radius (250mm) y-radius entry actuator 

key (For hinged guards) 

AZ/AZM415-B4PS Slide bolt actuator key (For sliding guards) 

AZM415-STS30… 

STS door handle systems. See page 77 for 

details and selection guide. 

® 




Housing 

Die-cast aluminum with blue 

enamel finish 

Actuator Key 

key shaft: Zinc coated brass 

mounting block: Zinc coated steel 


Travel for Positive-Break 5mm (0.2 inches) 



Solenoid Locking Force 

Actuator Key 

Holding Force 

Operating Temperature 


Depending upon ball catch setting 

(3.5 pounds minimum) 

560 pounds 

Adjustable, 80 to 400 N 

-13°F to +175°F 



BG-GS-ET-19 CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 

EN 954-1 

CE 

Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm) 









Rated Impulse 

Withstand 



Supply Voltages (Vs) 

Fine silver 



bridges 

2mm x 2mm 

4A (230VAC) 


contacts 


250VAC 

4kV 


clamps for up to 13AWG 

flexible stranded wire (1.5 mm 2 ) 

24VAC/DC 

115VAC/60Hz 

230VAC/50Hz 


10W (maximum) 



2 

DIMENSIONS 

M20 

Model with “T” 

manual override 

71


WIRING SCHEMATICS 

AZM415xx/yyZPK (Power-to-unlock) 

11/11 

WIRING SCHEMATICS 

AZM415xx/yyZPKA (Power-to-lock) 

11/11 

11/02 

11/02 

11/20 

11/20 

02/11 

02/11 

02/02 

02/02 

02/20 

02/20 

72 Contacts shown with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.

9 



B4pS Actuator for Hand Operated Locking 

B1 Actuator 

125 

4.92 

55 

2.17 

0-6 

0-.24 

56 

2.20 

20 

.79 

21 

.83 

35 

1.38 

237 

9.33 

22 

.87 

8 

.35 

.35 

18,5 

69,5 

2.74 

2 

19 

.75 

30 

1.18 

6,5 

.26 

10

74 

Safer 

by 

Design

APPLICATION ACCESSORIES 

STS Safety Handle 

Assembly 

B25 

Safety Door Handle 

TG 


3 

Page 76 

Page 82 

Page 84 

ZSD 

Enabling Device 

TFH 

Safety Foot Switch 

SEPK(G) Two-Hand 

Control Consoles 

Page 88 

Page 90 

Page 92 

TFA/TFI 

Guard Alignment Aid 

Connection 

Cables 

Page 81 

Page 94 

75

SERIES STS 

Safety Guard Door-Handle System 

(with Emergency Release Option) 


• Suited for all types of guards ... for application versatility. 

• Dual-purpose handle ... unlatches and opens guard. 

No additional door handles are needed. 

• Optional inside “emergency” release handle available ... 

heightens system safety level. 

• Interlock switch mountable from inside or outside 

guard … for application flexibility. 

• Rugged, durable design ... actuator designed for 15,000 N 

(3,400 pounds) of shear force. 

• Mechanical design facilitates easy actuator key 

withdrawal ... without “sticking” or “binding.” 

• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... provides for 

emergency egress. 

Description 

The STS door handle system consists of one safety interlock 

switch (ordered separately), an actuator key and handle 

assembly (with or without emergency release handle), 

mounting plates, and an optional lockout/tagout device. An 

optional red interior release handle is available which opens 

the guard from the inside in case of an emergency. 

Operation 

Should someone find themselves in a hazardous area and 

the guard is accidentally closed, the guard can be opened 

from the inside by turning the optional emergency handle (2). 

Locking of the guard from the inside is not possible. 

When using the optional emergency handle with a solenoidlatching 

keyed interlock switch (AZM161 or AZM415), always 

order the version with an emergency unlocking feature. In this 

case the emergency latching release button or knob (1) 

provided with this model must be actuated before operating 

the emergency release handle (2). 


Part Number 

Description 

MP TG-01 Handle mounting plate for 

inside mounted actuators 

TFA-010 

TFI-010 

TFA-020 

TFI-020 

SZ 415-1 

SZ 415-2 


Please see page 77 

Alignment aid for outside mounting 

(for hinged guards) 

Alignment aid for inside mounting 



(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY) 


(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY) 

Lockout tag for STS30-01/-03/-06/-08 

Lockout tag for STS30-02/-04/-05/-07 

76

SERIES STS 

SELECTION TABLE & ORDERING GUIDE: SAFETY DOOR-HANDLE SYSTEM 

Actuator 

Mounting Position 

Actuator 

Door Hinge 

With 

emergency handle 

Inside 

Right 

➛ 

XX-STS30-01* 

Left 

➛ 

XX-STS30-02* 

Outside 

Right 

XX-STS30-05 

3 

Left 

XX-STS30-06 

➛ 

➛ 

Without 

emergency handle 

Inside 

Right 

Left 

➛ ➛ 

XX-STS30-03* 

XX-STS30-04* 

Outside 

Right 

XX-STS30-07 

Left 

XX-STS30-08 

➛ 

➛ 

*For actuators mounted on the inside, mounting plate MP TG-01 

(ordered separately) must be used to mount the door handle 

when the door frame width is smaller than the handle. 

➛ 

➛ 

View from outside the hazardous area 

View from inside the hazardous area 

77

SERIES STS 

TO ORDER COMPLETE STS DOOR HANDLE SYSTEM 

STS Door Handle Systems are available with actuator keys for the following switch series: 

AZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 13 

AZ3550* . . . . . . . . . . see page 32 

AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . see page 38 

AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . see page 51 

AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . see page 70 

1. Complete the STS door handle catalog number on the previous page by replacing 

XX with the desired safety interlock switch. 

2. Order Safety Switch separately. 

*Please note: STS door handles to be used with AZ3350 

switches require special versions of the switch with the actuator 

head rotated to the left (U90) or right (U270) to accommodate 

key entry when properly mounted. Please order one of these 

part numbers: 

Model 

Description 

AZ3350-12zuek-U90 

AZ3350-12zuek-U270 

AZ3350-03zk-U90 

AZ3350-03zk-U270 

Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left 

Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right 

Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left 

Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right 

Example: To order a safety door handle system with a right-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle, 

for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 415-11/11XPKT-24 VAC/DC safety inerlock switch, 

order SCHMERSAL part numbers: 

• AZM 415-STS30-01 

• AZM-11/11XPKT-24 VAC/DC 

Note: If door frame is smaller than the handle assembly, also order the MP TG-01 Mounting Plate 

Example: To order a safety door handle system with a left-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle, 

for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 161SK-12/12RKT safety inerlock switch, order 

SCHMERSAL part numbers: 

• AZM 161-STS30-02 

• AZM 161SK-12/12RKT 

78

SERIES STS DIMENSIONS 

AZ 16-STS30-… 

AZ 3350-STS30-… 

AZ 415-STS30-… 

AZ 16 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07 

AZ 3350 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07 

AZ 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07 

3 

AZ 16 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08 

AZ 3350 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08 

AZ 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08 

AZM 161-STS30-… 

AZM 415-STS30-… 

AZM 161 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07 

AZM 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07 

AZM 161 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08 

AZM 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08 

Side View Dimensions 

Inside Mounting 

STS30-01/-02/-03/-04 

Outside Mounting 

STS30-05/-06/-07/-08 

79

SERIES STS ACCESSORIES 

Lockout Accessory 

MP TG-01 Handle Mounting Plate 

ORDERING DETAILS 

Lockout Tag 

for … STS30-01/-03/-06/-08 SZ 415-1 

for … STS30-02/-04/-05/-07 SZ 415-2 

80

SERIES TFA/TFI 

Guard Alignment Aid 


• Self-aligning … self-centering design helps align guard. 

• End-stop … functions as end-stop to protect guard from 

excessive shock on closing. 

• Easy-to-install … on inside or outside of guard. 

• Reduces maintenance … minimizes risk of downtime due 

to misaligned guard. 

• Suitable for retrofit … on existing guards. 


Part Number 

Description 

TFA-010 

TFI-010 

TFA-020 

TFI-020 






(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY) 


(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY) 

3 

TFA Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting) 

• Mounting outside 

• Self-centering of the guard door 

• End stop 

• Suitable for all types of actuators 

• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted 

TFI Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting) 

• Mounting inside 

• Self-centering of the guard door 

• End stop 

• Suitable for all types of actuators 

• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted 

81

SERIES B25 

Safety Door Handle System 

for AZ17 Interlock Switches 


• Ergonomically-designed door handles … for easy 

operation. 

• Pre-machined mounting plates … for easy installation. 

• Dual-purpose handle … releases interlock acutator key 

and opens guard. 

• Low-profile design … minimizes protruding handle. 

• No protruding actuator … recessed actuator key when 

guard is open makes for safer installation. 

• User flexibility … actuator can be supplied without 

handle. Users can mount their own handle design on the 

integral, pre-tapped (M6) 8mm square shaft. 

Description 

The Series BN25 is designed to allow easy realization of a 

combination door handle and safety interlock for use on light 

to medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each 

unit consists of a door handle assembly with integral handle 

and safety interlock actuator key for operating a Series 

AZ17…zrk interlock switch. 

Operation 

Upon manual turning of the star-grip or T-grip handle, the 

safety interlock switch actuator key is withdrawn from the 

switch body … opening the positive-break, normally-closed 

switch contacts (and, if so equipped, closing the normallyopen 

switch contact). 

Opening the normally-closed safety contact(s) removes power 

to the machine hazard. Upon operation, the actuator key is 

withdrawn into the door handle housing … thus eliminating 

the potential hazard represented by a protruding key. 

AZ17…zrk Installation 


The low-profile ergonomically-designed door handle is ideal 

for use on light- to medium-weight movable machine guards. 

AZM170…zrk Installation 

82

SERIES B25 

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES 

Compatible 

Safety Interlock* 

(order separately) 

Series AZ17…zrk 

(see Page 4) 

Part Number 

AZ17-B25-L-G1 

AZ17-B25-L-G2 

AZ17-B25-R-G1 

AZ17-B25-R-G2 

Description 

Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard 

T-grip for left-hand hinged guard 

Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard 

T-grip for right-hand hinged guard 

*Note: The AZ17 or AZM170 


and the mounting plates 

are not included in the 

delivery and must be 

ordered separately. 

Please note the assembly 

requires the interlock with 

the latching (“r”) option. 

Series AZM170…zrk 

(see Page 44) 

AZM170-B25-L-G1 

AZM170-B25-L-G2 

AZM170-B25-R-G1 

AZM170-B25-R-G2 

Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard 

T-grip for left-hand hinged guard 

Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard 

T-grip for right-hand hinged guard 

To order unit without 

Star-grip or T-grip handle, 

please change suffix to 

G0. For example … 

AZ17-B25-L-G0. 

Series AZ17…zrk 

Series AZM170…zrk 

MP-B25* 

Mounting plates for switch & handle assembly 

3 

Mounting Plates MP-B25 

Order separately 

Star-Grip 

T-Grip 

DIMENSIONS 

AZ17…zrk Installation 

AZM170…zrk Installation 

83

SERIES ZSD 

3-Position Hand-Held Enabling Device 


• Redundant contacts ... allows use in up to safety control 

category 4 systems. 

• Auxiliary contact ... for status signalling. 

• Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3 ... 

enhances safety. 

• 3-position (OFF-ON-OFF) design ... provides for machine 

stop control when operator squeezes or releases actuator 

from center “on” position. 

• Rugged IP65 rating ... withstands harsh industrial 

environments. 

• Optional normally-open top-mounted pushbutton ... 

enables machine jog/start control. 

• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... to satisfy 

enabling device requirements. 

Description 

The ZSD is a hand-held “dead man” switch with 3 operating 

positions — OFF-ON-OFF. The machine/robot can be 

operated in the “on” position. It provides safety based on 

normal human behavior of either releasing or squeezing the 

actuator in an emergency situation. 

Operation 

Machine/robot operation is only allowed when the enabling 

device is held in the middle (“on”) position. Releasing the 

switch (position 1) or squeezing the switch (position 3) shuts 

down the equipment. 


Used in robotic cells and automated manufacturing systems 

to provide operator safety during set-up, maintenance, 

or troubleshooting. 

SWITCHING DIAGRAM FOR ZSD5 

Position 1 2 3 

Normally open contact 1–2* 

Normally open contact 3–4* 

Auxiliary contact 5–6 

Open: , Closed: 

* Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3 

Part Number 

ZSD5 

ZSD6 

ZSD-H 


(INCLUDES M20 STRAIN RELIEF) 

Description 

3-Position Enabling Switch (OFF-ON-OFF) 

3-Position Enabling Switch (but with 

top-mounted pushbutton - 1NO contact) 

Metal Holding Bracket 

Note: For factory installed cable, add length in meters, 

e.g. ZSD5-5m. 

Use of a SCHMERSAL safety controller with cross short monitoring 

is required (SCHMERSAL models SRB301ST-24 or SRB301SQ). 

88

ZSD TECHNICAL DATA 


Operating Temperature 

Operating Humidity 

Storage Temperature 

Operating Frequency 


Shock Operating Extremes 100m/s 2 

Resistance Damage Limits 1000m/s 2 

–25°C to +60°C (no freezing) 

45% to 85% RH maximum 

(no condensation) 

–40°C to +80°C (no freezing) 

1,200 operations/hour 

Position 1•2•1: 1,000,000 minimum 

Position 1•2•3•1: 100,000 minimum 

Vibration Operating Extremes 5 to 55Hz, amplitude 0.5mm minimum 

Resistance Damage Limits 16.7Hz, amplitude 1.5mm minimum 

Terminal Pulling Strength 20N minimum 

Terminal Screw Torque 

0.5 to 0.6Nm 

Degree of Protection 

IP65 

Weight 

Approx. 240g (ZSD6) 

Approx. 210g (ZSD5) 

Conforming to Standards ANSI/RIA R 15.06 ISO 12100 

EN ISO 13849-1 ISO 11161 

EN 954-1 ISO 10218 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1 EN 13850 (e- 

IEC 60204-1 

stop button) 

Approvals 

UL, CSA, BG, CE 


Contact Resistance 

100mΩ maximum 

Between live & dead metal parts: 

Insulation Resistance 

100MΩ maximum (at 500VDC) 

Between positive & negative live parts: 

100MΩ minimum (at 500VDC) 

Impulse Withstand 

Voltage 

Electrical Life 

Recommended Wire Size 

2.5kV 

100,000 cycles (min.) @max. load 

16 - 26 AWG 

Recommended Cable .275 - .512 inch diameter 

Conditional 

Short Circuit Current 50A (250V) 

Recommended Short 250V/10A fast-blow fuse (IEC 60127-1) 

Circuit Protection 

Contact Rating 2A @ 30V, 4A @ 125V 

3 

DIMENSIONS (mm) 

46 

ZSD5/6 

86 

174 9 

54 58 

ZSD-H 

Note: Model with top-mounted pushbutton shown. 

89

SERIES TFH 

Safety Foot Switch 


• Positive-Break Contacts ... assure circuit interruption upon 

complete foot pedal actuation. 

• Automatic latching following an emergency stop signal ... 

meets EN ISO 13850, EN 13850 standard for E-Stop switches. 

• Unique design with protective shield ... avoids unintentional 

actuation due to falling debris or dropped items. 

• Release modes ... only manually by pushing the button on the 

top of the pedal. 

• Heavy duty aluminum shield ... tolerates mechanical abuse 

without damage. 

• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements of 

EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of EN 954-1. 

Description 

Extensive accident prevention research has shown that in the 

event of pain/distress, the foot is frequently not removed 

from the foot pedal that is enabling equipment operation. 

Paradoxically, weight is often shifted forward and pressure on 

the foot pedal is increased (rather than removed). 

Recognizing this, the series TFH safety foot switch features 

3-stage operation. It is designed to stop hazardous movements 

in machinery whether released or fully-depressed in an 

emergency situation. 

Its positive-break, normally-closed contact provides a 


contacts which can weld/stick shut. Their glass-fiber 

reinforced pedal and aluminum protective shield make them 

ideal for heavy-duty applications in hostile environments. 


The TFH foot switch is intended for use in machines or areas 

where operation using the hands is not possible. Typical 

applications are profile and tube bending machines, bar 

turning machines, thread cutting, and wire drawing machines. 


Part Number 


TFH232-11UEDR 

1 NO & 1 NC 

TFH232-22UEDR 

2 NO & 2 NC 

All Enclosures include M20 to 1/2" NPT metal conduit adapter 

Operation 

In the event of pain, the foot is frequently not removed from 

the switching pedal, but paradoxically pressure is increased, 

and the weight shifted forward. The solution to this problem 

is provided by a 3-stage safety foot switch. 

Position 1. The pedal is not actuated in the upper position. 

→ Machine “ OFF ” 

Signal Output 

0ff 

Position 1 

(Pedal not 

actuated) 

Position 2. The operation circuit contact closes after 

actuating the foot pedal (the pedal is in contact 

with the tangible pressure-point stop). 

→ Machine “ ON ” 

On 

Position 2 

(Pedal depressed 

to pressure point) 

Position 3. The pressure point is overcome in the event of 

danger or sensing pain, the circuit contact opens 

and is automatically latched. 

→ Machine “ Emergency Stop ” 

Operation to position 3 requires manual reset using the 

integral push button actuator 

Optional safety controllers for E-Stop applications are 

available. Please see SRB Safety Controllers starting on 

page 320. 

0ff 

0ff 

Position 3 

(Pedal fully 

depressed) 

Release/Reset 

(Pedal returns 

to position 1) 

90 

® 


SERIES TFH TECHNICAL DATA 


Enclosure 

Aluminum (die casting) 

Protecting Hood (shield) Aluminum (die casting) 

Pedal 

Glass-fiber reinforced 

thermoplastic 

Degree of Protection IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529 

Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C 

Mechanical life 

> 1 million operations 

Conformity to Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 EN ISO 13849-1 

EN 13850 EN 954-1 

BG-GS-ET-15 EN ISO 13850 

UL/CSA 

CE 


Contact Rating 4 A / 230VAC 1 A / 24DC 


Slow-action NC 

Positive break contacts 

Rated Insulation Voltage 500 V 


Screw terminals, 2.5 mm 2 max. 

(including conductor ferrules) 


6 kV 

Thermal test current 10 A 

Max. fuse rating 

6 A (slow-blow) 

TFH SERIES DIMENSIONS (mm) 

3 

CONTACT DIAGRAMS 

TFH232-11… 

TFH232-22… 

91

SERIES SEPK(G) 

Description 

Schmersal’s family of two-hand control consoles have an 

ergonomic design that require the operator to use both hands 

to initiate a control action. Thus they insure that the operator’s 

hands are kept away from the hazardous area of a machine 

during operation. 

The units are designed such that simultaneous operation 

(within 0.5 seconds) of both control buttons is required to 

initiate the machine cycle. The control buttons must remain 

actuated to complete the machine cycle. 

Each is equipped with an integral E-stop mushroom 

pushbutton to facilitate emergency stoppage. 

Units are available with a wide choice of options and 

accessories, such as adjustable stands, auxiliary control 

buttons, foot pedals, special colors, etc. for optimizing safety 

and functionality. 


Two-hand control consoles are used as protective devices in 

setting up and operating single-stroke equipment, and other 

applications where it is desired to keep both of the operator’s 

hands safe from a hazardous area during machine operation. 

Applications are typically found in the metal working, rubber, 

plastics and chemical industries as well as in semi-automatic 

assembly equipment. 

92 

2-Hand Control Consoles 

(with light force actuators) 


• Choice of console material … rugged Lexan or die-cast 

aluminum. 

• Optional control functions … consoles designed to 

accept up to 8 additional control and signalling devices. 

• Hinged console covers … facilitate easy wiring and 

assembly. 

• Ergonomically-designed shelf to support hands during 

actuation (SEPG model) … minimizes stress. 

• Protective safety hoods … protect against accidental 

actuation of pushbuttons. 

• Integral E-stop mushroom pushbutton … for easy 

emergency stop control 

• IP65 ingress protection rating … tolerates hostile, wet 

environments. 

• Meets EN574 standard … safety of machinery for twohand 

control consoles. 

• Available adjustable stands (optional) … to optimize user 

comfort. 

• Available optional accessories … e.g., safety controllers, 

foot pedals, rollers, special paint finishes for application 

flexibility. 

• Custom units available … please consult factory. 


Model Number 

SEPK02.0.4.0.22/95 

SEPK02.0.L.22 

SEPG05.3.4.0.22/95.E1 

SEPG05.3.L.22 

Description 

Plastic (Lexan), hooded console with 

one red, 38.5mm E-stop mushroom 

button (1NO & 1NC contact) and two 

light force (2.3 lbs.) black, 55mm 

mushroom pushbutton actuators (each 

with 1NO & 1NC contact) 

Empty plastic (Lexan) hooded console 

(gray) with 3 bore holes for actuators 

Powder-coated (gray) aluminum 

hooded console with one red, 38.5mm 

E-stop mushroom button (1NO & 1NC 

contacts) and two light force (2.3 lbs.) 

black, 55mm mushroom pushbutton 

actuators (each with 1NO & 1NC 

contact) 

Empty powder-coated (gray) aluminum 

hooded console with 3 bore holes for 

actuators 

Note: Also available as custom control panels with up to 8 control 

and/or signalling devices in the central portion of the console 

(in addition to the E-stop actuator) and adjustable height floor 

stands (with or without rollers). Please consult factory. 


Part Number 

Description 

SRB201ZH-24VDC Two-hand control safety controller 

(Please see page 336 for details) 

EDRR40RT 

KDRRK40RT 

EFR 

EF303.1 

ADP55.3SW 

AF02 

AF10 

Metal E-stop actuator (SEPG) 

Plastic E-Stop actuator (SEPK) 

Spring element for E-stop 

E-stop actuator contact block with 

1NO & 1NC contact 

Light force palm button 

Control actuator contact block with 

1NO contact 

Control actuator contact block with 

1NC contact

SERIES SEPK(G) 


Console Material 

Console Color 

Ingress Protection 


Expectancy of 

Contact Blocks 

Temperature Range 

Mushroom Button 

Actuating Force 

Lexan (SEPK02…) 

Die-cast aluminum (SEPG05…) 

RAL 7035, light gray (SEPK02…) 

RAL 7004, signal gray (SEPG05…) 

IP65 

Type A Contacts: 

5 million cycles (minimum) 

Type B Contacts: 

10 million cycles (minimum) 

Type AF Contacts: -25°C to +60°C 

Type EF Contacts: -25°C to +80°C 

2.3 lbs. (SEPK02…) 

2.3 lbs. (SEPG05… EI) 

Conformity to Standards EN ISO 13849-1 EN 13850 

EN 954-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

CE IEC/EN 60947-5-5 

UL, CSA EN 574 

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Contact Blocks) 

Contact Type 

Specification 

Rated Operating 

Current (Ie) 

6A, 250VAC (AC15) 

3A, 24VDC (DC13) 

Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500V@Test Voltage 

of 2,500V 

Short Circuit 

Protection 

Type AF 

(Operating 

Pushbuttons) 

Wire Size 2 x 0.5 to 2.5mm 2 

(2 x 20AWG to 

13AWG) 

Type EF 

(E-stop Button) 

8A, 250VAC (AC15) 

5A, 24VDC (DC13) 

440V@Test Voltage 

of 2,500V 

10A, Slow-blow 10A, Slow-blow 

2 x 0.5 to 1.5mm 2 

(2 x 20AWG to 

15AWG) 

3 

DIMENSIONS SEPK 

DIMENSIONS SEPG 

93

Connection Cables 

Ordering code breakdown: 

(1)-(2)-(3)-(4)-(5)-(6)-(7)-(8)-(9)-(10)-(11) 

Nr. Option Description 

Cable 

(1) A Connection Cable 

S Connector without cable 

Connection/Number of poles 

(2) K Female coupling 

3P 3 Pole 

4P 4 Pole 

5P 5 Pole 

6P 6 Pole 

7P 7 Pole 

8P 8 Pole 

8+1P 9 Pole 

12P 12 Pole 

Connector diameter/threading 

(3) M12 M12 

M18 M18 

M23 M23 

M8 M8 

Connection type 

(4) R Snap on 

S Screw on 

Connector head form 

(5) G Straight 

W Right angled 

Nr. Option Description 

Cable color 

(7) X No cable 

BK Black 

OG Orange 

GY Gray 

Cable material 


1 PVC 

2 PUR 

LED Signal lights 

(9) X No LEDs 

2LP 2 LED – PNP 

Coding 

(10) X Standard 

A A-Coding 

B B-Coding 

Approvals 

(11) 1 None 

2 UL 

3 CSA 

4 CULUS 

Cable length 


2M 2m 

2,5M 2,5m 

3M 3m 

5M 5m 

10M 10m 

Example: 

S-K4P-M8-S-G-X-X-X-X-X-1 

Connector without cable, 4 pole, M8 threading, screw on, straight connector. 

94

EMERGENCY CABLE-PULL SWITCHES 


4 

Switch 

Series 

Housing 

Material 

Maximum 

Span 

ZQ700 Thermoplastic 32.5 feet 

ZQ900 

Die-cast 

zinc 

165 feet 



1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 3 NC 

2 NO & 2 NC 

2 NC, 4NC 

Rated 


Page 

No 96 

(Optional) 98 

S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner 111 

Installation accessories and installation instructions 106 

95

SERIES ZQ700 

Emergency Cable-Pull Switch 

New! 


• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications. 


environments. 

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit 

interruption upon pulling of trip-wire. 

• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or 

goes slack. 

• Watertight design … meets up to IP67 environmental 

requirements. 

• Continuous E-stop protection satisfying 

EN ISO 13850 … for supported spans up to 32.5 feet (10m). 

• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation. 

• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements 


EN 954-1. 

• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation. 

Description 

The ZQ700 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop 

control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which 

present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike 

E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be 

actuated at any point along the “trip wire”. 

The unit features a double-break contact block offering two contact 

variations which change state when the cable is pulled or 

goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an operator falls 

into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire. 

The unit also features a position indicator for easier installation, 

and a button reset. 

The ZQ700 is capable of spanning lengths of up to 10 meters. Its 

rugged, Thermoplastic housing and watertight design (up to 

IP67) make it ideal in hostile environments. 

Operation 

When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s) 

are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the 

actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage. 

If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC contact(s) 

opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage. 

The integral reset mechanism assures that the equipment 

cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset has 

been actuated. 


Part Number 


ZQ 700-11 

1NO/1NC 

ZQ 700-02 

2NC 


Part Number 

Description 

STQ441-SC 5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated 

STQ441-EB M10 eye bolt & hex nut 

STQ441-CC Cable clamp 

STQ441-TB Turnbuckle 

STQ441-TH Thimble 

STQ441-PU Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”) 

S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire tensioner, see page 111 

For recommended installation instructions, please see page 106. 


The ZQ700 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop 

pushbuttons or achieving a continuous, immediately accessible 

emergency stop … especially where space is limited. Typical 

applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging 

machinery, and transfer lines. 

96 

® 


ZQ700 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 


Cover 



Maximum Supported 32.5 feet (10m) 

Span 

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C) 



Conformity to Standards CE EN 954-1 

EN ISO 13850 UL, CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 TUV 



Fine silver 



bridges 

Contact Rating 4A/230VAC 4A/24VDC 



contacts with wire pull 

Short Circuit Protection 6A (Slow blow) 






DIMENSIONS 

Cable length vs. temperature range 

4 

At 2 to 5 m distance, intermediate wire supports are 

required, see accessories. 


ZQ700-11 

ZQ700-02 

97

SERIES ZQ900 

Emergency Cable-Pull Switch 

New! 



environments. 

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit 

interruption upon pulling of trip-wire. 

• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or 

goes slack. 

• Integrated emergency-stop button (optional) … assures 

complete emergency stop. 

• Watertight design … meets up to IP67 environmental 

requirements. 

• Continuous E-stop protection satisfying 

EN ISO 13850 … for supported spans up to 165 feet (50m). 

• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation. 

• Up to four contacts in a compact housing … available in 

five contact configurations. 



EN 954-1. 

• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation. 

Description 

The ZQ900 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop 

control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which 

present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike 

E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be 

actuated at any point along the “trip wire”. 

The unit features a double-break contact block offering a choice 

of five contact variations which change state when the cable is 

pulled or goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an 

operator falls into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire. 

In addition the unit features an optional integrated E-Stop 

pushbutton, a position indicator for easier installation, a button 

reset, three cable entries, and an optional signaling lamp. 

The unit is capable of spanning lengths of up to 50 meters. 

Its rugged, metal housing and watertight design (up to IP67) 

make it ideal in hostile environments. 

Operation 

When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s) 

are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the 

actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage. 

If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC 

contact(s) opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage. 

The integral reset mechanism assures that the equipment 

cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset has 

been actuated. 


The ZQ900 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop 

pushbuttons or achieving a continuous, immediately accessible 

emergency stop … especially where space is limited. Typical 

applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging 

machinery, and transfer lines. 


Part Number 


ZQ 900-11 

1NO/1NC 

ZQ 900-02 

2NC 

ZQ 900-13 

1NO/3NC 

ZQ 900-22 

2NO/2NC 

ZQ 900-04 

4NC 

Note: Add -N for integral E-stop button 


Part Number 

Description 

PL-M20-24V 24V Pilot light kit 

PL-M20-120V 120V Pilot light kit 

STQ441-SC 5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated 

STQ441-EB M10 eye bolt & hex nut 

STQ441-CC Cable clamp 

STQ441-TB Turnbuckle 

STQ441-TH Thimble 

STQ441-PU Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”) 

S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire tensioner, see page 111 

For recommended installation instructions, please see page 106. 

98 

® 


ZQ900 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Die-cast zinc, enamel finish 

Cover 


cover 

Degree of Protection IP67; -N version IP65 

Maximum Supported 165 feet (50m) 

Span 





EN ISO 13850 UL, CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 TUV 



Fine silver 



bridges 

Contact Rating 4A/230VAC 1A/24VDC 



contacts with wire pull 

Short Circuit Protection 6A (Slow blow) 






-10 

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 

T(°C) 

DIMENSIONS 

10 

20 

30 

40 

50 

l (m) 

Cable length vs. temperature range 

4 

At 5 m distance, intermediate wire supports are 

required, see accessories. 


ZQ900-11 

ZQ900-02 

ZQ900-04 

ZQ900-22 

ZQ900-13 

99

Recommended Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Installation Instructions 

ZQ700 

ZQ900 

ZS71 

ZS80 

Thimble Red PVC Eye bolt 

coated (cable Guide) 

cable 

Thimble Thimble Eye bolt Thimble 

(cable Guide) 

Eye bolt 

(End anchor) 

Cable Clamps 

(remove red PVC 

coating from 

clamping area) 

Cable Clamps 


coating from 


Turnbuckle 

tensioner 

Cable Clamps 


coating from 


Cable Clamps 


coating from 


Spring 

S900 

Tensioner 

Eye bolt 

(cable Guide) 

Red PVC 

coated cable 

Eye bolt 

(cable Guide) 

Eye bolt 

(cable Guide) 

Thimble 

Eye bolt 

(End anchor) 

Spring 

Cable Clamps 


coating from 


See page 126 for S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner 

Consult factory for appropriate Spring. Tension force is 

dependant on switch used. 

Part # S900 - Tensioner 

Replaces turnbuckle & cable clamps 

Part # STQ 441 SS - Steel Spring 

For lateral actuation application and extreme 

temperature environments 

106

S900 

Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner 


• Smooth adjustment … reduces adjustment effort. 

• Only one tool required … simplifies installation. 

• Anti-slip design … reduces need for readjustment. 

• Ergonomic … risk of injury is reduced. 

• Time-saving … cost of ownership is reduced. 

• Stainless steel components … tolerates the most hostile 

environments. 

AVAILABLE MODEL 

Model Number 

S900 

S900-SH 

Cable Pull Wire Tensioner 

Shackle 

Description 

Description 

The S900 is a unique wire tensioning device which simplifies 

the installation and adjustment of cable pull switches. 

Conventional systems are usually time consuming and 

difficult to install and adjust, but not with the S900. 

The S900 is an all-in-one unit that replaces the complicated 

turnbuckle assembly, with its thimbles and multiple wire 

clamps, and does not require the cable to be stripped to be 

secured. 

The S900 requires only a single tool to secure the wire and 

adjust the tension. Its “anti-slip” design minimizes the need for 

readjustments. 

The unit features a “C” hook which easily slips onto the ring of 

a cable-pull switch. Should the switch need to be replaced, 

the S900 can be easily removed from the switch by releasing 

the tension. 

DIMENSIONS 

Note: The cable-pull switch is purchased separately. 

S900-SH shackle is required to utilize with 

Schmersal ZS71 and ZS80 cable-pull switches. 

4 

111

112 

Safer 

by 

Design

NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS 

Sensor 

Series 


Approximate 

Envelope 

Dimensions 

Operating 

Voltage 

BNS250 1.0" × 1.4" × 0.5" 24VDC 

BNS260 1.0" × 1.4" × 0.5" 24VDC 


Configuration(s) 

1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NC 

3 NC 


Page 

No. 

1 NO & 1 NC 

BNS33 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.5" 

24VAC/DC 

120VAC/DC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NC 

118 

3 NC 

BNS33S 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.625" 

24VDC 

100VAC/DC 

1 NO & 2 NC 122 

1 NO & 1 NC 

BNS36 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.5" 24VDC 1 NO & 2 NC 

2NC, 3NC 

124 

BNS303 1.18" Dia × 1.74" 100VAC/DC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

126 

BNS30 & BNS300 1.18" Dia × 3.07" 24VDC 1 NC 

128 

BNS333 4.5" × 1.7" × 1.7" 24VDC 1 NC 130 

BNS16 1.25" × 2" × 3" 100VAC/DC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NC 

132 

1 NO & 1 NC 

134 

BNS-B20 NA 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC 136 

CSS 180 0.7" Dia × 3.6" 24VDC 2 PNP 138 

CSS 34 1" × 4" × 1" 24VDC 2 PNP 140 

CSS 30S 1.18" Dia × 3.5" 24VDC 2 PNP 142 

CSS 16 1.25" × 2" × 3" 24VDC 2 PNP 144 

Coded-Magnet Sensor Compatible Safety Controllers 

147 

114 

116 

5 

113

SERIES BNS250 

Coded-Magnet Sensors 



• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability 

in the most hostile environments. 

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple 

magnets. 

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most 

industrial environments. 

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy 

installation and provide visual indication of switch status. 

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand 

mechanical abuse. 

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category 

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate 

Schmersal safety controllers. 

Description 

The Series BNS250 coded-magnet sensors are designed for 

use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine 

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a 

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The 

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence 

of their matched magnetic field array. 

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67 

(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design 

prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded 

magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features a 1- 

meter long prewired pigtail. 

Operation 

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary 

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly 

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When 

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns 

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the 

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not 

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor 

output will remain “off.” 


The sealed, compact BNS250 is ideal for use on movable 

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications 

include food processing equipment, chemical processing 

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery, 

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing. 


(Please order BPS250 magnet separately) 


Part Number 

Description 

Configuration* 

BNS250-11z 

BNS250-12z 

BNS250-12z-2187 

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS250 coded-magnet 

actuator. 

*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for 

use in safety applications only when used with 

an electrically compatible safety controller or 

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible 

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller, 

see selection chart on Page 147.) 

! 

1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

BNS250-11zG 1 NO & 1 NC 

BNS250-12zG 

BNS250-11zG-2205 

1 NO & 2 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

Multiple reed switch 

assembly with 1-meter 

prewired pigtail 


assembly with 1 meter 

prewired pigtail and built-in 

LED display 

Multiple reed switch assembly 

with 5 meter pigtail (side entry) 

and built-in LED display 

BPS250 N/A Coded-magnet actuator 

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY 

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY. 

114

BNS250 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 


Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16") 

“Off”: 14mm (0.55") 



Operating Principle Magnetic 

Shock Resistance 

30g/11ms 

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm 

Conformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1 

UL EN 954-1 

CSA BG-GS-ET-14 

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The 

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances. 


Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC 

Maximum Continuous 100 mA (BNS250-11z/12z) 


10 mA (BNS250-11zG/12zG) 

Maximum Switching 

1W (BNS250-11z/12z) 

Capacity (Power Rating) 240mW (BNS250-11zG/12zG) 

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2 

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail 

*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on 

request. Please consult factory. 

DIMENSIONS 

25 

.98 

19 

.75 

33 

1.30 

22 

.87 

13 

5.1 

ø4,5 

.18 

13 

.51 

8,7 

.34 

33 

1.30 

22 

.87 

13 

.51 

8,7 

.34 

1000 

39.37 

25 

.98 

19 

.75 

ø4,5 

.18 

mm 

inch 

Note: BNS250 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart. 

WIRING DETAILS 

5 

BNS250-11z 

BNS250-12z 

BNS250-11zG 

BNS250-12zG 

13 

(black) 

14 

(blue) 

13 

(black) 

14 

(blue) 

13 

(black) 

14 

(blue) 

13 

(black) 

14 

(blue) 

21 

(white) 

22 

(brown) 

21 

(white) 

C 

(brown) 

21 

(white) 

22 

(brown) 

21 

(white) 

C 

(brown) 

Contacts shown with gate closed 

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE 

BNS250-12z-2187 

115

SERIES BNS260 


Description 

The Series BNS260 coded-magnet sensors are designed 

for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine 







prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly 

coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features 

a 1-meter long prewired pigtail or an available connector. 

Operation 















Note: See page 94 for appropriate M8 connector cables. 

4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on 

connector. 

6 pole models (with signalling contact) accept only a 

snap-on connector. 






magnets. 







• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with 

Series AES safety controllers. 





(Actuator ordered separately) 


BNS260-02Z-* 2 NC prewired 

BNS260-02ZG-* 2 NC 

1 meter cable 

BNS260-02Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 4 pole 

BNS260-02ZG-ST-* 2 NC 

connector 

BNS260-11Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired 

BNS260-11ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable 

BNS260-11Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 4 pole 

BNS260-11ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector 

With 1 NC signalling contact 

BNS260-02/01Z-* 2 NC prewired 

BNS260-02/01ZG-* 2 NC 

1 meter cable 

BNS260-02/01Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 6 pole 

BNS260-02/01ZG-ST-* 2 NC 

connector 

BNS260-11/01Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired 

BNS260-11/01ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable 

BNS260-11/01Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 6 pole 

BNS260-11/01ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector 

*Please indicate hinge direction: -L (left) or -R (right) 

CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES 

Model Number 

BPS260-1 

BPS260-2 

BNS260 

Description 

Standard Actuator 

Actuator for 90° operation 

Spacer for mounting reed switch or 

magnet on ferrous material 

Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for 






116 

! 


DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.



Housing 



“Off”: 15mm (0.6") 





30g/11ms 



cUL 

BG-GS-ET-14 

EN ISO 13849-1 





24VDC for LED versions 

Maximum Continuous 400 mA without LED 


10 mA with LED 


10va without LED 

240mW with LED 


(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8 

4 or 6 pin connector (ST) 



DIMENSIONS 

BNS260 

BPS260 

mm 


WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS260 Coded-magnet actuator) 

BNS260-02z(G) 

BNS260-02/01z(G) BNS260-11z(G) BNS260-11/01z(G) 

5 

Contacts shown with gate closed. Color configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary. 

QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS 


BNS260 4-Pole 

BNS260 6-Pole 

117

SERIES BNS33 


Description 








(submersible) standards (IP69K for BNS33S). Their tamperresistant 

design prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or 

improperly coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module 

features an optional built-in LED display of switch status, and 

a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to assure sealing integrity. 






magnets. 




installations and provide visual indication of switch status. 



• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or 

Category 1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with 

appropriate Schmersal safety controllers. 

• Optional high-strength field coded-magnets … 

extends sensing range to 10mm. 

• Units available with M8 quick-connect. 

(Please consult factory.) 

• Available stainless steel housing (BNS33S) … ideal 

for the food industry (see page 122). 

Operation 











machine guards in hostile environments or where space is 

limited. Typical applications include food processing 

equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking 

machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm 

rest position sensing. 

Required Safety 








! 



118

BNS33 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 

Part Number 

BNS33-11z** 

BNS33-12z*** 

BNS33-02z-2187** 


(Please order BPS33 or BPS33-2326 magnet separately) 



1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NC 

Maximum 


100VAC/DC 

(400mA) 

100VAC/DC 

(250mA) 

Description 





Part Number 

Description 

BPS33 

Coded-magnet actuator 

(5mm sensing distance) 

BPS33-2326 


(10mm sensing distance) 

BN31/33 

Shim plate for mounting reed switch 

assembly on ferrous material 

Note: See page 94 for M8, 4 pin connector cables 

BNS33-11zG** 

BNS33-12zG*** 

BNS33-02zG-2187** 

1 NO & 1 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NC 

24VDC 

(10mA) 



prewired pigtail and 

built-in LED display 

Coded Magnet 

Sensor 

BNS33-12z-2187** 

1 NO & 2 NC 

100VAC/DC 

(250mA) 




BNS33-11z-ST** 

1NO & 1NC 

60VAC/DC 

(400mA) 

BNS33-11zG-ST** 

BNS33-12z-ST*** 

1NO & 1NC 

1NO & 2NC 

24VDC 

(10mA) 

60VAC/DC 

(400mA) 


assembly with M8x1 

quick-connect 

Multiple Reed Switch Assembly 

Safety Controller 

Coded-Magnet Sensor and 

Safety Controller sold separately. 

BNS33-12zG-ST*** 

1NO & 2NC 

24VDC 

(10mA) 

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33 coded-magnet actuator. 

**These models feature isolated contacts. 

***These models feature C-form contacts. 

5 

Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on request. 


Note: SPEZ-2237 for sliding doors is available for BNS33-11z and -11zG only. 

Contact factory for more information. 

119



Housing 



“Off”: 15mm (0.6") 

“On”: 8mm (0.3") (For BNS33S only) 

“Off”: 18mm (0.7") (For BNS33S only) 

Degree of Protection IP67 (BNS33S: IP69k) 

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (+178°F for BNS33S) 





UL EN 954-1 

CSA 

BG-GS-ET-14 

IEC 529/EN60529 




For electrical ratings see page 139 


(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail. 

M8x1 quick-connect for versions 

with “ST” suffix 

*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory. 

BPS33 MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE 

120


DIMENSIONS 

Note: 27mm width and 

14.5mm depth for 

BNS33S/BPS33S 

M8 

25 

0.98 

7 

0.28 

3,5 

0.14 

88 

3.47 

78 

3.07 

0,5 

.02 

ø5 

.02 DIA 

18,5 

.073 

BNS33 with Quick- 

Connect Terminal 

4,5 

0.18 

3 

.012 

13 

0.51 



Quick-Connect for 

BNS33-11 units 

5 

2 3 

1 4 

Pins 1-2 are Normally-closed 

Pins 3-4 are Normally-open 

Quick-Connect for 

BNS33-12 units 

BNS33-02zG-2187 

2 3 

1 4 

Pin 1: Common 

Pins 2 & 4 are Normally-closed 

Pin 3 is Normally-open 


121

SERIES BNS33S 

Stainless Steel Coded-Magnet Sensors 






magnets. 







• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or 

Category 1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with 

appropriate Schmersal safety controllers. 

• Stainless steel housing … ideal for the food industry. 

Description 

The Series BNS33S coded-magnet sensor is designed for 






Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP69K 

standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing 

with a simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In 

addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED 

display of switch status, and a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to 

assure sealing integrity. 

Operation 









Part Number 

BNS33S-12z** 

BNS33S-12zG** 


(Please order BPS33S magnet separately) 



1 NO & 2 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

Maximum 


Rating 

100VAC/DC 

(250mA) 

24VDC 

(10mA) 

BPS33S N/A N/A 

Description 

Multiple reed 

switch assembly 

with 1-meter 


and stainless 

steel enclosure 


coded-magnet 

actuator 

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33S coded-magnet actuator. 

**These models feature isolated contacts. 

Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on 



The sealed, compact BNS33S is ideal for use on movable 












! 



122

BNS33S TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Type V4A (316L) stainless steel 


“Off”: 18mm (0.7") 

Degree of Protection IP69k 






IEC 529/EN60529 BG-GS-ET-14 

EN ISO 13849-1 




For electrical ratings see page 


(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail. 

*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory. 

DIMENSIONS 

BPS33S 

BNS33S 



BNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE 

5 


123

SERIES BNS36 


Description 

The Series BNS36 coded-magnet sensors are designed 

for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine 







prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly 

coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an 

optional built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter 

long prewired pigtail or an available connector. 

Operation 















Note: See page 94 for appropriate M8 connector cables. 

4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on 

connector. 

6 pole models (with signalling output) accept only a 

snap-on connector. 






magnets. 







• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with 

Series AES safety controllers. 







BNS36-02Z-* 2 NC prewired 

BNS36-02ZG-* 2 NC 

1 meter cable 

BNS36-02Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 4 pole 

BNS36-02ZG-ST-* 2 NC 

connector 

BNS36-11Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired 

BNS36-11ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable 

BNS36-11Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 4 pole 

BNS36-11ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector 

With 1 NC signalling contact 

BNS36-02/01Z-* 2 NC prewired 

BNS36-02/01ZG-* 2 NC 

1 meter cable 

BNS36-02/01Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 6 pole 

BNS36-02/01ZG-ST-* 2 NC 

connector 

BNS36-11/01Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired 

BNS36-11/01ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable 

BNS36-11/01Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 6 pole 

BNS36-11/01ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector 

*Please indicate hinge direction: -L (left) or -R (right) 

CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES 

Model Number 

BPS36-1 

BPS36-2 

BNS36 

Description 

Standard Actuator 

Actuator for 90° operation 

Spacer for mounting reed switch or 

magnet on ferrous material 







124 

! 


DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.



Housing 


Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 7mm 

“Off”: 17mm 





30g/11ms 



BG-GS-ET14 UL 





Maximum Operating Voltage 75V DC 

24VDC for LED versions 

Maximum Continuous 400 mA without LED 


10 mA with LED 


10va without LED 

240mW with LED 

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY* 0.25mm 2 

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8 

4 or 6 pin connector (ST) 



DIMENSIONS 

BNS36 

BPS36 

BNS36 Spacer 


WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS36 Coded-magnet actuator) 

BNS36-02z(G) 

BNS36-02/01z(G) BNS36-11z(G) BNS36-11/01z(G) 

5 

Contacts shown with gate closed. Color configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary. 

QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS 


BNS36 4-Pole 

BNS36 6-Pole 

125

SERIES BNS303 







magnets. 








Description 










magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an 

integral built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter 

long prewired pigtail. 

Operation 










(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately) 

Part Number 



Description 

BNS303-11z 1 NO & 1 NC 


(100VAC/DC/400mA) 

BNS303-12z 1 NO & 2 NC 



BNS303-11zG 1 NO & 1 NC 


(24VDC/10mA) assembly 

with 1-meter prewired 

BNS303-12zG 1 NO & 2 NC pigtail and built-in LED 

display 

BPS300 

N/A 


(front mount) 

BPS303** 

N/A 


(rear mount) 

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS303 codedmagnet 

actuator. 

**Available with stainless-steel outer jackets. Please consult factory. 













BPS300 Actuator 

BPS303 Actuator** 

! 



126



Housing 


Switching Distance, “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2") 

“Off”: 15mm (0.6") 

“On”: 8 mm ¸ 

“Off”: 18mm 

˝Suffix 2211 only 

˛ 







UL EN 954-1 





Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC (with LED) 

100VAC/DC (without LED) 

Maximum Continuous 10mA (with LED) 


400mA (without LED) 


10VA 

Capacity (Power Rating) 





DIMENSIONS 

BPS300 

6 

.24 

36 

1.42 

mm 

inch 

ø 4,5 

.18 

2 

.08 

90° 

ø2 

.08 

14 

.55 

x 1,5 

.06 

15 

.59 

30 

1.18 

M 30 

1.20 

2 

.08 

ø2 

.08 

44 

1.74 

1000 

39.37 

ø30 

1.18 

14 

.55 

ø 37 

1.46 

5 

15 

.59 

BPS303 (Ideal for use in the food industry) 




BNS303-11z 

13 

(black) 

21 

(white) 

14 

(blue) 

22 

(brown) 

13 

(black) 

21 

(white) 

BNS303-11zG 

14 

(blue) 

22 

(brown) 

22 

(black) 

32 

(white) 

BNS303-12z 

14 

(blue) 

C 

(brown) 

BNS303-12zG 

13 

(black) 

21 

(white) 

14 

(blue) 

C 

(brown) 


127

SERIES BNS30 & BNS300 

Coded-Magnet Sensor with 

Integral Safety Control Module 

Description 

The Series BNS30 and BNS300 coded-magnet sensors are 

designed for use as a safety interlock switch on movable 

machine guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set 

consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet 

actuator. The reed switches, wired in series, will only close in 

the presence of their matched magnetic field array. 

In addition, the Series features an integral monitoring and 

control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array 

(satisfying EN ISO 13849-1, PL c/Category 1 without use of an 

ancillary safety relay module). 




magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an 

integral LED display of switch status and a 1-meter long 

prewired pigtail. 

Operation 














magnets. 







• Integral reed switch monitoring & control module… 

detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies PL c per 

EN ISO 13849-1, or Safety Category 1 per EN 954-1. 

• Available in metal (BNS30) or plastic (BNS300) 

housings … for application versatility. 




Part Number 


Description 

BNS30-01ZG** 

and 

BNS300-01zG** 

BPS300 

BPS303*** 

1 NC 

N/A 

N/A 


(24VDC/30mA) assembly 

with 1-meter prewired pigtail 

and built-in LED display 


(front mount) 


(rear mount) 

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303 

coded-magnet actuator. 

**Important Note: The BNS30 and BNS300 are 4-wire sensors 

designed to satisfy PL c per EN ISO 13849-1, 

or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. They are 

not designed for use with a separate safety 

controller. 

***Available with stainless-steel outer jacket. Please consult 

factory 


The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable 






BPS303 Actuator*** 

128



Housing 

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic (BNS300) 

Brass, nickel-plated (BNS30) 


“Off”: 15mm (0.6") 







UL EN954-1 





Maximum Supply Voltage 

Maximum Continuous 




Type Connection* 

24VDC 

30mA 

Voltage: 250VAC 

Current: 3A (750VA) 

1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2 


*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available 

on request. Also available with M12x1 quick-connect. Please 

consult factory. 

DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS 

6 

.24 

36 

1.42 

2 

.08 

BPS300 

ø2 

.08 

M 30 

1.20 

x 1.5 

.06 

90° 

ø 4,5 

.18 

14 

.55 

15 

.59 

30 

1.18 

78 

3.07 

1000 

40 

2 

.08 

ø2 

.08 

mm 

inch 

BN 24 VDC 

BK 

BK 

BU 30 mA 

BNS300-01-zG 

L+ 

L- 

ø30 

1.18 

15 

.59 

14 

.55 

ø 37 

1.46 

BPS303 (Ideal for use in the food industry) 

5 



129

SERIES BNS333 

Coded-Magnet Sensors with 

Integral Safety Control Module 






magnets. 







• Integral reed switch monitoring/control module … 

detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies PL c per 

EN ISO 13849-1, or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. 




Part Number 


Description 

Description 







In addition, the BNS333 features an integral monitoring and 

control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array 

(satisfying EN ISO 13849-1, PL c /Category 1 without use of an 

ancillary safety circuit monitoring module). 

Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with a 

simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In 

addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED 

display of switch status. 

Operation 









BNS333-01YU** 1 NC 

Multiple reed switch(24VAC/ 

DC/40mA) assembly with 

integral switch monitoring 

and control module. 

Actuation from rear (“U”) 

BNS333-01YD** 

Same as above but 

actuation from front 

(“D”) 

BNS333-01YL** 


actuation from left (“L”) 

BNS333-01YR** 


actuation from right (“R”) 

BNS333-01YV** 


actuation from top (“V”) 

BPS300 

N/A 


(front mount) 

BPS303*** 

N/A 


(rear mount) 

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303 

coded-magnet actuator. 

**The BNS333 is a 4-wire sensor designed to satisfy PL c per 

EN ISO 13849-1, or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. It is not 

designed for use with a separate safety controller. 

***Available with stainless steel outer jacket. Please consult 

factory. 








BPS303 Actuator*** 

130



Housing 



“Off”: 14mm (0.55") 






Conformity to Standards CE 

EN ISO 13849-1 

EN 954-1 

BG-GS-ET-14 





Maximum Continuous 40mA 



Voltage: 250VAC 

Capacity (Power Rating) Current: 5A 

(1,250VA) 

Type Connection 

Screw terminals 

DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS 

40 

1.57 

40 

1.57 

2 

.08 

BPS300 

ø2 

.08 

5,3 

.49 

112 

4.40 

45 

1.77 

90° 

ø 4,5 

.18 

14 

.55 

15 

.59 

30 

1.18 

2 

.08 

14 

.55 

ø2 

.08 

60 

2.36 

7,3 

.29 

ø30 

1.18 

15 

.59 

ø 37 

1.46 

BPS 303 (Ideal for use in the food industry) 

5 

30 

1.18 

M20 

34,3 

1.35 

mm 

inch 

1 

2 

3 

4 

24 VDC 

40 mA 

BNS333-01y 

L+ 

L- 


Actuating directions 

131

SERIES BNS16 






magnets. 








• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact design 

• Same mounting as Series AZ16 … ideal alternative in 

wet, dirty environments. 



Description 


use as a safety interlock on movable machine guards. Each 

sensor set consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a 

coded-magnet actuator. The sensor outputs will only change 

state in the presence of their matched magnetic field array. 

Both switch and magnet assembly are sealed to IP67 

(submersible) standards. The unit features the same mounting 

dimensions as our popular Series AZ16 keyed safety interlock 

switches ... providing an attractive alternative in applications 

characterized by alignment problems and/or harsh 

environments. 

Operation 






















Part Number 

BNS16 - 12ZD 

BNS16 - 12ZU 

BNS16 - 12ZV 

BNS16 - 12ZR 

BNS16 - 12ZL 

BNS16 - 12ZLR 

BPS16 

Actuator Plane 

Front cover 

Back 

Top 

Right 

Left 

Dual actuation - both Left and Right 

(2) BPS16 actuators required 


Actuating Planes 

! 



132



Housing 



“Off”: 18mm (0.700") 

Maximum Switching 5H (in combination with Series AES 

Frequency 

safety controller) 

Degree of Protection IP67 per IEC 60529 

Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C (–13°F to +158°F) 




Conformity to Standards EN 60347-5-3 EN ISO 13849-1 

CE EN 954-1 

UL 

BG-GS-ET-14 

CSA 

*When no ferromagnetic material is present in vicinity of the sensor 

or actuator. 

DIMENSIONS 


Maximum Contact Rating* 100VAC/DC 

Maximum Continuous 0.4A 



10VA 


Type Connection 

3 removable cable entries 

(M20x1.5) give access to screw 

terminals with self-lifting clamps 

for up to 13AWG (2.5mm 2 ) 

flexible stranded wire. 

*Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed 

by means of a suitable circuit. 

AXIAL TOLERANCE 

5 


1 NO 

2 NC 

BNS16-11ZLR with actuation to right and left 

surfaces. Requires two actuators. 


133

SERIES BNS-B20 

Coded-Magnet Sensor with 




magnets 



• Dual-function latch & sensor … integral magnetic holding 

latch (with force of 100N). 

• Application flexibility … 3-contact design compatible with 

35mm, 40mm, and 45mm aluminum profiles 

• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact 

design. 

• Satisfy PL c , PL d , or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category 



• Easy-to-install … optional M12 x 1 quick disconnect & 

LED status indicator in NC circuit 

• Application diversity … suitable for hinged & sliding 

guards, available for left- or right-hand doors/guards. 

• Integral LED … displays switch status (non-LED models 

also available). 

Description 

The Series BNS-B20 is designed for use as a combination 

door handle and safety interlock switch for use on light to 

medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each 

unit consists of a door handle assembly equipped with two 

multiple reed switch arrays and coded magnet actuators. In 

addition, the unit features two latching magnets that attract 

pole pieces in the sensor unit—providing a holding force of 

approximately 100 Newtons. 

The reed switches will only close in the presence of their 

matched magnetic field array … thus enabling machine 

operation. Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed 

to IP67 standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents 

bypassing with simple magnets. The unit also features an 

LED display of switch status and an optional M12x1 quickconnect 

for ease of wiring and installation. 

Operation 

The unit consists of two components … the door handle unit 

and the sensor unit. The sensor unit is typically mounted to 

the stationary portion of the guard structure, with the codedmagnet/handle 

assembly mounted to the movable element of 

the machine guard. 

When the guard is closed, the matched magnetic fields align 

with the reed switch arrays, closing the switches and enabling 

machine operation. When the guard is open, or the magnetic 

fields are not properly aligned with their reed switch arrays, 

the sensor output will remain “off.” 


The sealed low-profile, ergonomic door handle system is ideal 

for use on movable machine guards in hostile environments. 

The absence of protruding elements eliminate/reduce risk of 

injury and unintentional opening of the guard. Typical applications 



and printing equipment. 

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES* 

(Please order sensor, actuator-door handle unit and 

optional connector separately) 

Part Number Description Termination 

BNS-B20-12ZG-L 

BNS-B20-12ZG-R 

BNS-B20-12ZG-H 

BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-L 

BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-R 

BNS-B20-B-01 

Sensor unit for left-hand 

hinged door 

Sensor unit for right-hand 

hinged door 

Sensor unit for both rightand 

left-hand hinged door 

Sensor unit for left-hand 

hinged door 

Sensor unit for right-hand 

hinged door 

Actuator-door handle unit 

Note: Sensor unit is also available for ASI Safety-at-Work bus 

systems. Please add suffix “-AS” to sensor part number. 

** 3, 5, and 10 meter cable lengths available on request; 

add suffix “-XXm” 

1 meter of 

bottom-mounted 

cable** 

1 meter of 

rear-mounted 

cable** 

Bottom-mounted 

M12 conncetor 

(M12x1, 8-pin) 

see page 96 

N/A 







! 



136

SERIES BNS-B20 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic 


Maximum Sensing Gap 

(Sar) 22mm 

(Sao) 0mm 

Protection Class 

IP67 

Ambient Operating –25°C to +70°C 

Temperature 

Maximum Storage –25°C to +70°C 

Temperature 

Switching Frequency 5 Hz 

Resistance to Shock 30g/11ms 

Resistance to Vibration 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm 

Max. door/guard weight Hinged guard: 5Kg 

Sliding guard: 3Kg 

Conformity to Standards IEC 60947-5-3 EN ISO 13849-1 

BG-GS-ET-14 EN 954-1 

UL 

CE 

CSA 

Maximum Latching Force Approx. 100N (22 lbs.) 

Safety Control Category Up to PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or 

Control Category 4 per EN 954-1 when 

used with appropriate SCHMERSAL 

Series AES safety controller 

Compatible Extrusion 35mm, 40mm, 45mm 

Frames 


Maximum Switching Voltage 24 VDC 

Maximum Switching Current 10mA 

Maximum Switching Capacity 240mW 

Indication of Switching LED (Illuminated when guard 

Condition 

is closed) 

Termination M12x1 or cable (LiYY 6 x 0.25mm 2 ) 

Contact Configuration 1 N.O. & 2 N.C. 

(LED in N.C. circuit) 

Note: Available in “ASI Safety-at-Work” configuration. 


Contacts shown 

with gate closed 

DIMENSIONS 

PIN configuration M12, 8 pins 

Note: Loads with high switch-on or switch-off voltage 

spikes must be suppressed by an appropriate 

protective circuit. 

5 

137

SERIES CSS 180 


Non-Contact Safety Sensor 



• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile 

environments. 

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and 


• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy 

installation and troubleshooting. 

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e 

per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1. 

*See note below. 




• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application 

versatility. 

AVAILABLE CSS180 MODELS 

Description 

The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is 

designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring 

the position of movable safety guards. In this application 

the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, 

sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator. 

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity 

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions 

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M 

(self-monitoring). 

Operation 

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a 

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the 

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant 

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The 

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to 

the actuator. 

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard 

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled. 

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit 


to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the 

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 180 Safety 

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the 

Safety Performance Level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 

13849-1, control category 4 per EN 954-1). 



machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a 

machine is required, and/or where hostile environments 

exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile 

machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling 

systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment, 

and woodworking machinery. 

Part Number 

CSS-8-180-2P-E-L 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L 

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L 

CSS-8-180-2P-E-LST 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LST 

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-LST 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LST 

Description 

End or single device with pre-wired 

cable 

End or single device with diagnostic 

output, pre-wired cable 

Series device with double pre-wired 

cables 

Series device with diagnostic output, 

pre-wired cables 

End or single device, pre-wired cable 

with M12x1 4 pole connection 


output, pre-wired cable with M12x1 5 

pole connection 

Series device, two pre-wired cables 

with M12x1 4 pole connections 


two pre-wired cables with M12x1 8 

pole connections 


Part Number 

Description 

CST-180-1 

Actuator 

CST-180-2 

Actuator 

CSA-M-1 

Magnetic latch 

H-18 Mounting clamp 





*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset 



138

SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 



Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal) 

7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum) 



Hysteresis 

≤ 0.5mm 

Repeatability 

≤ 0.2mm 

Response Time 

≤ 30ms 




EN 60947-5-3 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 


Mode of Operation Inductive 





≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 


Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC 



Safety Output Current 0.5A per output 

Safety Output Max. 0.5V 

Voltage Drop 




Max. 4V below rated operating 

Operating Voltage voltage 



Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or 

Cable 7x0.25mm 2 



5 

139

SERIES CSS 34 

Description 

The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed for 

application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position 

of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor 

monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removable 

guards with the aid of a coded actuator. 


devices with defined behavior under fault conditions according to 

EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring). 

The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matched 

pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excites 

the actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the reads 

back the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuator 

frequency and its distance to the actuator. 

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard by 

the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled. 


proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to 

250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoring 

of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 34 Safety Sensors can 

be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance 

level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, control category 

4 per EN 954-1). 

The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback option 

that control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need for 

a downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restart 

interlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton with 

edge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automatic 

reset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or 

end devices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors 

to replace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system, 

comprising the sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch, 

meets the requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 4 per EN954-1, provided that positive guided contactors/relays 

are used. 


The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable machine 

guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machine is required, 

and/or where hostile environments exist. Typical applications 

include printing machinery, textile machinery, paper converting 

equipment, material handling systems, packaging 

140 

machinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking 

machinery. 

Pulse-Echo Based Compact 




• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of 

mounting options. 


environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements. 





• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and reset 

functions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of PL e per 

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1, and 

may remove need for safety control module. *See note below. 





versatility. 

• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy 

and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator. 


(Actuators Ordered Separately) 

Model Number 

Standard Version 

Description 

CSS12-34-VDML* 

CSS12-34-VDMST* 

CSS14-34-SDML* 

CSS14-34-SDMST* 

F0 

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output 

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic 

output, M12 Cable connector 

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic output 

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic 


Integrated Feedback, without edge 

detection, auto-reset 

CSS12-34F0-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output, 

M12 Cable connector 

CSS14-34F0-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnostic 


F1 

Integrated Feedback, with edge 

detection of reset button, manual reset 

CSS12-34F1-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic 


CSS14-34F1-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnostic 


Note: See page 94 for M12, 9 pin connector cables. 

Sensors are also available with a serial diagnostic output for 

use with various field bus protocols network. Please see page 

204 for SD Gateways. 

Model Number 

CST34-S-1 

CST34-V-1 

AVAILABLE ACTUATORS 

Side surface actuator 

Top surface actuator 

Description 







well as increased output current requirements.



Housing 


Degree of Protection IP65 and IP67 

Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal 

10-15mm (Maximum) 

Side (S) 14mm Nominal 




Hysteresis 

1mm 

Repeatability 

≤ 0.5mm 

Response Time 

≤ 30ms 




EN 60947-5-3 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

1 kV 







Voltage Drop 








Interconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2m 

Connector: 

M12x1, 8 pin quick connect 



5 

141

SERIES CSS 30S 

Stainless Steel Pulse-Echo Based 



• Stainless Steel Housing … ideal for hygienic applications. 


• IP69K rated housing (to DIN 40050-9) … suitable for high 

pressure, high temperature wash downs. 





• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per 

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1. 






versatility. 

Description 

The CSS 30S non-contact, electronic safety sensor is 





The CSS 30S Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity 




Operation 

The CSS 30S Safety Sensor and CST 30S-1 actuator are a 





the actuator. 






monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 30S Safety 

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety 

performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, 

control category 4 per EN 954-1). 

AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 

(Accessories Ordered Separately) 

Model Number 

Description 

CSS 11-30-SD-M-ST 

CSS 11-30S-D-M-ST 

CST 30S-1 

H 30 

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 serial diagnostic 

output 

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 signalling output 

Actuator 

Mounting clamp 

Note: For M12, 8 pin connection cables, see page 94. 



outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety 

control modules recommended for this application. 








exist. Typical applications include food processing machinery, 

pharmaceutical and medical applications, material handling 


and marine and outdoor applications. 

142

SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Stainless Steel 

Degree of Protection IP67 to IEC/EN 60529 

IP69K to DIN 40050-9 

Switching Distance 11mm 



Hysteresis 

< 2mm 

Repeatability 

< 1mm 

Response Time 

< 60ms 



Conformity to Standards CE UL 

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 

TUV EN 954-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 







Voltage Drop 



Signaling Output min. (Ue – 5 V) 

Operating Voltage 





5 

143

SERIES CSS 16 






environments. 












versatility. 

• Same mounting dimensions as Series AZ16 … ideal 

alternative in applications with alignment problems or harsh 

environments. 



Model Number 

Description 

Description 

The CSS 16 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed 

for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the 

position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety 

sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or 

removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator. 





Operation 

The CSS 16 Safety Sensor and CST 16-1 actuator are a 





the actuator. 








performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, 

or control category 4 per EN 954-1). 

CSS-8-16-2P-E-L 

CSS-8-16-2P+D-E-L 

CSS-8-16-2P-Y-L 

CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L 

CST-16-1 








CST16-1 Actuator 

End or single device with pre-wired cable 



Series device with double pre-wired cable 


pre-wired cable 

Actuator 

Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in 

catalog number. See page 94 for M12 connector cables (4-, 5-, or 

8-pin). 









144



Housing 


Degree of Protection IP67/IP65 


7.0mm to 11mm (Maximum) 

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C for max. output 

current ≤ 500mA/output 

–25°C to +65°C for output current 

≤ 200mA/output 




Hysteresis 

max. 1mm 

Repeatability 

< 0.5mm 

Response Time 

≤ 30ms 




IEC 61508 UL 

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 EN 954-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 







Voltage Drop 












5 

145

146 

Safer 

by 

Design

BNS SERIES - COMPATIBLE SERIES AES SAFETY CONTROLLERS 

SELECTION CHART 



Suitable for use with 

Coded-Magnet Sensor 

Part Numbers below 

BNS250... 

BNS33... 

BNS303... 

BNS250... 

BNS33... 

BNS303... 

BNS36 

BNS260 

} 

} 

} 

12Z(G) 

11Z(G) 

11Z(G) 

02Z(G) 

BNS16-12Z 

BNS33-12Z(G)-2187 

BNS-B20-12Z(G) 

BNS33S-12Z(G) 

Max. Number 

of Directly- 

Connected 

BNS Series 

Sensors 

(without “daisy 

chaining”) 


Part Number 

(and available supply voltages) 

Number 

of Safety 

Outputs 

(Enabling 

Paths) 

Max. 

Achievable 

Safety 

Rating per 

EN 954-1 

(ISO-13849-1) 

Type of 

Reset 

Feedback 

Circuit 

1 AES1102 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 (b) Automatic No 

2 AES1112 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 (b) Automatic No 

1 AES1135 (24VDC) 

1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No 

2 AES1165 (24VDC) 


1 AES1235 (24VDC) 

2 3 (d) Automatic Yes 

2 AES1265 (24VDC) 


1 AES2135 (24-230V AC/DC) 


1 AES2335 (24-230V AC/DC) 


1 SRB211AN (24VAC/DC) 2 Stop Cat. 0 4 (e) Automatic Yes 

1 Stop Cat. 1 

or Manual 

1 AES1337 (24VAC/DC) 

3 4 (e) Automatic Yes 

or Manual 

6 AES2285 

2 

3 (d) Automatic Yes 

SRB207AN-230V (48-240VAC) 

or Manual 

5 

*Category 3 (Performance Level d) when safety controller is directly connect to load. 

147

AES 1102/AES 1112 

BNS Compatible Controllers 

Features 

• PL c per EN ISO 13849-1, 

Control Category 1 to EN 954-1 

• 1 enabling path 

• Monitoring of 1 or a number of guard 

devices 

• Connection of BNS .. -12z magnetic safety 

sensors with 1 NO and 2 NC contacts 

• LED function indicators 

• Available for various operational voltages 

Dimensions 

22.5 x 100 x 121 mm 

Model 

Designation 

AES 1102-24VDC 

AES 1102-24VAC 


AES 1102-110VAC 

AES 1102-230VAC 




AES 1112-110VAC 

AES 1112-230VAC 

Approvals BG UL CSA 

148

AES 1102/AES 1112 

Typical 

Application 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

U 

e 

YE GN YE GN YE GN 

BN WH BN WH BN WH 

PK GY PK GY PK GY 

L1 

A1 

A2 

S22 

S32 

S14 C 13 

24 VDC 

K3 

K2 

K1 

AES 1102 

5 

14 

K4 

N 

3 M 

Application 

Notes 

• AES to secure a number of guard 

devices using series-parallel circuits 

for PL c /Category 1 to EN ISO 

13849-1, or Control Category 1 to 

EN 954-1. 

• Only suitable for the connection of 

magnetic safety sensors. 

• Monitoring a number of guard 

devices using BNS 33..-12z-2187 

range magnetic safety sensors with 

isolated contacts. 

• The wiring diagram is with guard 

devices closed and shows the deenergized 

condition. 

• Use with multiple “daisy-chained” 

inputs does not permit identification 

of which guard/coded-magnet sensor 

is in an open/fault condition. 

• Monitoring one guard device using 

a BNS .. -12z Series coded-magnet 

safety sensor. 

149

AES 1135/AES 1165 

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers 

Features 

• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, 


• 1 enabling circuit 

• Enable delay time can be modified 

• Monitoring of mechanical position switches, 

safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded 

magnet sensors or E-stops 

• Can be used as emergency-stop controller 

for Category 0 to EN 60204-1 

• Monitoring for short-circuit between 

connections with NO-NC contact 

combination 

• Connection of input expansion modules 

possible 

Dimensions 

22.5 x 100 x 121 mm 

Model 

Designation 



Function 

Table 

Additional semiconductor 

output Y 

Function of output Y 

Switching Condition 

AES 1135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closed 

Y2 No enable Enable circuit open 


150

AES 1135/AES 1165 

Typical 

Applications 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

5 

Application 

Notes 

• AES to achieve up to PL d per EN 

ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 3 

per EN 954-1. 

• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or 

removable guard device using 

a solenoid interlock. 

• Extension of Enable Delay Time 

The enable delay time can be 

increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by 

changing the position of a jumper 

link connection under the cover of 

the unit. 

• Monitor 2 NC Contacts 

Jumper A1 (24 VDC) to X1 

• The NC contact must have positive 

opening function when the guard 

device is opened. 


device closed and shows the 

de-energized condition. 

151

AES 1235/AES 1265 


Dimensions 

ISD 

22.5 x 100 x 121 mm 

The following faults are recognized by the safety 

controller and indicated by means of ISD 

• Failure of door contacts to open or close 

• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections 

• Interruption of the switch connections 

• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or 

drop-out 

• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control 

of the guard door monitor 

Features 



• 2 enabling circuits 





• Contact combination can be changed from 

NO-NC to NC-NC 


for Stop Category 0 to EN 60204-1 



combination 

• ISD Integral System Diagnostics 

• 2 short-circuit proof additional transistor 

outputs 

• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays 

• Start function 

• Operational voltage 24 VDC 


possible 

• Additional contact by means of output 

expansion modules 

Model 

Designation 



Function 

Table 


output Y 



AES 1235 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closed 

Y2 No authorized operation Enabling paths open 

AES 1265 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closed 

Y2 Fault Enabling paths open 


152

AES 1235/AES 1265 

Typical 

Applications 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

L1 

0V 

+24 VDC 

A1 

A2 

Y1 

X1 

13 

23 

max. 100mA 

K1 

K2 

AES 1235 

AES 1236 

S13 

S14 S21 S22 

14 

24 

0V 

K3 

SK3 

K4 

3 

M 

5 

Application 

Notes 

• This model achieves PL d per EN 


to EN 954-1. 


removable guard device, each 

using a coded magnet sensor A. 


devices closed and shows the deenergized 

condition. 

• Start Pushbutton s 

A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally 

be connected to the inputs in 

the feedback circuit. With the guard 

device closed, the enabling circuits 

are then not closed until the start 

pushbutton has been operated. 

• Feedback Circuit 

A feedback circuit is shown connected 

in the wiring diagram. If neither 

a start push button nor feedback 

circuit is used, input X1 must 

be connected to 24 VDC (A1). 




changing the position of a jumper 

link connection under the cover of 

the unit. 

• Modification for 2 NC Contacts 

The safety motoring module can be 

modified to monitor two NC contacts 

by bridging terminals A1 and 

X2. The cross-wire monitoring 

between the connections 

then becomes inoperative. 

153

AES 2135 


Features 








• Can be changed from NO-NC to NC-NC 

contact combination 





combination 



possible 

• 2 semiconductor auxiliary outputs (nonsafety) 

Dimensions 

45 x 100 x 121 mm 

ISD 







drop-out 



Model 

Designation 

AES 2135 24-230V AC/DC 

Function 

Table 


output Y 



AES 2135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closed 

Y2 No enable Enable circuit open 


154

AES 2135 

Typical 

Applications 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

5 

Application 

Notes 

• AES to achieve PL d per EN ISO 

13849-1, or Control Category 3 to 

EN 954-1. 


removable guard device, each 

using a safety coded magnet A. 

• The wiring diagram is with 

guard devices closed and 

shows the de-energized 

condition. 


The controller can be modified to 

monitor two normally closed contacts 

by jumping between the terminals 

X3 and X4. The short circuit 

monitoring between connections 





jumping between the terminals 

X7 and X8. 

155

AES 2335 


Dimensions 

ISD 

45 x 100 x 121 mm 







drop-out 



• Failure of or functional fault on the safety controller 

Features 








• NO-NC contact combination can be 

connected 




connections 


• Available for various operational voltages 

• Short-circuit proof additional transistor 

outputs 

• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays 

• Start function 


possible 

• Additional contact by means of output 

expansion modules 

Model 

Designation 

AES 2335 24-230V AC/DC 

Function 

Table 


output Y 



AES 2335 Y1 High (+24V) Enable circuit closed 

Y2 High (+24V) Enable circuit open 


156

AES 2335 

Typical 

Applications 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

5 

Application 

Notes 

• This model achieves PL d per EN 


to EN 954-1. 


removable guard device. 


device closed and shows the deenergized 

condition. 

• Start Pushbutton s 

A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally 

be connected to the inputs in 

the feedback circuit. With the guard 

device closed, the enabling circuits 

are then not closed until the start 

pushbutton has been operated. 

• Feedback Circuit 

For this purpose, the positive-drive 

contacts of the external contactors 

can be connected to input X1-X2. If 

neither a start push button nor feedback 

circuit are connected, a 

jumper connection must be made 

between X1 and X2. 


The controller can be modified to 

monitor two normally closed contacts 

by jumping between the 

terminals X3 and X4. The short 

circuit monitoring between connections 


157

AES 1337 


TECHNICAL FEATURES 

Description 

The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are 

designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open 

(N.O.) or Normally-Closed (N.C.) outputs. Each is equipped 

for connection of one input device in dual-channel configuration. 

In addition they feature user-selectable monitoredmanual 

or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of positiveguided 

controlled loads and cross-short recognition (on 

selected models). 

Input Voltage 

24 VAC/DC 

# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel) 

Monitored 

Monitored Contact Configuration 1 N.O. 1 N.C. 

Number & Type Safety Outputs 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts) 

Number & Type Auxiliary 

1 N.C. 24 VDC 

(Non-Safety or Signalling Output) 

Typical Input Devices Monitored • E-stops (N.C.) 

• Interlock switches (N.C.) 

Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 

Feedback Monitoring 

LED Displays 

Conformity to Standards 

Stop Category 0 

• Monitored-manual 

(24 VDC trailing edge) 

• Automatic 

Yes 

Green LEDs for: 

• K1 (safety relay 1) 


• Ui (voltage beyond internal 

fuse) 

UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant) 

Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1 

Control Category 4 per 

EN 945-1 

Type Fuse 

Selected Features 

Hybrid 

• Cross-short recognition 

• Selectable monitoredmanual 

or automatic reset 

• Feedback monitoring 

Front View 


Model Number 


AES 1337 

AES 1337 

24 V AC/DC 

Model AES 1337 shown. 

158

AES 1337 


Dimensions (W x H x D) 

Ambient Operating 


Mechanical Life Expectancy 

Weight 

Mounting 

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM 

22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 

10 7 switching cycles 

230 gm 

DIN rail (35mm) 



24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple 

max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

Power Consumption 2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA 

Fuse (Input Power) 

24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1, 

Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after 

interruption of supply voltage) 

Fuse (Safety Outputs) 

Switching Capacity 

(Safety Outputs) 

6 A Slow-blow (Recommended) 

230 VAC, 6 A Resistive 

(inductive with suitable surge supressor) 

Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 100mA 

(Auxiliary Contacts) 

Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1 

Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided 

Contact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state) 

Air Clearance & 

DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 

Creepage Distance 

Cable Connections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals 

for 13 to 20 AWG 

• Stranded or multi-core with 

wire end ferrule 

Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013 

5 

159

SERIES SRB 211 AN 



Description 

The Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unit 


and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is 

equipped for connection of one monitored input device in 

dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable 

monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop 

category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring 

of positive-guided controlled loads. 

Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts) 


Number & Type 

3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.) 


(dry contacts) 

Number & Type Auxiliary PNP 

(Non-Safety or 

Signalling Outputs) 

Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.) 

Monitored 

• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.) 

Type of Reset 


(Selectable) 


• Automatic 

Feedback Monitoring Yes 

LED Displays 




• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4) 

• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse) 

• UB (voltage at input terminals) 


Stop Category 


0 (2 safety outputs) 

1 (1 safety output) 


Control Category 4 per EN 945-1 


• Plug-in screw terminals 


• Stop category 0 & 1 

safety outputs 

• Selectable trailing edge or 

automatic reset 

• Resetable electronic fuse 



Model Number 

SRB 211 AN 


24 V AC/DC 

160








Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 

>10 7 switching cycles 

255 gm 

DIN rail 


Power Consumption 


max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signaling 

output Y1 

Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1, 

Tripping current > 1.5A 

(Resets approx. 1 second) 






(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit) 

Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA 


Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1 

Pick-up Delay 

≤ 40 ms 

Drop-out Delay ≤ 50 ms 

Contact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided 

Materials 


Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 


Cable Connections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals 





5 

161

AES 2285/SRB 207 AN BNS Compatible Safety Controllers 


Description 


designed for use with safety devices having Normally- 

Open (N.O.) and Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. 

Each is equipped for connection with up to six input 

devices such as E-stop push button and BNS coded 

magnets. In addition it features user-selectable monitoredmanual 

or automatic reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor 

outputs for signalling/annunciation, and two safety outputs. 

Input Voltage 

See available models below 


Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.O./N.C. (Dry Contacts) 


Number & Type 

2 N.O. (Dry Contacts) 


Number & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type 


semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA 


1 - N.C. Auxiliary output 

Typical Input Devices • Interlocks (N.O./N.C.) 

Monitored 

• Limit switches (N.O./N.C.) 

Type of Reset 

• Monitored-manual (trailing edge) 

(Selectable) 

• Automatic 


LED Displays 








Safety Classification PL d per EN ISO 13849-1 





• Up to 6 monitored devices 

• Seven auxiliary outputs 

• Selectable monitored-manual or 


Front View AES 2285/SRB 207 


Model Number 

AES 2285 

SRB 207 AN-230V 

Operating Input Voltage 

24 VDC 

48 - 230 VAC 

162

AES 2285/SRB 207 AN 






Weight 

Mounting 

45mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


300 gm 

DIN rail 

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input) 





max. 10% 

48 VAC-240VAC, 50-60 Hz 

3.0 W max. (For 24 VDC) 

Approx. 6.8 VA (For 230 VAC) 

(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y6) 


24 V Internal electronic Fuse F1, 

Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after 

approx. 1 second) 

230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping 

current > 1 A 

Secondary : Internal electronic fuse, 

tripping current > 0.12 A 







Y1-Y6: 24 VDC, 20mA (PNP) 

31-32: 24 VDC, 2 A (Dry) 


(inductive with suitable supressor circuit) 

Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1 

Pick-up Delay 

Drop-out Delay 

Contact Type & Material 




Cable Connections 

≤ 120 ms/≤ 30ns (auto start/reset button) 

≤ 20 ms 

AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided 

100 mOhm (max. in new state) 

DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 

• Self-lifting, plug-in screw 

terminals for 13 to 20 AWG 




5 

163

164 

Safer 

by 

Design

PULSE-ECHO BASED 

NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS 


Switch 

Series 

AZ 200 

CSS 34 

Type 

AZM 200 Solenoid Interlock 1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2" 

MZM 100 

CSS 180 

CSS 30S 

CSS 16 

Interlock 

Magnetic-Latching 

Interlock 

Cylindrical 

Safety Sensor 

Rectangular 

Safety Sensor 

Stainless Steel Cylindrical 

Safety Sensor 

Safety Sensor 

in AZ16 Housing 

Envelope 

Dimensions 

1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2" 

1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4" 

1" × 4" × 1" 




1 or 3 diagnostic outputs 


1 diagnostic output 






Page 

166 

172 

178 

0.7" × 3.6" 2 PNP Safety Outputs 182 

1.18" Dia × 3.5" 

1.25" × 2" × 3" 





188 

194 

198 

6 

SD-Gateway for Field Bus connection Serial Diagnostic signal converter 204 

Pules Echo accessories Connectors for series wiring 206 

165

SERIES AZ 200 


Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch 


• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and 



• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no 




satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note on next page. 


left quickly and safely. 

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door 

opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding 

actuator. 

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application 

versatility. 




Description 

The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is 

designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates 

which must be closed for operator safety. 

The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit 

with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The 

actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the 

actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing 

pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can 

have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the 

interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in 

turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo 

technology provides diagnostic information and detects and 

indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different 

actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards. 

The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit 


to 250 mA. It features one electronic diagnostic output that 

can signal errors before the safety outputs are switched off, 

thus enabling a controlled shutdown of the machine. 



up to 31 AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic output 

can be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance 

level/control category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or control 

category 4 per EN 954-1). 


The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 




panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for 

both sliding guards and hinged guards. 

166 

AVAILABLE AZ200 MODELS 

Part Number 

Description 

Screw Terminals 

AZ200SK-T1P2P 

Door detection sensor, diagnostic 


AZ200SK-TSD2P 

Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic 


M23 x1 quick connect, 8+1pole 





M12x1 quick connect, 8 pole 







ACTUATORS 

Part Number 

Description 


left 


left with inside emergency door 

release 


right 



release 







Note: For appropriate connector cable for ST models, 

please see page 94. 

For ST1 models, order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23... 

For ST2 models, order cable staring with A-K8P-M12...

SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS 


Description: 

Lockout tag, 

up to 5 padlocks 


Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP 

semiconductor outputs. See page 320 for 

recommended SCHMERSAL safety control 

modules. 

Note: A safety control module may be required 

for reset function and/or feedback monitoring 

functions, as well as increased output 

current requirements. 

DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR 

AZ/AZM 200-B1 

for sliding doors 

1 – A1 Supply voltage UB 

2 – X1 Safety input 1 

3 – A2 GND 

4 – Y1 Safety output 1 

5 – OUT Diagnostic output 



8 – IN serial diagnostic input 

9 – without function 



3 – A2 GND 






6 

167

SERIES AZ 200 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 






Response Time 

≤ 60ms 





Mounting 

40-45mm profiles 


EN 60947-5-1 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 

DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE 

Door hinge on 

left-hand side 

A 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 





Safety Output 



Safety Output 










Type Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15 

AWG flexible stranded wire 

(1.5 mm 2 ) 

Door hinge on 

right-hand side 

AZ/AZM 200-B30 

for hinged doors 

B 

Legend 

A=Front and rear manual release 

B=Cable entry M20 x 1,5 

C=Emergency exit P1 

D=Door handle G1 

C 

C 

D 

D 

168

SERIES AZ 200 DIAGNOSTICS 

Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs 

LED State AZ 200 

Safety 

Outputs 

Diagnostic Outputs 

AZ200...-1P2P 

OUT 

Green 

Door open 

0 V 0 V 

Green 

Door closed 

0 V 

0 V 

Yellow & Green 

Door closed and actuator inserted 

24 V 

24 V 

Blinking red (1–6 impulses) Error: see blinking codes 

1 

After 30 min ➞ 0 V 

2 

With door detection sensor (-T) always high 

24 V 1 

0 V 

Diagnostic LED error codes 

The blinking sequence of the red LED of the AZ 200 identifies the active error. 

The following errors are indicated: 

Indication (red) 

Meaning 

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 

5 blinking impulses Target error 

6 blinking impulses Error target combination 

Continuous red 

Error 

Blinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause 

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although 

the output is switched off 

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, 

although the output is switched off 

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at 

both outputs 

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high an 

inner temperature 

5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min. 

The difference between the code (frequency) of 

the detected target and the set value is too large, 

false target 

6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected at 

the 4 coils of the AZ200 T. (Current setting: latching 

bolt detected & door target not detected => latch 

breakage or tampering attempt) 

6 

Continuous Red Internal error 0 min. 

169

SERIES AZ 200 WIRING EXAMPLES 

WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING 

WIRING COMPARTMENT 

Supply Voltage 


Safety Input 1 


Ground 

Ground 

Meaning 

Safety Output 1 


Diagnostic Output 

24 V 

24 V 

X1 

X2 

GND 

GND 

Y1 

Y2 

Terminal 

OUT 

Note: In case of single device wiring, the 

bridge between the “24 V” terminal and 

the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be 

established; for series wiring, this bridge 

must only be established in the first 

device of the series. 

WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZ 200 

170 

Series wiring up to 31 sensors 

without loss of PL e per EN 

ISO 13849-1, or control 

category 4 per EN 954-1.

6 

Safer 

by 

Design 

171

SERIES AZM 200 

Description 

The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells 







The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and 

actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit 

handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing, 

protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and 

injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator 

and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator 

still engages the interlock. 

Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle, 

the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during 

a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model). 

The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two 

short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can 

switch up to 250 mA. 



up to 31 AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in series 

without detriment to the Safety Performance Level control 

category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 4 

per EN 954-1). 


The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 






metal working equipment, printing presses and 

packaging machines. 

172 


Non-Contact Solenoid Interlock 


• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous 



• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no 




satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note Below. 


left quickly and safely—even during a power failure. 

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door opening 

… no risk of injury or damage from a protruding actuator. 





AVAILABLE AZM200 MODELS 

Part Number 

Description 

Spring to Lock, Power to unlock 

AZM200SK-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals) 

AZM200SK-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw 

Terminals) 









AZM200ST-T1P2P-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton & 


Power to Lock, Spring to unlock 

AZM200SK-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals) 

AZM200SK-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw 

Terminals) 









AZM200ST-T1P2PA-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton & 


ACTUATORS 

Part Number 

Description 


left 


left with inside emergency door release 


right 



release 






with inside emergency door release

SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS 


Description: 

Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks 

Connector Cables for ST Models 

Please see page 94 for appropriate connector cable part numbers. 




(part numbers starting A-K8+1-M23...) 

ST versions use M23, 12 pin connectors 




Safety Control Module Requirements Dualchannel 

safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. See 

page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL safety control modules. 


function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as well as 

increased output current requirements. 

DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200, AZM 200-2568 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR 

AZM200SK 

AZM200ST 

AZM200 … -2568 

AZ/AZM 200-B1 

for sliding doors 

Pushbutton, for authorized 

release at switch site 

“ST” Pin Assignments 



3 – A2 GND 






9 – without function 



3 – A2 GND 






6 

173

SERIES AZM 200 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 




Solenoid Holding Force 2300N (506 pounds) 



Response Time 

≤ 30ms 





Mounting 

40-45mm profiles 


EN 60947-5-1 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 

DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 





Safety Output 



Safety Output 










Type Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15 

AWG flexible stranded wire 

(1.5 mm 2 ) 

Door hinge on 

left-hand side 

A 

Door hinge on 

right-hand side 

AZ/AZM 200-B30 

for hinged doors 

B 

Legend 

A=Front and rear manual release 

B=Cable entry M20 x 1,5 

C=Emergency exit P1 

D=Door handle G1 

C 

C 

D 

D 

174

SERIES AZM 200 DIAGNOSTICS 


Diagnostic Outputs 

LED State AZM 200 Safety Outputs 

AZM200...-1P2P 

OUT 

Green 

Door open 

0 V 

0 V 

Yellow & green 

Actuator inserted and locked 

24 V 

24 V 

Blinking yellow 

Actuator inserted and not locked 

0 V 

24 V 

Blinking red (1–6 impulses) 

Error: see blinking codes 

24 V 1 

0 V 

1 

After 30 min ➞ 0 V 


The blinking sequence of the red 

LED of the AZM 200 identifies the 

active error. The following errors 

are indicated: 


Meaning 




4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 


6 blinking impulses Error target combination 

Continuous red 

Error 




2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although 



both outputs 

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high an 

inner temperature 

5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min. 

The difference between the code (frequency) of 

the detected target and the set value is too large, 

false target 

6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected at 

the 4 coils of the AZM. (Current setting: latching 

bolt detected & door target not detected => latch 

breakage or tampering attempt) 

6 

Continuous Red Internal Error 0 min. 

175

SERIES AZM 200 WIRING EXAMPLES 

WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING 

WIRING COMPARTMENT 

Meaning 





Solenoid Input 

Ground 

Ground 



Diagnostic Output 

Terminal 

24 V 

24 V 

X1 

X2 

IN 

GND 

GND 

Y1 

Y2 

OUT 

Note: In case of single device wiring, the 

bridge between the “24 V” terminal and 

the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be 

established; for series wiring, this bridge 

must only be established in the first 

device of the series. 

WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZM 200 

+24VDC 

24V 24V X1 X2 IN 

AZM 200 

24V 24V X1 X2 IN 

AZM 200 

24V 24V X1 X2 IN 

AZM 200 

GND 

GND 

Y1 Y2 OUT 

GND 

GND 

Y1 Y2 OUT 

GND 

GND 

Y1 Y2 OUT 

0V 

Reset 

I1 

I2 

PLC 

I3 

+24VDC 

K B 

K A 

Q1 

Q2 

Q3 

A1 S12 S22 X1 X2 

13 23 33 41 

SRB 301 LC/B 

A2 

14 

24 34 42 

176 


without loss of PL e per EN ISO 

13849-1, or control category 4 

per EN 954-1 

0V 

K A 

K B 

N

6 

Safer 

by 

Design 

177

SERIES MZM 100 

Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching Interlock 


• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous 

areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding 

force). 

• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear 

due to non-contact design. 



satisfy requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note Below. 




• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical 

latching required (“r” version only). 

• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where 

high hygienic standards need to be maintained. 


AVAILABLE MZM100 MODELS 

Description 

The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells 


until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature 



abated. 

The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and 

actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N 

holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects 

and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor 

technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock 

of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal. 

The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel 

design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of 

which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently 

electronically measured and monitored. If the holding 

force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled, 

recognizing a dirty interlock. 


the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors, up 

to 31 MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired in 

series without detriment to the Safety Performance Level control 

category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 4 

per EN 954-1). 


The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch 





applications are textile machines, stamping machines, food 

processing equipment, metal working equipment, woodworking 

and packaging machines. 

Part Number 

Description 

MZM100ST-1P2PA 2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic 

output 

MZM100ST-SD2PA 2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic 

output 

MZM100ST-1P2PRA 2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic 

output, with variable latching (30N to 

240N) 

MZM100ST-SD2PRA 2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic 

output, with variable latching (30N 

to 240N) 




Part Number 

Description 

MZM100-B1.1 

Actuator 

MS MZM 100-W 

Mounting Set 

Note: For appropriate connector cable, please see page 94. 

Order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23... 








178

SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 



Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only) 

Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds) 



Response Time 

≤ 100ms 





Mounting 

40mm profiles 


EN 60947-5-1 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 

DIMENSIONS 

Switch 


Mode of Operation Magentic & Inductive 





≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 





Safety Output 



Safety Output 










Termination 

Connector M23x1 

Actuator 

6 

Mounting Set 

Exploded View 

179

SERIES MZM 100 DIAGNOSTICS 


State MZM 100 

LED 

Safety outputs Diagnostic output 

green yellow red Y1, Y2 OUT 

Guard open 

on off off 

0 V 

0 V 

Guard closed, unlocked 

on blinks off 

0 V 

24 V 

Guard closed and locked 

on on off 

24 V 

24 V 

Warning, door locked on on blinks** 

24 V* 0 V 

Error, door locked on off blinks** 

0 V 0 V 

* after 30 min. 0V ** see blinking code 


The blinking sequence of the red 

LED of the MZM 100 identifies the 

active error. The following errors 

are indicated: 


Meaning 





6 blinking impulses Error holding force 

10 blinking impulses Magnet is too hot 

Continuous Red 

Internal Error 




2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although 



both outputs 

5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min. The difference between the code (frequency) of the 

detected target and the set value is too large, false target 

6 blinking impulses Holding force error 0 min. The required holding force is not obtained (misalignment/soiling). 

The holding force is < 500 N. 

10 blinking impulses Magnet temperature 0 min. The magnet is too hot: Temperature is too high T>70°C 

Continuous Red Internal error 0 min. 

180

SERIES MZM 100 WIRING EXAMPLE 

Safety Sensors in large systems 

The sensors have separate input 

and output cables. The output of one 

sensor can be directly wired into the 

input of the next sensor. The sensor 

chain can be built up over a length of 

two hundred meters. 

The supply voltage is wired in both 

safety inputs of the last solenoid 

interlock of the chain (starting from 

the control relay). The safety outputs 

of the first interlock are wired to the 

control relay. 

SERIES CONNECTION OF MZM 100 

Safety outputs -> Control relay 


without loss of PL e per EN ISO 

13849-1, or control category 4 

per EN 954-1 

WIRING OF THE INTEGRATED CONNECTOR MZM 100 

6 

Solenoid interlock with diagnostic output 

Pin configuration 

A1 Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 1 

A2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 3 

X1 safety input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 2 

X2 safety input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 6 

Y1 safety output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 4 

Y2 safety output 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 7 

OUT diagnostic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 5 

IN magnet control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 8 

181

SERIES CSS 180 






environments. 












versatility. 

AVAILABLE CSS180 MODELS 

Description 

The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is 









Operation 

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a 





the actuator. 







Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the 

Safety Performance Level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 

13849-1, control category 4 per EN 954-1). 









Part Number 

CSS-8-180-2P-E-L 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L 

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L 

CSS-8-180-2P-E-LST 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LST 


CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LST 

Description 

End or single device with pre-wired 

cable 



Series device with double pre-wired 

cables 


pre-wired cables 

End or single device, pre-wired cable 

with M12x1 4 pole connection 


output, pre-wired cable with M12x1 5 

pole connection 

Series device, two pre-wired cables 

with M12x1 4 pole connections 


two pre-wired cables with M12x1 8 

pole connections 


Part Number 

Description 

CST-180-1 

Actuator 

CST-180-2 

Actuator 

CSA-M-1 

Magnetic latch 

H-18 Mounting clamp 








182



Housing 




7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum) 



Hysteresis 

≤ 0.5mm 

Repeatability 

≤ 0.2mm 

Response Time 

≤ 30ms 




EN 60947-5-3 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 







Voltage Drop 










DIMENSIONS 

CST-180-1 Actuator 

CSS 180 Safety Sensor 

5.6mm hole diameter 

Refer to order information for cable 

types, cable length and cable crosssectional 

area. 

CST-180-2 Actuator 

Mounting Clamp 

Magnetic Latch 

6 

38 

14 

28 

6 

18 

1,5 

34 

21 

16 

36 

5,2 

5,2 

60 

183


SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING 

Typical Response Range 

of the Sensor CSS 180 

S ON Switch-on point S ON 0 V 

184

SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 1 

Safety Sensors in large systems 

The sensors have separate input and output 

cables. The output of one sensor can be 

directly wired into the input of the next sensor. 

The sensor chain can be built up over 

a length of two hundred meters, up to 16 

devices. 

Sensors used: 

1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P-E-L: 

This sensor has one output cable. It is 

designed for the beginning of a chain 

or for use as a single device. 

3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L: 

These sensors have separate input 

and output cables. The output of the 

first sensor is wired into the input of 

the next sensor and so on. This type 

of sensor can also be used as the first 

sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage 

is bridged to the safety inputs. 

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180 

Up to 16 devices can be wired in 

series, maximum of 200 meters. 

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L 

Input 

Gray cable 

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V) 

(BU) blue 0 V 

Safety Input (BK) black channel 1 

(WH) white channel 2 

Output 

Black cable 


(BU) blue 0 V 

Safety Output (BK) black channel 1 


6 

CSS-8-180-2P-E-L 

Output 

Black cable 


(BU) blue 0 V 



185


Series connection of up 

to 16 Safety Sensors 

CSS 180 in small 

systems with a 

centralized control 

cabinet or wiring via 

junction boxes. 

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180 

Sensors used: 

1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L: 

This sensor has one output cable. It is 

designed for the beginning of a chain or for 

use as a single device. 

3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L: 

The inputs and outputs of the sensors are 

brought out in one cable. The sensors are 

wired together in series in the control cabinet 

or in junction boxes. 

This type of sensor can also be used as the 

first sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage is 

bridged to the safety inputs. For very long 

sensors chains it is recommended to feed the 

power supply directly to the first sensor in the 

chain to avoid excessive voltage drop. The safe 

outputs of the last sensor in the chain are connected 

to the safety control module. 

If junction boxes are used, standard installation 

cable can be used for the wiring between junctions. 

When laid together with control cables in 

a separated cable channel, shielding is not 

necessary. 

Up to 16 devices can be 

wired in series, maximum 

of 200 meters. 

Note: CSS units should be connected to the 

same regulated power supply. 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L 


(BU) blue 0 V 

Safety Input (WH) white channel 1 

(VT) violet channel 2 

Safety Output (RD) red channel 1 

(BK) black channel 2 

(GY) gray diagnostic output 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L 


(BU) blue 0 V 



(GY) gray diagnostic output 

186

WIRING EXAMPLES FOR PULSE-ECHO BASED SENSORS 

SERIES-WIRING OF VARIOUS SENSORS AND SOLENOID INTERLOCKS WITH DIAGNOSTIC OUTPUT 

Open solenoid 

interlock 

Safety 

outputs 

➞ 

SAFETY 

CONTROLLER 

The CSS 180, CSS 34, MZM 100, AZ 200 and AZM 200 can be wired in series in any desired combination. For the 

CSS 180, 16 devices maximum can be wired in series; for the CSS 34 and AZM 200, maximum 31 devices. If the 

CSS 180 is used in a “mixed” series-wiring, the maximum number of series-wired devices is limited to 16. The 

maximum number of devices depends upon a maximum cable length of 200m. 

PRODUCT SELECTION 

This example applies to the following series-wired devices. 

6 

Device 

Description 

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L 

with 

CST-180-1 

With diagnostic output, 

connecting cable 5-wire 

Actuator 

CSS-14-34-S-D-M-L 

with 

CST-34-S-1 

AZM 200..-T-1P2P,a 

Position of the active 

face, on the side, 

connecting cable, 7-wire 

Actuator, on the side 

1 diagnostic output with 

power-to-lock principle 

and door detection sensor 

187

SERIES CSS 34 

Pulse-Echo Based Compact 




• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of 

mounting options. 


environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements. 





• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and reset 

functions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of PL e per 

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1, and 

may remove need for safety control module. *See note below. 





versatility. 

• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy 

and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator. 

Description 

The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed for 

application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position 

of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor 

monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removable 

guards with the aid of a coded actuator. 


devices with defined behavior under fault conditions according to 

EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring). 

The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matched 

pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excites 

the actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the reads 

back the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuator 

frequency and its distance to the actuator. 

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard by 

the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled. 


proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to 

250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoring 

of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 34 Safety Sensors can 

be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance 

level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, control category 

4 per EN 954-1). 

The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback option 

that control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need for 

a downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restart 

interlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton with 

edge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automatic 

reset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or end 

devices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors to 

replace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system, comprising 

the sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch, meets 

the requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 4 per EN954-1, provided that positive guided contactors/relays 

are used. 



machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machine 

is required, and/or where hostile environments exist. Typical 

applications include printing machinery, textile machinery, paper 

converting equipment, material handling systems, pack- 

188 

aging machinery, chemical processing equipment, and 

woodworking machinery. 


(Actuators Ordered Separately) 

Model Number 

Standard Version 

Description 

CSS12-34-VDML* 

CSS12-34-VDMST* 

CSS14-34-SDML* 

CSS14-34-SDMST* 

F0 

CSS12-34F0-VDMST 

CSS14-34F0-SDMST 

F1 

CSS12-34F1-VDMST 

CSS14-34F1-SDMST 

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output 



Side Actuation surface with diagnostic output 



Integrated Feedback, without edge 

detection, auto-reset 

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output, 

M12 Cable connector 



Integrated Feedback, with edge 

detection of reset button, manual reset 





Sensors available with a serial diagnostic cable, for use with 

various field bus protocols. Please see page 204 for SD 

Gateways. 

Note: See page 94 for M12, 9 pin connector cables. 

Model Number 

CST34-S-1 

CST34-V-1 

AVAILABLE ACTUATORS 

Side surface actuator 

Top surface actuator 

Description 







well as increased output current requirements.



Housing 


Degree of Protection IP65 and IP67 

Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal 


Side (S) 14mm Nominal 




Hysteresis 

1mm 

Repeatability 

≤ 0.5mm 

Response Time 

≤ 30ms 




EN 60947-5-3 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

1 kV 







Voltage Drop 








Interconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2m 


M12x1, 8 pin quick connect 

DIMENSIONS 

CST Actuator 

CSS 34 Safety Sensor 

6 

Integrated Mounting Plate 

(included with delivery) 

189


SWITCHING DISTANCES 

The actuating curves represent the points 

at which the CSS 34 sensor switches on 

and off upon the approach of the actuator. 

Actuation From Side 

Actuation From Top 

Legend 

S 

Switching Distance 

V, V1, V2 Possible misalignment 

(see drawings at right) 

S ON Switch-on point 

S OFF Switch-off point 

S H 

Hysteresis area 

S H = SOFF – SON 

Sao Assured operation point 

Sar Assured release point 

(according to EN60947-5-3) 

Sideways Misalignment 

Horizontal: Max ±10mm (V2) 

Vertical: Max ±18mm (V1) 

Top Misalignment 

Horizontal: Max ±8.5mm (V) 

Minimum distance between two 

sensor sets: approximately 100mm 

Function table of visual diagnostic LED 

Visual diagnostic (red) Cause of fault 

1 pulse Fault on Output Y1 

2 pulses 

Fault on Output Y2 

3 pulses 

4 pulses 

5 pulses 

Continuous 

190 

Cross-wire short Y1/Y2 

Ambient temperature too high 

Incorrect or defective actuator 

Internal fault 

Six different fault conditions are signalled by the diagnostic LED 

flashing with predefined pulse sequence or with continuous red light. 

Electronic Diagnostic function of CSS34 or CSS34F with conventional diagnostic output 

Sensor Condition 

*Only for CSS34F0/F1 with feedback circuit 

1 

The sensor waits for a signal from the feedback circuit: 

F0 – Close feedback circuit 

F1 – Trailing edge on feedback circuit 

LEDs 

Green Red Yellow 

Electronic 

diagnostic output 

24V DC, 50mA 

Safety outputs 

No Target, Power On On Off Off 0V 0V 

Actuated On Off On 24V 24V 

Actuated in limit area On Off 

Actuated and 

feedback circuit open* 

Actuated in limit area and 

feedback circuit open* 

On 

On 

Off 

Flashes 

(1Hz) 

Flashes 

(5Hz) 

Flashes 

(1Hz/5Hz) 

24V pulsed 

Fault On Flashes On 0V 

Off 

24V 

24V 0V 1 

24V pulsed 0V 1 

30 min. delay 

24V➞0V


Series wiring with single diagnostic output 

The supply voltage is wired to both safety inputs 

of the last sensor of the chain (starting from the 

safety controller). The safety outputs of the first 

sensor are wired to the safety controller. The 

sensor chain can be built up over a length of 

two hundred meters. 

Sensors used: 

Safety Sensor CSS14-34-SDML: 

This sensor has one output cable. The output of the first sensor is wired into 

the input of the next sensor and so on. 

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS 34 

Series wiring up to 31 sensors without 

loss of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/control 

category 4 per EN 954-1 

CSS14-34-SDML 


6 

(BU) blue 0 V 

Safety Input (WH) white channel 1 

(VT) violet channel 2 

Signal Output (GY) gray diagnostic 

(PK) pink nonfunction 


(RD) red channel 2 

191


Wiring example for series-wiring of the CSS 34 and CSS 

34F1 safety sensors with conventional diagnostic outputs 

In a safety chain of multiple sensors, only the first device can 

be a sensor of the CSS 34F type. All other components of the 

chain must be of the default type CSS 34, up to a maximum 

length of 200m. 

The CSS 34F1 safety sensor enables a direct control of the 

contactor or relay. The internal monitoring module of the CSS 

34F1 version monitors the trailing edge of the reset button in 

addition to the feedback contacts. The sensor is switched on 

when the button is released. It can be used for manual reset 

on safety guards with accessible protection field. The protected 

field must be designed in such manner that a single reset button 

can be used. 

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS34 AND CSS34F1 

Series wiring up to 31 sensors without 

loss of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/control 

category 4 per EN 954-1 

192


Wiring example for the CSS 34F0 safety sensors with 

conventional diagnostic output with auxiliary relay for 

controlling high-capacity contactors 

Additional auxiliary relays are used when the capacity of 

the safety outputs of the sensor is insufficient to enable direct control 

of the contactors or to switch, e.g., from 24V DC to 230V AC. 

The NC contacts of the load-switching contactors are monitored. 

CONNECTION OF CSS34F0 WITH RELAYS TO SWITCH HIGH-CAPACITY LOADS 

6 

193

SERIES CSS 30S 

Stainless Steel Pulse-Echo Based 



• Stainless Steel Housing … ideal for hygienic applications. 


• IP69K rated housing (to DIN 40050-9) … suitable for high 

pressure, high temperature wash downs. 





• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e 

per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1. 






versatility. 

Description 

The CSS 30S non-contact, electronic safety sensor is 





The CSS 30S Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity 




Operation 

The CSS 30S Safety Sensor and CST 30S-1 actuator are a 





the actuator. 






monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 30S Safety 


performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/ 

control category 4 per EN 954-1). 



Model Number 

Description 

CSS 11-30-SD-M-ST 

CSS 11-30S-D-M-ST 

CST 30S-1 

H 30 

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 serial diagnostic 

output* 

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 signaling output 

Actuator 

Mounting clamp 

Note: For M12, 8 pin connection cables, see page 94. 

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with various field 

bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways 












exist. Typical applications include food processing machinery, 

pharmaceutical and medical applications, material handling 


and marine and outdoor applications. 

194



Housing 

Stainless Steel 

Degree of Protection IP67 to IEC/EN 60529 

IP69K to DIN 40050-9 

Switching Distance 11mm 



Hysteresis 

< 2mm 

Repeatability 

< 1mm 

Response Time 

< 60ms 



Conformity to Standards CE UL 

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA 

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1 

TUV EN 954-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 







Voltage Drop 



Signaling Output min. (Ue – 5 V) 




DIMENSIONS 

6 

195


SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING 


of the Sensor CSS 30S 

S ON Switch-on point S ON

6 

Safer 

by 

Design 

197

SERIES CSS 16 






environments. 






EN ISO 13849-1, or Safety Control Category 4 to EN 954-1. 






versatility. 

• Same mounting dimensions as Series AZ16 … ideal 

alternative in applications with alignment problems or harsh 

environments. 



Model Number 

Description 

Description 

The CSS 16 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed 

for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the 

position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety 

sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or 

removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator. 





Operation 

The CSS 16 Safety Sensor and CST 16-1 actuator are a 





the actuator. 








performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/ 

Control Category 4 per EN954-1). 

CSS-8-16-2P-E-L 

CSS-8-16-2P+D-E-L 

CSS-8-16-2P-Y-L 

CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L 

CST-16-1 

End or single device with pre-wired cable 



Series device with double pre-wired cable 


pre-wired cable 

Actuator 

Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in 

catalog number. See page 94 for M12 connector cables (4-, 5-, 

or 8-pin). 








CST16-1 Actuator 









198



Housing 


Degree of Protection IP67/IP65 


7.0mm to 11mm (Maximum) 

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C for max. output 

current ≤ 500mA/output 






Hysteresis 

max. 1mm 

Repeatability 

< 0.5mm 

Response Time 

≤ 30ms 




IEC 61508 UL 

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA 

EN ISO 13849-1 EN 954-1 







≤ 0.5mA 

Rated Impulse 

0.8kV 







Voltage Drop 










DIMENSIONS 

CST 16-1 

6 

199


SWITCHING DISTANCES 


of the Sensor CSS 16 

S ON Switch-on point S ON


WIRING CONNECTIONS 

Terminal or individual sensor 

CSS-8-16-2P+…-E-L… 

or 

Connecting cable (2 m): 

Cable section: 4-pole: 4 x 0.5 mm 2 , 

5-pole: 5 x 0.5 mm 2 , 

or 

Connecting cable (2 m) with connector: 

Male connector M12, 4-pole 

Male connector M12, 5-pole 

Lead colors connecting cable Wiring Pin configuration of the connector 

BN (brown) A1 Ue Pin 1 

BU (blue) A2 GND Pin 3 

BK (black) Y1 Safety output 1 Pin 4 

WH (white) Y2 Safety output 2 Pin 2 

GY (gray) only 5-pole version: diagnostic output (optional) Pin 5 

Sensor for series wiring: 


and 

Connecting cable with connector: 

Inputs (IN): female connector M12 x 1 

4 pole, 0.25 m long 

Outputs (OUT): 

male connector M12 

4 pole, 2 m long 

Connecting cable: 

Inputs (IN) gray cable, 4 pole, 0.25 m long 

Outputs (OUT) black cable, 4 pole, 2 m long 

Lead colors connecting cable Wiring gray cable (IN) black cable (OUT) Pin configuration of the connector 

BN (brown) A1 Ue A1 Ue Pin 1 

BU (blue) A2 GND A2 GND Pin 3 

BK (black) X1 Safety input 1 Y1 Safety output 1 Pin 4 

WH (white) X2 Safety input 2 Y2 Safety output 2 Pin 2 

Multifunctional connection: 

CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L… 

6 

Connecting cable (2 m): 

Cable section 7 pole: 7 x 0.25 mm 2 

or 

Connecting cable (2 m) with connector: 

Male connector 

M12, 8 pole 

Lead colors connecting cable Wiring Pin configuration of the connector 

BN (brown) A1 Ue Pin 1 

BU (blue) A2 GND Pin 3 

VT (violet) X1 Safety input 1 Pin 6 

WH (white) X2 Safety input 2 Pin 2 

BK (black) Y1 Safety output 1 Pin 4 

RD (red) Y2 Safety output 2 Pin 7 

GY (gray) Diagnostic output Pin 5 

— spare Pin 8 

201

COMPATIBLE PULSE-ECHO SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB301LC/B 


Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 

# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual channel) 

Monitored 

Monitored Contact N.C. (Dry Contacts) or 

Configuration 

PNP-switching 

Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts) 

Outputs 

Number & Type Auxilliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts) 

(Non-Safety or Signalling 

Output) 

Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.) 

Monitored 


• Devices with PNP semiconductor 

outputs 

Type of Reset 

• Manual (24 V Leading Edge) 

(Selectable) 

• Automatic 


LED Displays 






Conformity to Standards UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant) 





Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple 

max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

Power Consumption 1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA 

Fuse (Input Power) Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A 

Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended) 

Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive 


(inductive with suitable 

supressor circuit) 

Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A 

(Auxilliary Contacts) 


Pick-up Delay 

≤ 30 ms 


≤ 50 ms 

Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, 

positive-guided 


Air Cleaner & 

DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 


Cable Connections • Screw terminals for 

13 to 20 AWG 





Dimensions (W x H x D) 22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

Ambient Operating -25°C to +45°C 

Temperature Range (-13°F to +113°F) 



Expectancy 

Weight 

230 gm (0.5 lbs.) 

Mounting 


Terminal Connections For Use With AZM 200 


Monitored Input #1 

(N.C.) 


(N.C.) 

Safety Output #1 

(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S12 

S22 

13 14 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 


with Automatic or 

Manual (Leading Edge) Reset 

Auxiliary Output 

(N.C.) 

23 24 

33 34 

X1 

X2 

41 42 

202

COMPATIBLE PULSE-ECHO SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB324ST 


Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 



PNP-switching 

Number & Type Safety 5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.) 

Outputs 



(Non-Safety or Signalling 3-PNP 

Output) 


Monitored 



outputs 

Type of Reset 


(Selectable) 

• Automatic 


LED Displays 


• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4) 




Stop Category 





Terminal Connections For Use With AZM 200 


Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple 

max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

Power Consumption 4.8 W, 7.8 VA max. 


Fuse (Input Power) • Internal glass fuse F1, 


(reset approx. 1 second) 

• Internal hybrid fuse F2, 


(reset after interruption of 

supply voltage) 

Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended) 


(Safety Outputs Stop 0) (inductive with suitable 


Switching Capacity Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP) 

(Auxilliary Contacts) 61/62: 24 VDC, 2A max. (Dry) 

Application Category AC-15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1 

Pick-up Delay 

≤ 30 ms 

Drop-out Delay ≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34) 




Air Cleaner & 



DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 

• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals 

13 to 20 AWG 





Dimensions (W x H x D) 45mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75") 





Expectancy 

Weight 

480 gm 

Mounting 

DIN rail 

6 




Safety Output #1 (NO) 

A1 

A2 

S12 

S22 

13 14 




Stop Category 1 (NO) 



23 24 

33 34 

47 48 

57 58 


Monitored-Manual Reset 

Automatic Reset 

Jumper 

Auxiliary PNP Output 

X1 

X2 

X3 

X4 

X4 

X5 

S31 

S32 

Y1 Y2 Y3 

203

SD-Gateway for field bus connection 

Description 

The SD Gateways for field bus connection are used in conjunction 

with pulse-echo based, non-contact safety sensors 

and solenoid interlocks with serial diagnostics (SD): AZ200, 

AZM200, MZM100, CSS34, or CSS30S. In these components, 

the diagnostic output is replaced with a serial input and 

output cable. If components with serial diagnostics are wired 

in series, the inputs and outputs of the diagnostic channels as 

well as the safety circuits are wired in series. As a result, up 

to 31 identical or different pulse-echo based, non-contact 

safety sensors can be wired in series, fulfilling the requirements 

of PL e/Category 4 to EN ISO 13849-1, and provide 

ease of diagnostic evaluation. 

The serial diagnostic cable can be connected to either the 

PROFIBUS gateway, or to the Universal gateway, converting 

the serial information of the series-wiring into the corresponding 

field bus protocol. The Universal gateway accommodates 

the following protocols: PROFINET IO, ETHERNET/IP, 

DeviceNet, CC-Link, or CANopen. The gateway is integrated 

as a slave at the end of an existing field bus system. The 

diagnostic signals of all SD devices can be evaluated by the 

control system through the field bus master. 

Features 

Advantages of serial diagnostics 

• Diagnostic cables of up to 31 safety components can be 

wired in series 

• Series-wiring of different components possible 

• The diagnostic cable is suitable for series-wiring or daisychaining, 

thus reducing the cabling costs 

• Bidirectional communication, i.e. reading of the operational 

data and unlocking of a solenoid interlock in the chain 

Advantages of the field bus connection 

• Smoother connection to conventional PLC systems 

• Available for the conventional default protocols: 

PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ETHERNET/IP, DeviceNet, 

CC-Link, CANopen... 

Advantages for the communication set-up 

• Automatic addressing of the safety components through 

the serial input 

• Automatic and continuous transmission of the operating 

data from each participant in the diagnostic chain 

Advantages of the diagnostic in the PLC 

• Mapping of the operating data of the series wired safety 

sensors and solenoid interlocks 

• Control commands for unlocking all connected solenoid 

interlocks 

• Fast and accurate error messages with detailed information 

about the failure/malfunction 

• Increased availability: pre-signalling of failures during 

machine operation, e.g. sagging of the safety 


Part Number 

Description 

SD-I-DP-V0-2 

SD-I-U-PN 

SD-I-U-EIP 

SD-I-U-DN 

SD-I-U-CCL 

SD-I-U-CAN 

WIRING EXAMPLE 

Gateway – PROFIBUS 

Gateway – PROFINET IO 

Gateway – EitherNet IP 

Gateway – DeviceNet 

Gateway – CC Link 

Gateway – CAN Open 

Operational conditions can be read and control commands, 

such as unlocking a solenoid interlock that is installed on the 

series-wired chain, can be transmitted. The status or failure 

information of each individual component of the series-wired 

chain is automatically loaded in the PLC. 

204

SD-Gateway for Field Bus protocol 

SPECIFICATIONS 

PROFIBUS interface 

Protocol 

Transmission rate 

Short-circuiting device 

9-pole D-SUB connector 

Default PROFIBUS connection 

(DP-A, DP-B, 5V, GND) 

PROFIBUS-DP –V0 upwards 

compatible 

9.6 kilo baud … 12 mega baud 

internal fuse to 0.5A/60V 

Operating voltage Ue 24 VDC, –15%/+20% 

Operating current Ie 

Insulation voltage Ui 

Rated impulse withstand 

voltage U 

Storage temperatures 

Operating temps 

typically 180mA, max. 250mA 

32V 

0.5kV 

Protection class IP 10 

Resistance to vibration 

Resistance to shock 

Electrical connection 

–25°C … +85°C 

–5°C … +55°C 

5 … 9Hz/3.5mm 

15g/11ms 

SD connection for max. 31 devices 

24 VDC voltage supply 

SPECIFICATIONS 

Universal Interface 

Short-circuiting device 

RJ45, 9-pole D-SUB, or 5-pole 

Molex connector. 

internal fuse to 1A slow blow 

Operating voltage Ue 24 VDC, –15%/+20% 

Current Consumption 

Insulation voltage Ui 

Rated impulse withstand 

voltage U 

Storage temperatures 

Operating temps 

Protection class 

Resistance to vibration 

Resistance to shock 

500mA 

32V 

0.5kV 

–25°C … +75°C 

0°C … +55°C 

IP20 

10Hz/.35mm 

10g 

Electrical connection SD connection for max. 31 

devices 24 VDC voltage supply 

6 

LED SIGNALS PROFIBUS 

PB Continuous red Profibus error 

Flashing signal Profibus initialization 

LED SIGNALS UNIVERSAL GATEWAY 

SD- 

LED 

Green ON 

Red ON 

SD interface normal operation 

SD interface error 

SD Continuous red SD Gateway error 

Flashing signal 

SD Gateway initialization 

Teach 

LED 

Yellow Flashing 

Yellow ON 

Teach error SD interface 

SD initialization error 

T Continuous yellow SD initialization error or ‘teach’ 

switch active 

Red Flashing 

Universal Gateway warm boot 

Flashing signal 

Initialization error SD participant 

addresses, teaching required 

ON Continuous green Supply voltage on 

205

PULSE-ECHO Accessories 


Part Number 

Description 

SD-2V-F-SK 

Junction box, enclosed 

SD-2V-S-SK 

CSS-T 

CSS-T-A 

Junction box, for Din rail mounting 

T-shaped connector for series wiring 

Terminal connector 

SD-2V-F-SK 

SD-2V-S-SK 

Description 

Wiring tools enabling a fast and smooth series-wiring 

of electronic sensors and solenoid interlocks of the 

CSS, AZ/AZM 200 and MZM family. 

• T-adapter CSS-T 

PULSE-ECHO sensors with serial diagnostic can be 

daisy-chained by means of T-adapters and conventional 

cables with 5/8-pole connectors and sockets. The 

number of participants is limited by the 2 A-fuse. 

• SD junction box 

To be used preferably for the series-wiring of MZM 

and AZM components with high power demand IP 65 

enclosure or open IP 00 design for control cabinet 

mounting. 

The SD junction box and the T-adapter are suitable for 

the series-wiring of components with serial diagnostic. 

When components with conventional diagnostic output 

are daisy-chained, only the safety channels are wired 

in series. 

SD-2V-S-SK 

SD-2V-F-SK 

DIMENSIONS & PIN ASSIGNMENTS 

WIRING EXAMPLE 

CSS-T 

CSS-T-A 

206

HINGED SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCHES 

Switch 

Series 


Housing 

Material 

Angular Displacement 

for Contact Opening 




Page 

TESF 

Die-cast zinc 

Adjustable 

1 NO & 2 NC 

2 NO & 2 NC 

208 

TESZ 

Glass-fiber, 

4.5° 

1 NO & 2 NC 

212 


3 NC 

ES95 SB 

Glass-fiber, 


7° 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

214 

TVS335 

T.C 235 

Die-cast aluminum, 

enamel finish 

Die-cast zinc, 

enamel finish 

2° 

4.5° 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NC 

216 

218 

7 

T.C 236 

Glass-fiber, 


4.5° 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NC 

218 

207

SERIES TESF 

Description 

The TESF Series is designed for use with movable hinged 


Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC 

contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than 

conventional, spring-driven limit switches or proximity 

switches often used to monitor hinged guard positions. 

Their compact, low-profile design and IP65 rating make 

them ideal for interlocking hinged safety guards in industrial 

environments. Designed to mount directly on the hinged 

guard and its stationary frame, it is easy to install on a wide 

range of extruded aluminum guard sizes and other guard 

styles. 

Among its unique features is its ability to adjust the switching 

point in the field to meet specific application requirements.* 

Once adjusted, the switching point is easily permanently 

locked to prevent further adjustment by unauthorized 

personnel. In addition it features top or bottom cable entries, 

1 NO or 2 NO and 2 NC contacts, designs suitable for insideor 

outside-guard mounting, and the ability to open a full 180°. 

*Note: The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at 

a 3° opening angle with positive-break occurring at 5°. 

Please note that with use this factory-set point may 

increase 2° during lifetime. This should be considered ... 

especially where finger or hand protection is desired. 

Operation 

The installed TESF features two integral contact blocks … 

each featuring a NO and a NC contacts. NC contacts are 

positive-opening, while the NO contact(s) may be used for 

signaling purposes. The electromechanical switch elements 

are actuated when the hinged guard is opened to the user’s 

desired switching position (angle of opening). At this point the 

unit’s positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to 

open by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism, while 

the normally-open contacts close. The opening of the positivebreak 

NC contacts ensure circuit interruption and machine 

stoppage. Machine restart is not possible while the 

guard remains opened. 

208 

® 


Adjustable Switching Point 

Hinged Interlock Switch 


• Tamper-resistant … integral switch elements and actuator 

prevent bypassing. 

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit 

interruption when guard is opened to user’s desired 

switching position (angle of opening). 

• User-selectable switching point … makes unit suitable for 

a wide range of applications. 

• Models available for inside-of-guard or front-of-guard 

mounting … for application versatility. 

• Choice of top or bottom cable entry … for installation 

flexibility. 

• Permits wide guard opening … up to 180°. 

• Splash-proof design … meets IP65 environmental 

requirements. 

• Slotted mounting holes … permit installation to most 

30mm to 60mm aluminum profiles. 

• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse and 



of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of EN 

954-1. 


(Includes hinge switch assembly and additional hinge) 

Part Number 

Type 

(Contacts) 

Description Connections 

TESF/O 

(2NO & 2NC) 

TESF/180 

(2NO & 2NC) 

TESF/U 

(2NO & 2NC) 

TESF/ST24.1PE/U 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESF/ST24.2PE/U 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESF/ST24.1PE/O 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESF/ST24.2PE/O 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESF/ST24.1PE/180 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESF/ST24.2PE/180 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESFA/180 

(2NO & 2NC) 

TESFA/ST24.1PE/180 

(1NO & 2NC) 

TESFA/ST24.2PE/180 

(1NO & 2NC) 

Part Number 

TESF/S 

TESFA/S 

TESF-14 

For front installation with factory 

set switching point at 3° 

For inside installation with factory 


For front or inside installation with 

user adjustable switching point 













Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable 

guard frame alignment 

aid. For inside installation with 

factory set switching point at 3° 










Description 

Switching Point Adjustment Tool 

Screw 

terminals 

Screw 

terminals 

Screw 

terminals 

24VDC 

Quick disconnect 

(bottom entry) 

24VDC 


(top entry) 

24VDC 



24VDC 


(top entry) 

24VDC 



24VDC 


(top entry) 

Screw 

terminals 

24VDC 



24VDC 


(top entry) 

A 22 mm gap between the door and door frame is required for models with the 

alignment aid and for inside mount models. 

Additional hinge assembly (without alignment aid) 

Additional hinge assembly (with integral alignment aid)

SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA 


Materials of Construction Housing & hinge: die-cast zinc 

Cover: thermoplastic 

Factory Set Displacement 3°* 

Angle for NC Contact 

Opening and NO Contact 

Closing 

Degree of Protection 

IP65 

Maximum Opening Angle 180° 



> 10 6 Operations (minimum) 

Mechanical Loading Capacity F1: 5000 N (110 lbs.) 

(See dimensional drawings) F2: 5000 N (110 lbs.) 

F3: 2000 N (45 lbs.) 

Installed Position 

Random 

Operating Rate 

1200 operations/hour (maximum) 

Shock Tolerance 

30g/18ms 

Vibration Tolerance 

20g, 10 … 200 Hz 

Cable Entry M16 x 1.5 

Maximum Actuation Speed 180°/0.3 seconds 

Conformity to Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UL 


EN 954-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

CE 



Silver-nickel, gold-plated 


2A/250 VAC (AC15) 

1A/24 VDC (DC13) 

Contact System 

Cross Point System 

Contact Force 

1N per contact 


Slow-acting, positive-break 

NC contacts 

Short-Circuit Protection 2.0 A (Slow blow) 

Rated Impulse 

2.5 kV 


Rated Insulation Voltage 250 VAC 

Thermal Rated Current 2.5 A 

Rated Operating Voltage 250 VAC 

Switching of Small Loads 5 VDC/1 mA (minimum) 

Electrical Connections* Screw terminals for 15AWG 

maximum stranded wire or 

24 VDC quick disconnect: 

M12 (8 Pole) 

Front installation: 

Guard closed 

Front installation: 

Guard opened through 180° 

Inside installation: 

Guard closed 

Inside installation: 

Guard opened through 180° 

CONNECTOR PIN CONFIGURATION 



7 

*The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at a 3° opening 

angle and positive-break occurring at 5° (with consideration of the 

tolerances and wear at the end of the mechanical lifetime, relative to 

the factory preset). Please note that with use this factory-set point may 

increase 2° during lifetime. This should be considered … especially 

where finger or hand protection is desired. Note: On connector 

models contact 43-44 is not wired. 

209


DIMENSIONS (SWITCH & HINGE ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS) 

M16 x 1.5 

(Top) 

Optional Alignment Aids 

F3 

(Bottom) 

F1 

F2 

DIMENSIONS (ADDITIONAL HINGE SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS) 

F3 

F1 

F2 

210


DETERMINING THE DOOR GAP AS DEPENDENT ON OPENING ANGLE, DOOR WIDTH AND OVERLAP 

Opening angle “ß” of the door 3° 4° 5° 6° 7° 8° 9° 10° 

Door width “C” in mm 

Door gap “D” in millimeters with overlap “B” = 0 mm 

100 5.2 7.0 8.7 10.4 12.2 13.9 15.6 17.4 

150 7.8 10.5 13.1 15.7 18.3 20.9 23.5 26.0 

200 10.5 13.9 17.4 20.9 24.4 27.8 31.3 34.7 

250 13.1 17.4 21.8 26.1 30.5 34.8 39.1 43.3 

300 15.7 20.9 26.1 31.3 36.5 41.7 46.9 52.1 

350 18.3 24.4 30.5 36.6 42.6 48.7 54.7 60.7 

400 20.9 27.9 34.8 41.8 48.7 55.6 62.5 69.4 

450 23.5 31.4 39.2 47.0 54.8 62.6 70.4 78.1 

500 26.2 34.9 43.6 52.2 60.9 69.6 78.2 86.8 

550 28.8 38.3 47.9 57.5 67.0 76.5 86.0 95.5 

600 31.4 41.8 52.3 62.7 73.1 83.5 93.8 104.1 

650 34.0 45.3 56.6 67.9 79.2 90.4 101.6 112.8 

700 36.6 48.8 61.0 73.1 85.3 97.4 109.4 121.5 

750 39.2 52.3 65.3 78.4 91.4 104.3 117.3 130.2 

800 41.8 55.8 69.7 83.6 97.4 111.3 125.1 138.8 

850 44.5 59.3 74.0 88.8 103.5 118.2 132.9 147.5 

900 47.1 62.7 78.4 94.0 109.6 125.2 140.7 156.2 

950 49.7 66.2 82.8 99.3 115.7 132.1 148.5 164.9 

1,000 52.3 69.7 87.1 104.5 121.8 139.1 156.4 173.6 

1,050 54.9 73.2 91.5 109.7 127.9 146.1 164.2 182.2 

1,100 57.5 76.7 95.8 114.9 134.0 153.0 172.0 190.9 

1,150 60.2 80.2 100.2 120.1 140.1 160.0 179.8 199.6 

1,200 62.8 83.7 104.5 125.4 146.2 166.9 187.6 208.3 

1,250 65.4 87.2 108.9 130.6 152.3 173.9 195.4 217.0 

1,300 68.0 90.6 113.2 135.8 158.4 180.8 203.3 225.6 

1,350 70.6 94.1 117.6 141.0 164.4 187.8 211.1 234.3 

1,400 73.2 97.6 122.0 146.3 170.5 194.7 218.9 243.0 

1,450 75.8 101.1 126.3 151.5 176.6 201.7 226.7 251.7 

1,500 78.5 104.6 130.7 156.7 182.7 208.7 234.5 260.3 

Calculation example 

The actual door gap “D1” is calculated from the door gap “D” calculated according 

to the above table less the overlap of door and frame “B”: 

D1 = D – B 

Example: A door made of 40 mm aluminium profile with a length of 950 mm is to 

be secured with a TESF. According to the technical data sheet the safety contact of 

the TESF opens at 3° in new state (5° at end of useful life). In new state a door gap 

of approx. 49.7 mm is derived from the above table. The actual door gap, calculated 

using the above formula D1 = D – B produces (49.7 – 40 = 9.7); D1 = 9.7 mm. At 

the end of useful life there is a door gap of approx. 82.8 mm and an actual door 

gap of (82.8 – 40 = 42.8); D1 = 42.8 mm. 

7 

211

Series TESZ 

Hinged Safety Interlock Switch 


• Tamper-resistant … integral switch element and actuator 

prevents bypassing. 


interruption upon only 4° of guard displacement. 

• Splashproof design … meets IP65 environmental 

requirements. 

• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse and 




954-1. 

• Easy to install … fits most popular extruded hinged guard 

designs. 

• Compatible with popular extruded profile widths. 

• Optional integral manual reset … please consult factory. 

Part Number* 



(Guard Closed) 

Description 

Description 

The TESZ Series are designed for use with hinged movable 




conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to 

monitor hinged-guard position. Their compact, low-profile 

design and IP65 rating make them ideal for interlocking 

hinged safety guards in industrial environments. Designed to 

mount directly on the hinged guard and its stationary frame, it 

is easy to install on a wide range of guard styles and sizes. 

TESZ1102/30 

TESZ1110/30 

TESZ1102/35 

TESZ1110/35 

TESZ1102** 

TESZ1110** 

TESZ1102/45 

TESZ1110/45 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

1 NO & 2 NC 

3 NC 

Hinged safety interlock 

switch for 30mm width 

extruded guards 










Operation 

The installed TESZ features an integral electromechanical 

switch element which is actuated when opening a hinged 

machine guard. After opening the guard only 4°, the unit’s 

positive-break, normally-closed contact(s) are forced to open 

by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These 

positive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption and 

machine stoppage. The normally-open signalling contact 

closes after 13.5° of guard displacement. 


*Includes hinge assembly with switch, switch actuator and an 

additional hinge assembly (without switch or switch actuator). 

**Available with stainless-steel hinges. (Please consult factory) 


Part Number* 

Description 

TESZ/S/30 

Hinge assembly (without switch or switch 

actuator) for 30mm width extruded guards 

TESZ/S/35 

TES/S 

TES/S/45 

*Includes hinge and hinge pin. 







11 

12 

0 4° 

13 5° 

21 

33 

22 

34 

TESZ1102 

11-12 

21-22 

33-34 

13 ° 

11 

12 

0 4° 

13 5° 

212 

21 

31 

22 

32 

TESZ1110 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32

SERIES TESZ TECHNICAL DATA 


Materials of Construction Hinge: Aluminum 

Switch Cover: Thermoplastic 

Displacement Angle for 4° 

NC Contact Opening 


Displacement Angle for 13.5° 

NO Contact Closing 

DIMENSIONS* 

Maximum Opening Angle 135° 



>10 

mm 

operations 

Mechanical Loading Maximum torque of 3KN/m at 

Capacity inch 1m distance from hinge 


1,200 operations/hour (maximum) 

Shock Tolerance 

30g/18ms 

Vibration Tolerance 20g/10… 200Hz 

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 EN 954-1 

EN60947-5-1 CE 

BG-GS-ET-15 UL 









Rated Impulse Withstand 

Voltage 

Electrical Connections 

Fine silver 



bridges 

2A (250VAC), AC-15, DC-13 

Slow-acting, positive-break NC 

contact 

6.0A (Slow blow) 

250VAC (maximum) 

2.5kV 

Screw terminals for 15 AWG 

maximum stranded wire size 

DIMENSIONS 

36 

1.42 

TESZ1102 & TESZ1110 

SERIES 

135° 

Part Number Dimension “A” Dimension “B” Dimension “C” 

TESZ1102/30 

TESZ1110/30 

1.34" (34mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm) 

TESZ1102/35 

TESZ1110/35 

1.53" (39mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm) 

TESZ1102 

TESZ1110 

1.73" (44mm) 3.62" (92mm) 2.44" (62mm) 

TESZ1102/45 

TESZ1110/45 

1.93" (49mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm) 

5 

.20 

19 

.75 

M20 

76 

2.99 

42 

1.65 

71 

2.80 

0° 

15 

.59 

5 

.20 

TESZ/S SERIES 

mm 

inch 

"C" 

"B" 

92 

3.62 

7 

"A" 

"A" 

71 

2.80 

® 


213

Series TVS335 



• Tamper-resistant … integral actuation shaft prevents 

bypassing. 


interruption upon only 3° of guard displacement. 

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and 

immersion requirements. 





954-1. 

• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation 

flexibility. 

• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display of 

supply voltage and switch operation. 

Description 

The TVS335 Series are designed for use with hinged movable 





monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them 

ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments. 

Part Number 

TV8S-335-11Z 

TV8S-335-02Z 




1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

Description* 


switch with 8mm 

diameter shaft bore 

hole 

Operation 

The TVS335 is a single-piece, electromechanical safety 

interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged 

machine guard. After opening the guard only 3°, the unit’s 

positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open by 

a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreak 

contacts ensure circuit interruption (and machine 

stoppage). 



See Page 320. 

TV10S-335-11Z 

TV10S-335-02Z 

TV8S-335-11ZG24 

TV8S-335-02ZG24 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 


switch with 10mm 


hole 


switch with 8 mm 


and integral LED 

indicators for supply 

voltage (green) and 

switch operation 

(yellow) 

TV10S-335-11ZG24 

TV10S-335-02ZG24 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 


switch with 10 mm 


and integral LED 

indicators for supply 

voltage (green) and 

switch operation 

(yellow) 

*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions. 

216 

® 


TVS335 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Diecast aluminum, enamel finish 

Displacement Angle 3° 





>10 6 operations 




EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET15 

EN 50041 UL 


EN 954-1 

DIMENSIONS 








Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 

4A (230VAC) 

2.5A (400VDC) 

1A (500VAC) 


contacts 

Fuse 6A (time-delay) 

500VAC 

6kV 

Screw terminals with selflifting 

clamps 13AWG (2.5mm 2 ) 

maximum wire size 

mm 

inch 

*Travel positive break 



13 

21 

TV8S 335-11z 

TV10S 335-11z 

14 

22 

354° 3° 0 3° 354° 

13-14 

21-22 

7° 7° 

TV8S 335-02z 

TV10S 335-02z 

11 

21 

12 

22 

354° 3° 0 3° 354° 

11-12 

21-22 

7° 7° 

LED Indicators 

Green LED (gn) indicator for 

supply voltage and yellow 

LED (ge) indicator for switch 

operation for 24VDC. The 

LED’s must not be wired, 

however, in the safety 

circuit! 

Shown here: 

TV8S 335-11zG24 

Shown here: 

NO contact (model -11ZG24) serves for alarm and 

signaling purposes. 

7 

Protected against wrong polarity connection. 

Protected against transient voltages. 

217

Series T.C 235/236 



• Tamper-resistant … integral actuator arm prevents 

bypassing by operator. 


interruption upon only 4.5° of guard displacement. 

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and 

immersion requirements. 





954-1. 

• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation 

flexibility. 

Description 

The T.C 235/236 Series are designed for use with hinged 

movable machine guards which must be closed for operator 

safety. Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC 



monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them 

ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments. 

Operation 

The T.C 235/236 is a single-piece, electromechanical safety 

interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged 

machine guard. After opening the guard only 4.5°, the unit’s 

positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open by 

a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreak 

contacts ensure circuit interruption (and machine 

stoppage). 


The T.C 235/236 is intended for use as a safety interlock 

switch on hinged, movable machine guards which, when 

open, expose operator/maintenance personnel to machine 

hazards. Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant seals 

make them ideal for use in hostile environments. 

Part Number 

T3C235-11Z 

T3C236-11Z 

T3C235-02Z 

T3C236-02Z 

T3C235-01Z 

T3C236-01Z 

T4C235-11Z 

T4C236-11Z 

T4C235-02Z 

T4C236-02Z 

T4C235-01Z 

T4C236-01Z 

T5C235-11Z 

T5C236-11Z 

T5C235-02Z 

T5C236-02Z 

T5C235-01Z 

T5C236-01Z 




1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NC 

1 NC 

Description* 


switch with actuating lever 

to right in rest position 



vertical to switch body in 

rest position 



to left in rest position 

*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions. 

218 

® 


T.C 235/236 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

(Series 235): Diecast zinc, enamel 

finish 

(Series 236): Glass-fiber, reinforced, 

self-extinguishing thermoplastic 

Displacement Angle 4.5° 





>106 operations 



Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET15 

EN 60947-5-1 DIN-EN50047 

EN ISO 13849-1 UL 

EN 954-1 CSA 

CE 








Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 

4A (230VAC) 

2.5A (400VDC) 

1A (500VAC) 


contacts 

Fuse 6A (time-delay) as a 

positive-break switch 

500VAC 

6kV 


clamps for 13AWG (2.5mm2) 

maximum wire size 



See Page 320. 

7 

219

T.C 235 TECHNICAL DATA 

Types of Actuator Levers 

Lever 3 C 

Lever 4 C 

Lever 5 C 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 

M20 

M20 

M20 

Contact Function Diagrams 

Slow action 

1 NO + 1 NC 

13 

21 

14 

22 

180° 

T3C 235-11z 

3,5° 0 

12,5° 4,5° 

13-14 

21-22 

T4C 235-11z 

90° 3,5° 0 3,5° 90° 

12,5° 

12,5° 

13-14 

21-22 

4,5° 4,5° 

T5C 235-11z 

0 3,5° 

180° 

13-14 

21-22 

4,5° 12,5° 

Slow action 

2 NC 

11 

21 

12 

22 

T3C 235-02z 

180° 12,5° 4,5° 

12,5° 4,5° 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

T4C 235-02z 

90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90° 

12,5° 

12,5° 

4,5° 

4,5° 

12,5° 

12,5° 

11-12 

21-22 

T5C 235-02z 

0 4,5° 12,5° 180° 

11-12 

21-22 

4,5° 12,5° 

Slow action 

2 

1 NC 

11 12 

T3C 235-01z 

180° 12,5° 4,5° 

0 

11-12 

T4C 235-01z 

90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90° 

12,5° 12,5° 11-12 

T5C 235-01z 

0 4,5° 12,5° 180° 

11-12 

220

T.C 236 TECHNICAL DATA 

Types of Actuator Levers 

Lever 3 C 

Lever 4 C 

Lever 5 C 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 

Contact Function Diagrams 

Slow action 

1 NO + 1 NC 

13 

21 

14 

22 

180° 

T3C 236-11z 

3,5° 0 

12,5° 4,5° 

13-14 

21-22 

T4C 236-11z 

90° 3,5° 0 3,5° 90° 

12,5° 

12,5° 

13-14 

21-22 

4,5° 4,5° 

T5C 236-11z 

0 3,5° 

180° 

13-14 

21-22 

4,5° 12,5° 

Slow action 

2 NC 

11 

21 

12 

22 

T3C 236-02z 

180° 12,5° 4,5° 

12,5° 4,5° 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

T4C 236-02z 

90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90° 

12,5° 

12,5° 

4,5° 

4,5° 

12,5° 

12,5° 

11-12 

21-22 

T5C 236-02z 

0 4,5° 12,5° 180° 

4,5° 

12,5° 

11-12 

21-22 

Slow action 

2 

1 NC 

11 12 

T3C 236-01z 

180° 12,5° 4,5° 

0 

11-12 

T4C 236-01z 

90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90° 

12,5° 12,5° 11-12 

T5C 236-01z 

0 4,5° 12,5° 180° 

11-12 

7 

221

222 

Safer 

by 

Design

SAFETY-RATED LIMIT SWITCHES 

Switch 

Series 

Housing 

Material 

Housing 

Dimensions 

Z/T235 Die-cast zinc 1 1 ⁄4"×1 1 ⁄4"×2 1 ⁄2" 

Z/T236 

Glass-fibre reinforced 

thermoplastic 

1 1 ⁄4"×1 1 ⁄4"×2 1 ⁄2" 

Z/T335 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄4"×3" 

Z/T336 

Glass-fibre reinforced 

thermoplastic 

1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄2"×3" 

Z332 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄2"×3" 


Degree of 

Protection 

IP67 

IP67 

IP67 

IP67 

IP65 



1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NO 

2NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NO 

2NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NO 

2NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

2 NO 

2NC 

1 NO & 1 NC 

(snap-action 

only) 


Page 

224 

232 

240 

246 

252 

7 

223

SERIES Z/T235 

Description 

The Z/T235 Series limit switches are designed for use with 

movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed 

for operator safety … and for any other presence/position 

sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit 

switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher 

level of safety and reliability than conventional spring-driven 

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. 

Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators … 

rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod 

rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way 

roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All 

rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are 

adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments. 

Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action 

contacts. 


alternatives to conventional limit switches. 


The Z/T235 Series may be used in any presence/position 

sensing application normally addressed with conventional 

limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are 

approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications 

the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element 

of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to 

exceed the positive-break point. 

Safety-Rated, Positive-Break 

Miniature DIN Limit Switches 


• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut. 



environments. 

• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility. 

• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide 

installation flexibility. 

• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy 


• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break 

contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications. 


of EN ISO 13849-1and Safety Control Categories of EN 

954-1. 

PART NUMBER INFORMATION 

➀➁235-➂Z➃➄ 

➀Contact operation 

➁Operating Head 



See Page 320. 

T 

Z 

S 

R 

4S 

4R 

K 

3K 

4K 

K4 

V7H 

V10H 

V12H 

V14H 

➂Contact Configuration 02 

11 

20 

➃Special extras 

H 

UE 

Z 

-1637 

➄Connection 

 

-NPT 

-ST 

Slow action 

Snap Action 

*Not for use in safety applications 

Note: See pages 226-230 for specific part numbers 

for available models. 

Rounded plunger 

Roller plunger 

Rounded plunger (threaded collar) 

Roller plunger (threaded collar) 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 

Roller rocking lever* 

Rod rocking lever* 

Roller rocking lever 


2 NC 

1 NO/1 NC 

2 NO* 

Staggered contacts 

Overlaping contacts 

Sealing of V operating head 

Gold contacts 

M20 threaded opening 

1/2" NPT treaded opening 

M12x1, 4 pin connector 

® 


224

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Chromated diecast zinc with brown 

enamel finish 




Minimum Cam Speed Z235 Series: 0.04m./minute 

(Referenced to Plunger) T235 Series: 2.4m./minute 

Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hour 

Bounce Time 

Z235 Series: £ 3 ms 

T235 Series: Function of cam speed 

Changeover Time Z235 Series: £ 5 ms for minimum 

cam speed 




EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50 047 


EN 954-1 UL 

CE 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 

Z235 Series: 2x0.08 inches 

(2x2mm) 

T235 Series: 2x0.14 inches 

(2x3.5mm) 

4A/230VAC 

2.5A/400VAC 


contacts (Z235) 


contacts (T235) 

Fuse: 10A (time delay) 

2.5A (no time delay 

6A (time delay) as positive-break 

position switch 

500VAC 

6kV 

Screw terminals, maximum 

2.5mm (AWG13) wire 

CONTACT SYSTEMS 

Series T235 

Slow-action 

switch 

Series Z235 

Snap-action 

switch 

7 

225


Contact function diagrams 

Snap action positive break 

1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

2,5 

4,8 

6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

ZS 235-11z 

0 

2,5 

4,8 

6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

ZR 235-11z 

1 

21-22 

1 

21-22 

Slow action 

1 NO + 1 NC (break before make) 

0 3,5 6 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

TS 235-11z 

0 3,5 6 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

TR 235-11z 

0 3,5 6 

0 3,5 6 

2 NO (simultaneous) 

3,5 

13-14 

23-24 

TS 235-20z 

3,5 

13-14 

23-24 

TR 235-20z 

2 NC (simultaneous) 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

2,5 3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

TS 235-02z 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

2,5 3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

TR 235-02z 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 

Types of Actuators 

Actuating force/-torque 

Actuating speed Z/T at 


Style S 

9 N (19 N positive break) 

0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s 


Style R 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 

positive break 

ZS 235-11z 

ZR 235-11z 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow action 

Slow action 

TS 235-11z 

TS 235-20z* 

TR 235-11z 

TR 235-20z* 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow action 

TS 235-02z 

TR 235-02z 

226 

* Not for use in safety applications


0 

2,5 

6 

0 

2,5 

6 

0 

3,6 

9,3 

4,8 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4S 235-11z 

4,8 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4R 235-11z 

13-14 

7,1 21-22 

ZK 235-11z 

1 

13-14 

21-22 

1 

13-14 

21-22 

1,4 

13-14 

21-22 

0 3,5 6 

0 3,5 6 

0 5,2 

9,3 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

T4S 235-11z 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

T4R 235-11z 

3,6 

5,5 

13-14 

21-22 

TK 235-11z 

0 3,5 6 

0 3,5 6 

0 5,2 

9,3 

13-14 

23-24 

T4S 235-20z 

13-14 

23-24 

T4R 235-20z 

13-14 

23-24 

TK 235-20z 

3,5 

3,5 

5,2 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

0 3,6 5,5 9,3 

2,5 

3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

T4S 235-02z 

2,5 

3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

T4R 235-02z 

3,6 

5,5 

11-12 

21-22 

TK 235-02z 

Rounded plunger (central mounting) 

Style 4S 

Top roller plunger (central mounting) 

Style 4R 

One-way roller lever 

Style K 







7 

Z4S 235-11z 

Z4R 235-11z 

ZK 235-11z 

T4S 235-11z 

T4R 235-11z 

TK 235-11z 

T4S 235-20z* 

T4R 235-20z* 

TK 235-20z* 

T4S 235-02z 

T4R 235-02z 

TK 235-02z 

* Not for use in safety applications 

227




1 NO + 1 NC 

70° 

30° 0 30° 70° 

13-14 

57° 57° 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

12° 12° 

ZV12H 235- 

11z 

70° 

30° 0 30° 70° 

13-14 

57° 57° 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

12° 12° 

ZV14H 235- 

11z 

Slow action 




70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

45° 

30° 

30° 

45° 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

41° 

41° 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 

45° 

45° 

30° 

30° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

TV12H 235- 

11z 

TV12H 235- 

20z 

TV12H 235- 

02z 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 

41° 

41° 

45° 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

41° 

41° 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 

45° 

45° 

30° 

30° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

TV14H 235- 

11z 

TV14H 235- 

20z 

TV14H 235- 

02z 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 




13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 



Style 12H 

15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break) 


ZV12H 235-11z 


Style 14H 



ZV14H 235-11z 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow action 

Slow action 

TV12H 235-11z 

TV12H 235-20z* 

TV14H 235-11z 

TV14H 235-20z* 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow action 

TV12H 235-02z 

TV14H 235-02z 

228 



70° 

30° 0 30° 70° 

13-14 

57° 57° 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

12° 12° 

ZV7H 235- 

11z 

70° 

30° 0 30° 70° 

13-14 

57° 57° 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

12° 12° 

ZV10H 235- 

11z 

0 

1,2 

2,8 

7 

13-14 

5,5 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

Z3K 235- 

11z 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 

41° 

41° 

45° 

13-14 

21-22 

TV7H 235- 

11z 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

45° 

30° 

30° 

45° 

13-14 

21-22 

TV10H 235- 

11z 

0 4 7 

2,8 

4,3 

13-14 

21-22 

T3K 235- 

11z 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

41° 

41° 

13-14 

23-24 

TV7H 235- 

20z 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

41° 

41° 

13-14 

23-24 

TV10H 235- 

20z 

0 4 7 

4 

13-14 

23-24 

T3K 235- 

20z 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 

45° 

45° 

30° 

30° 

11-12 

21-22 

TV7H 235- 

02z 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 11-12 

45° 45° 21-22 

30° 30° 

TV10H 235- 

02z 

0 2,8 4,3 7 

2,8 

4,3 

11-12 

21-22 

T3K 235- 

02z 

Adjustable roller rocking lever* 

Style 7H 


Style 10H 


Style 3K 



ZV7H 235-11z* 



ZV10H 235-11z* 



Z3K 235-11z 

7 

TV7H 235-11z* 

TV10H 235-11z* 

T3K 235-11z 

TV7H 235-20z* 

TV10H 235-20z* 

T3K 235-20z* 

TV7H 235-02z* 

TV10H 235-02z* 

T3K 235-02z 


229




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

2 

5 

12 

13-14 

9,6 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4K 235- 

11z 

0 

1,8 

4,9 

12,8 

13-14 

10,1 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

ZK4 235- 

11z 

Slow action 


0 7 12 

5 

7,6 

13-14 

21-22 

T4K 235- 

11z 

0 7,2 12,8 

4,9 

7,7 

13-14 

21-22 

TK4 235- 

11z 


0 7 12 

7 

13-14 

23-24 

T4K 235- 

20z 

0 7,2 12,8 

7,2 

13-14 

23-24 

TK4 235- 

20z 


0 5 7,6 12 

5 

7,6 

11-12 

21-22 

T4K 235- 

02z 

0 4,9 7,7 12,8 

4,9 

7,7 

11-12 

21-22 

TK4 235- 

02z 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style 4K 


Style K4 







13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


Z4K 235-11z 

ZK4 235-11z 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow action 

Slow action 

T4K 235-11z 

T4K 235-20z* 

TK4 235-11z 

TK4 235-20z* 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow action 

T4K 235-02z 

TK4 235-02z 

230 

*Not for use in safety applications.

Safer 

by 

Design 

7 

231

SERIES Z/T236 

Safety-Rated, Positive-Break 

Miniature DIN Limit Switches 





environments. 










954-1. 

Description 






level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven 









contacts. 

Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced housing and IP67 rating 

make them ideal alternatives to conventional limit switches. 










➀➁236-➂Z➃➄ 



T 

Z 

S 

R 

4S 

4R 

1R 

K 

3K 

4K 

K4 

V1H 

V7H 

V10H 


11 

20 


H 

UE 

Z 

-1637 


 

NPT 

-ST 

Slow action 

Snap Action 



Rounded plunger (threaded collar) 

Roller plunger (threaded collar) 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 

Roller lever 




2 NC 

1 NO/1 NC 

2 NO* 



Sealing of V operating head 

Gold contacts 





Note: See pages 234-238 for specific part numbers for available models. 

232 

® 




Housing 

Glass fiber reinforced selfextinguishing 

thermoplastic 




Minimum Cam Speed Z236 Series: 0.04m./minute 

(Referenced to Plunger) T236 Series: 2.4m./minute 


Bounce Time 

Z236 Series: £ 3 ms 


Changeover Time Z236 Series: £ 5 ms for minimum 

cam speed 




EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50 047 


EN 954-1 

UL 

CE 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 


(2x2mm) 


(2x3.5mm) 

4A/230VAC 

2.5A/400VAC 


contacts (Z236) 


contacts (T236) 


2.5A (no time delay 

6A (time delay) as positive-break 


500VAC 

6kV 



CONTACT SYSTEMS 

Series T236 

Slow-action 

switch 

Series Z236 

Snap-action 

switch 

7 

233




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

2,5 

4,8 

6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

ZS 236-11z 

0 

2,5 

4,8 

6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

ZR 236-11z 

1 

21-22 

1 

21-22 

Slow action 


0 3,5 6 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

TS 236-11z 

0 3,5 6 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

TR 236-11z 

0 3,5 6 

0 3,5 6 


3,5 

13-14 

23-24 

TS 236-20z 

3,5 

13-14 

23-24 

TR 236-20z 


0 2,5 3,8 6 

2,5 3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

TS 236-02z 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

2,5 3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

TR 236-02z 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 





Style S 




Style R 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


ZS 236-11z 

ZR 236-11z 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow action 

Slow action 

TS 236-11z 

TS 236-20z* 

TR 236-11z 

TR 236-20z* 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow action 

TS 236-02z 

TR 236-02z 

234 



0 

2,5 

6 

0 

2,5 

6 

0 

3,6 

9,3 

4,8 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4S 236-11z 

4,8 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4R 236-11z 

13-14 

7,1 21-22 

ZK 236-11z 

1 

13-14 

21-22 

1 

13-14 

21-22 

1,4 

13-14 

21-22 

0 3,5 6 

0 3,5 6 

0 5,2 

9,3 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

T4S 236-11z 

2,5 

3,8 

13-14 

21-22 

T4R 236-11z 

3,6 

5,5 

13-14 

21-22 

TK 236-11z 

0 3,5 6 

0 3,5 6 

0 5,2 

9,3 

13-14 

23-24 

T4S 236-20z 

13-14 

23-24 

T4R 236-20z 

13-14 

23-24 

TK 236-20z 

3,5 

3,5 

5,2 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

0 2,5 3,8 6 

0 3,6 5,5 9,3 

2,5 

3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

T4S 236-02z 

2,5 

3,8 

11-12 

21-22 

T4R 236-02z 

3,6 

5,5 

11-12 

21-22 

TK 236-02z 

Rounded plunger (central mounting) 

Style 4S 

Top roller plunger (central mounting) 

Style 4R 

Top roller lever 

Style K 

9N (19N positive break) 


9 N (19N positive break) 




7 

Z4S 236-11z 

Z4R 236-11z 

ZK 236-11z 

T4S 236-11z 

T4R 236-11z 

TK 236-11z 

T4S 236-20z* 

T4R 236-20z* 

TK 236-20z* 

T4S 236-02z 

T4R 236-02z 

TK 236-02z 


235



0 

2,7 

7 

13-14 


1 NO + 1 NC 

ZV1H 236- 

11z 

5,4 

21-22 

13-14 

Z1R 236- 

11z 

21-22 

1 

Slow action 


TV1H 236- 

11z 

0 

2,3 

7 

13-14 

21-22 

T1R 236- 

11z 

1 


70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

13-14 

23-24 

TV1H 236- 

20z 

0 

2,3 7 

13-14 

23-24 

T1R 236- 

20z 

41° 

41° 

2,3 


70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 

45° 

45° 

11-12 

21-22 

TV1H 236- 

02z 

0 

1 2,3 

7 

11-12 

21-22 

T1R 236- 

02z 

30° 

30° 

2,3 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 





Style 1H 



Top roller lever 

Style 1R 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


ZV1H 236-11z 

Z1R 236-11z 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow action 

Slow action 

TV1H 236-11z 

TV1H 236-20z* 

T1R 236-11z 

T1R 236-20z* 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow action 

TV1H 236-02z 

T1R 236-02z 

236 



0 

2,8 

7 

13-14 

ZV7H 236- 

11z 

ZV10H 236- 

11z 

5,5 21-22 

13-14 

Z3K 236- 

11z 

21-22 

1,2 

TV7H 236- 

11z 

TV10H 236- 

11z 

0 4 7 

2,8 

4,3 

13-14 

21-22 

T3K 236- 

11z 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

41° 

41° 

13-14 

23-24 

TV7H 236- 

20z 

70° 41° 0 41° 70° 

41° 

41° 

13-14 

23-24 

TV10H 236- 

20z 

0 4 7 

4 

13-14 

23-24 

T3K 236- 

20z 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 

45° 

45° 

11-12 

21-22 

TV7H 236- 

02z 

70° 30° 0 30° 70° 

45° 45° 

45° 45° 

11-12 

21-22 

TV10H 236- 

02z 

0 2,8 4,3 7 

11-12 

21-22 

T3K 236- 

02z 

30° 

30° 

30° 

30° 

2,8 

4,3 

Adjustable roller rocking lever* 

Style 7H 


Style 10H 


Style 3K 







7 

ZV7H 236-11z* 

ZV10H 236-11z* 

Z3K 236-11z 

TV7H 236-11z* 

TV10H 236-11z* 

T3K 236-11z 

TV7H 236-20z* 

TV10H 236-20z* 

T3K 236-20z* 

TV7H 236-02z* 

TV10H 236-02z* 

T3K 236-02z 


237




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

2 

5 

12 

13-14 

9,6 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4K 236- 

11z 

0 

1,8 

4,9 

12,8 

13-14 

10,1 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

ZK4 236- 

11z 

Slow action 


0 7 12 

5 

7,6 

13-14 

21-22 

T4K 236- 

11z 

0 7,2 12,8 

4,9 

7,7 

13-14 

21-22 

TK4 236- 

11z 


0 7 12 

7 

13-14 

23-24 

T4K 236- 

20z 

0 7,2 12,8 

7,2 

13-14 

23-24 

TK4 236- 

20z 


0 5 7,6 12 

5 

7,6 

11-12 

21-22 

T4K 236- 

02z 

0 4,9 7,7 12,8 

4,9 

7,7 

11-12 

21-22 

TK4 236- 

02z 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style 4K 


Style K4 







13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


Z4K 236-11z 

ZK4 236-11z 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow action 

Slow action 

T4K 236-11z 

T4K 236-20z* 

TK4 236-11z 

TK4 236-20z* 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow action 

T4K 236-02z 

TK4 236-02z 

238 


Safer 

by 

Design 

7 

239

SERIES Z/T335 

Description 















contacts. 











Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated, 

Positive-Break Limit Switches 





environments. 










954-1. 

• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display of 

supply voltage and switch operation. 


➀➁335-➂Z➃➄ 





See Page 320. 

T 

Z 


11 

20 

12 

03 

01/01 


H 

UE 

-1637 


Slow action 

Snap Action 

S Rounded plunger 

R Roller plunger 

4VH Roller rocking lever 

4V7H Roller rocking lever* 

4V10H Rod rocking lever* 

1K Roller lever 


 

NPT 

-ST 


Note: See pages 242-244 for specific part numbers 

for available models. 

2 NC 

1 NO/1 NC 

2 NO* 

1 NO/2 NC 

3 NC 

1 NC (left) & 1 NC (right) 



Gold contacts 




® 

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL INC. 

240



Housing 

Diecast aluminum with enamel 

finish 





Bounce Time 

Z335 Series: < 2 ms 


Changeover Time Z335 Series: < 2 ms for cam speed 

of 1 mm/minute 




EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50041 


EN 954-1 

UL 

CE 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 



4A/230VAC 

2.5A/400VAC 

Z335 Series: Snap-action with 

positive-break NC 

contacts 

T335 Series: Slow-action, 


contacts 


16A (no time delay 

6A (time delay) as positivebreak 


500VAC 

6kV 


2.5mm 2 (AWG13) wire 

SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS 

SLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS 

Slow Action Switch 

T335 

Snap Action Switch 

Z335 

LED INDICATOR MODELS 

Green LED (gn) indicator supply voltage and yellow LED (ye) indicator for switch operation of 

NO or NC contacts for 24VDC. Available for all models of Series 335. 

Shown here: 

Z4VH 335-11zG24 

Wiring diagram: 

7 

Shown here: 

indication of operation of NC contact 

(terminals 21-22); 

for indication of operation of NO contact use 

terminals 13-14 

protected against wrong polarity connection 

protected against transient voltages 700V 

Attention: no inductive loads 

241




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

0 

2 

1 

1,6 

6 

13-14 

3,9 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

3,9 6 

ZS 335-11z 

0 

0 

2 

1 

1,6 

6 

13-14 

3,9 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

3,9 6 

ZR 335-11z 

2 NC 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

ZS 335-02z 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

ZR 335-02z 

21-22 

21-22 

0,8 

0,8 

Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC 

break before make or make before break 

2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered 

(2-step) 

2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered 

(2-step) 

1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW) 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 3 

6 

2 

2,8 

0 3 

6 

3 

0 2 2,8 

6 

TS 335… 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

0 3 

6 

3,7 

4,5 

0 3 

6 

1,3 

0 3,7 4,5 6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 3 

6 

2 

2,8 

0 3 

6 

3 

0 2 2,8 

6 

TR 335… 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

0 3 

6 

3,7 

4,5 

0 3 

6 

1,3 

0 3,7 4,5 6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

2 

2,8 

2 

2,8 

2 

2,8 

2 

2,8 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style S 


Style R 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


ZS 335-11z 

12 N 

ZR 335-11z 

12 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Snap Action 


ZS 335-02z 

12 N 

ZR 335-02z 

12 N 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow Action 

Make before break 

Slow Action 

2-step 

TS 335-11z 

TS 335-11zu 

TS 335-20z* 

TS 335-20zh* 

15 N 

17 N 

TR 335-11z 

TR 335-11zu 

TR 335-20z* 

TR 335-20zh* 

15 N 

17 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow Action 

2-step 

TS 335-02z 

TS 335-02zh 

14 N 

TR 335-02z 

TR 335-02zh 

14 N 

242 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow Action 

1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW 



80° 

24° 0 24° 

80° 

80° 

24° 0 24° 

80° 

80° 

24° 0 24° 

80° 

45° 45° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

Z4VH 335-11z 

45° 45° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

Z4V7H 335-11z 

45° 45° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

Z4V10H 335-11z 

12° 12° 

21-22 

12° 12° 

21-22 

12° 12° 

21-22 

80° 

45° 0 

45° 80° 

80° 

45° 0 

45° 80° 

80° 45° 0 

45° 80° 

11-12 

11-12 

11-12 

19° 19° 

21-22 

11-12 

Z4VH 335-02z 

19° 19° 

21-22 

11-12 

Z4V7H 335-02z 

19° 19° 

21-22 

11-12 

Z4V10H 335-02z 

21-22 

21-22 

21-22 

8° 8° 

8° 8° 

8° 8° 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

T4VH 335… 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

34° 

34° 21-22 

56° 56° 21-22 

24° 24° 

4 5° 

45° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

23-24 

23-24 

36° 

36° 

16° 16° 

80° 24° 0 24° 80° 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

34° 

34° 11-12 

56° 

56° 11-12 

34° 

34° 21-22 

34° 

34° 21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

-11z 

-20z 

T4V7H 335… 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

34° 

34° 21-22 

56° 56° 21-22 

24° 24° 

4 5° 

45° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

23-24 

23-24 

36° 

36° 

16° 16° 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-11z 

-20z 

T4V10H 335… 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

34° 

34° 21-22 

56° 56° 21-22 

24° 24° 

45° 45° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

23-24 

23-24 

36° 

36° 

16° 16° 

-11zu 

-20zh 

24° 24° 

24° 24° 

80° 0 24° 58° 

-01/01zh 

50° 11-12 

21-22 

24° 

-02z 

80° 24° 0 24° 80° 

34° 

34° 11-12 

34° 

34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

56° 

56° 11-12 

34° 

34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

-02zh 

-02z 

80° 24° 0 24° 80° 

34° 34° 11-12 

34° 34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

56° 

56° 11-12 

34° 34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

-02zh 

4V operating head with 

roller rocking lever 

Style H 



adjustable roller rocking lever 

Style 7H* 



rod rocking lever 

Style 10H* 


Z4VH 335-11z 

27 Ncm 

Z4V7H 335-11z* 

27 Ncm 

Z4V10H 335-11z* 

27 Ncm 

7 

Z4VH 335-02z 

27 Ncm 

Z4V7H 335-02z* 

27 Ncm 

Z4V10H 335-02z* 

27 Ncm 

T4VH 335-11z 

T4VH 335-11zu 

27.5 Ncm 

T4V7H 335-11z* 

T4V7H 335-11zu* 

27.5 Ncm 

T4V10H 335-11z* 

T4V10H 335-11zu* 

27.5 Ncm 

T4VH 335-20z* 

T4VH 335-20zh* 

28 Ncm 

T4V7H 335-20z* 

T4V7H 335-20zh* 

28 Ncm 

T4V10H 335-20z* 

T4V10H 335-20zh* 

28 Ncm 

T4VH 335-02z 

T4VH 335-02zh 

27.5 Ncm 

T4V7H 335-02z* 

T4V7H 335-02zh* 

27.5 Ncm 

T4V10H 335-02z* 

T4V10H 335-02zh* 

27.5 Ncm 

TVH 335-01/01z 

26.5 Ncm 

(other levers upon request) 


243




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

0 

2,1 

1 

1,6 

6,3 

13-14 

4,2 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

6,3 

Z1K 335-11z 

0 4,5 

2,2 

0 3,6 

11 

13-14 

8,8 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

11 

Z3K 335-11z 

2 NC 

4,2 

4,2 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

Z1K 335-02z 

8,8 

8,8 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

Z3K 335-02z 

21-22 

21-22 

0,8 

1,4 




(2-step) 


(2-step) 


-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 3,2 

6,3 

13-14 

21-22 

2,1 3 

0 6,3 

13-14 

23-24 

3,2 

0 2,1 3 

6,3 

11-12 

21-22 

2,1 3 

T1K 335… 

0 3,2 

6,3 

13-14 

21-22 

4 5 

0 3,2 

6,3 

13-14 

23-24 

1,3 

0 4 5 6,3 

11-12 

21-22 

2,1 3 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 6,6 

11 

4,5 

6,3 

0 11 

6,6 

0 4,5 6,3 11 

4,5 

6,3 

T3K 335… 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

0 6,6 11 

8,2 9,9 

0 6,6 11 

2,8 

0 4,5 8,2 11 

4,5 6,3 

9,9 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style 1K 


Style 3K 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


Z1K 335-11z 

12 N 

Z3K 335-11z 

5.0 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Snap Action 


Z1K 335-02z 

12 N 

Z3K 335-02z 

5.0 N 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow Action 


Slow Action 

2-step 

T1K 335-11z 

T1K 335-11zu 

T1K 335-20z* 

T1K 335-20zh* 

15 N 

17 N 

T3K 335-11z 

T3K 335-11zu 

T3K 335-20z* 

T3K 335-20zh* 

6.3 N 

7.2 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow Action 

2-step 

T1K 335-02z 

T1K 335-02zh 

14 N 

T3K 335-02z 

T3K 335-02zh 

6.0 N 

244 


Safer 

by 

Design 

7 

245

SERIES Z/T336 







environments. 










954-1. 

Description 















contacts. 

Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced thermoplastic housing and 

IP67 rating make them ideal alternatives to conventional limit 

switches. 










➀➁336-➂Z➃➄ 



T 

Z 


11 

20 

01/01 


H 

UE 

-1637 


Slow action 

Snap Action 

S Rounded plunger 

R Roller plunger 

4VH Roller rocking lever 

4V7H Roller rocking lever* 

4V10H Rod rocking lever* 



 

-NPT 

-ST 

2 NC 

1 NO/1 NC 

2 NO* 

1 NC (left) & 1 NC (right) 



Gold contacts 





Note: See pages 248-250 for specific part numbers for available models. 

246 

® 




Housing 

Glass fiber reinforced selfextinguishing 

thermoplastic 





Bounce Time 

Z336 Series: < 2 ms 


Changeover Time Z336 Series: < 2 ms for cam speed 

of 1 mm/minute 




EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50041 


EN 954-1 UL 

CE 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 



4A/230VAC 

2.5A/400VAC 



contacts 

T336 Series: Slow-action, 


contacts 





500VAC 

6kV 




SLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS 

Slow Action Switch 

T336 

Snap Action Switch 

Z336 

7 

247




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

0 

2 

1 

1,6 

6 

13-14 

3,9 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

3,9 6 

ZS 336-11z 

0 

0 

2 

1 

1,6 

6 

13-14 

3,9 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

3,9 6 

ZR 336-11z 

2 NC 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

ZS 336-02z 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

ZR 336-02z 

21-22 

21-22 

0,8 

0,8 




(2-step) 


(2-step) 


-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 3 

6 

13-14 

21-22 

2 2,8 

0 3 

6 

3 

13-14 

23-24 

0 2 2,8 

6 

11-12 

21-22 

TS 336… 

0 3 

6 

13-14 

21-22 

3,7 4,5 

0 3 

6 

13-14 

23-24 

1,3 

0 3,7 4,5 6 

11-12 

21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 3 

6 

2 

2,8 

0 3 

6 

3 

0 2 2,8 

6 

TR 336… 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

0 3 

6 

3,7 

4,5 

0 3 

6 

1,3 

0 3,7 4,5 6 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

2 

2,8 

2 

2,8 

2 

2,8 

2 

2,8 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style S 


Style R 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


ZS 336-11z 

12 N 

ZR 336-11z 

12 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Snap Action 


ZS 336-02z 

12 N 

ZR 336-02z 

12 N 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow Action 


Slow Action 

2-step 

TS 336-11z 

TS 336-11zu 

TS 336-20z* 

TS 336-20zh* 

15 N 

17 N 

TR 336-11z 

TR 336-11zu 

TR 336-20z* 

TR 336-20zh* 

15 N 

17 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow Action 

2-step 

TS 336-02z 

TS 336-02zh 

14 N 

TR 336-02z 

TR 336-02zh 

14 N 

248 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow Action 

1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW 



80° 

24° 0 24° 80° 

13-14 

45° 45° 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

12° 12° 

Z4VH 336-11z 

80° 

24° 0 24° 80° 

13-14 

45° 45° 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

12° 12° 

Z4V7H 336-11z 

80° 

24° 0 24° 

45° 45° 

12° 12° 

80° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4V10H 336-11z 

80° 

45° 0 45° 80° 

11-12 

19° 19° 21-22 

11-12 

Z4VH 336-02z 

80° 

45° 0 45° 80° 

11-12 

19° 19° 21-22 

11-12 

Z4V7H 336-02z 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

11-12 

19° 19° 21-22 

11-12 

Z4V10H 336-02z 

21-22 

21-22 

21-22 

8° 8° 

8° 8° 

8° 8° 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

T4VH 336… 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

34° 

34° 21-22 

56° 56° 21-22 

24° 24° 

4 5° 

45° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

23-24 

23-24 

36° 

36° 

16° 16° 

80° 24° 0 24° 80° 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

34° 

34° 11-12 

56° 

56° 11-12 

34° 

34° 21-22 

34° 

34° 21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

-11z 

-20z 

T4V7H 336… 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

34° 

34° 21-22 

56° 56° 21-22 

24° 24° 

4 5° 

45° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

23-24 

23-24 

36° 

36° 

16° 16° 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-11z 

-20z 

T4V10H 336… 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

34° 

34° 21-22 

56° 56° 21-22 

24° 24° 

45° 45° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

80° 36° 0 36° 80° 

13-14 

13-14 

23-24 

23-24 

36° 

36° 

16° 16° 

-11zu 

-20zh 

24° 24° 

24° 24° 

80° 0 24° 58° 

-01/01zh 

50° 11-12 

21-22 

24° 

-02z 

80° 24° 0 24° 80° 

34° 

34° 11-12 

34° 

34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

56° 

56° 11-12 

34° 

34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

-02zh 

-02z 

80° 24° 0 24° 80° 

34° 34° 11-12 

34° 34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

80° 45° 0 45° 80° 

56° 

56° 11-12 

34° 34° 21-22 

24° 24° 

-02zh 



Style H 


adjustable roller rocking lever 

Style 7H* 



Style 10H* 




Z4VH 336-11z 

27 Ncm 

Z4V7H 336-11z* 

27 Ncm 

Z4V10H 336-11z* 

27 Ncm 

7 

Z4VH 336-02z 

27 Ncm 

Z4V7H 336-02z* 

27 Ncm 

Z4V10H 336-02z* 

27 Ncm 

T4VH 336-11z 

T4VH 336-11zu 

T4VH 336-20z* 

T4VH 336-20zh* 

T4VH 336-02z 

T4VH 336-02zh 

27.5 Ncm 

28 Ncm 

27.5 Ncm 

T4V7H 336-11z* 

T4V7H 336-11zu* 

T4V7H 336-20z* 

T4V7H 336-20zh* 

T4V7H 336-02z* 

T4V7H 336-02zh* 

27.5 Ncm 

28 Ncm 

27.5 Ncm 

T4V10H 336-11z* 

T4V10H 336-11zu* 

T4V10H 336-20z* 

T4V10H 336-20zh* 

T4V10H 336-02z* 

T4V10H 336-02zh* 

27.5 Ncm 

28 Ncm 

27.5 Ncm 

TVH 336-01/01z 26.5 Ncm 

(other levers upon request) 


249




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

0 

2,1 

1 

1,6 

6,3 

13-14 

4,2 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

6,3 

Z1K 336-11z 

0 4,5 

2,2 

0 3,6 

11 

13-14 

8,8 21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

11 

Z3K 336-11z 

2 NC 

4,2 

4,2 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

Z1K 336-02z 

8,8 

8,8 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

Z3K 336-02z 

21-22 

21-22 

0,8 

1,4 




(2-step) 


(2-step) 


-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 3,2 

6,3 

13-14 

21-22 

2,1 3 

0 6,3 

13-14 

23-24 

3,2 

0 2,1 3 

6,3 

11-12 

21-22 

2,1 3 

T1K 336… 

0 3,2 

6,3 

13-14 

21-22 

4 5 

0 3,2 

6,3 

13-14 

23-24 

1,3 

0 4 5 6,3 

11-12 

21-22 

2,1 3 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

-11z 

-20z 

-02z 

0 6,6 

11 

4,5 

6,3 

0 11 

6,6 

0 4,5 6,3 11 

4,5 

6,3 

T3K 336… 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

0 6,6 11 

8,2 9,9 

0 6,6 11 

2,8 

0 4,5 8,2 11 

4,5 6,3 

9,9 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

23-24 

11-12 

21-22 

-11zu 

-20zh 

-02zh 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style 1K 


Style 3K 



13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


Z1K 336-11z 

12 N 

Z3K 336-11z 

5.0 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Snap Action 


Z1K 336-02z 

12 N 

Z3K 336-02z 

5.0 N 

Part No. 

13 

21 

13 

23 

14 

22 

14 

24 

Slow Action 


Slow Action 

2-step 

T1K 336-11z 

T1K 336-11zu 

T1K 336-20z* 

T1K 336-20zh* 

15 N 

17 N 

T3K 336-11z 

T3K 336-11zu 

T3K 336-20z* 

T3K 336-20zh* 

6.3 N 

7.2 N 

11 

21 

12 

22 

Slow Action 

2-step 

T1K 336-02z 

T1K 336-02zh 

14 N 

T3K 336-02z 

T3K 336-02zh 

6.0 N 

250 


Safer 

by 

Design 

7 

251

SERIES Z332 







environments. 

• Five popular actuator styles … for application versatility. 



• Safety-system approved … for use in machine guarding 

applications. 



954-1. 

Description 

The Z332 Series limit switches are designed for use with 







Each is available with a choice of five standard actuators … 


rocking lever and adjustable roller rocking lever … mountable 

in any one of four 90° positions. All rocking levers are 

positively-locked to the shaft, and are adjustable throughout 

360° in 10° increments. 




Z➀332-11Y➁ 

➀Operating Head 

➁Connection 

S 

R 

4VH 

4V7H 

4V10H 

 

-ST 









Note: See page 254, 255 for specific part numbers for available models. 


The Z332 Series may be used in any presence/position 


switches. Featuring positive-break NC contacts, they are 





252 

® 


Z332 TECHNICAL DATA 


Housing 

Diecast aluminum with enamel 

finish 




Minimum Cam Speed 1 mm/minute 

(Referenced to Plunger) 


Bounce Time 

2 ms 

Changeover Time 1.5 ms for minimum cam speed 



EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15 

EN ISO 13849-1 DIN EN 50041 

EN 954-1 CSA 

Contact System 









Rated Impulse 



Fine silver 



bridges 

2 × 0.05 in. immediately after 

switching 

2 × 0.19 in. with full travel of 

actuator 

2.5A/250VAC 



contacts 





250VAC 

6kV 



Magnetic storage 

snap-action system 


• Snap-action switching, 1 NO 1 NC 

• Change-over, double-gap with four terminals 

• Two electrically separated moving contacts 

• Plated solid silver contacts 

• Positive-break NC contact with snap-action switching 

• Reliable change-over, even with slow plunger actuation 

• Snap-action system separated from contact system 

• Full contact force right up to operating point 

• Constant operating position, as independent of contact burning 

• Short, constant flight time of only 1.5 ms 

• Short bounce time 

• High short-circuit resistance 

• High vibration resistance of 10 g still only 0.01 mm before operating point 

• Wide contact gap of 2 × 1.25 mm immediately after switching point 

7 

253




1 NO + 1 NC 

0 

2 

6 

13-14 

3,2 21-22 

13-14 

ZS 332-11y 

0 

2 

6 

13-14 

3,2 21-22 

13-14 

ZR 332-11y 

21-22 

21-22 

1,4 

1,4 

Dimensions 

mm 

inch 



Style S 


Style R 



Part No. 

13 

21 

14 

22 

Snap Action 


ZS 332-11y 

31 N 

ZR 332-11y 

31 N 

254


90° 24° 0 24° 

90° 

90° 24° 0 24° 

90° 

90° 

24° 0 24° 

90° 

13-14 

39° 39° 21-22 

15° 15° 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4VH 332- 

11y 

13-14 

39° 39° 21-22 

15° 15° 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4V7H 332- 

11y 

15° 15° 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

Z4V10H 332- 

11z 



Style H 



adjustable roller lever 

Style 7H* 




Style 10H* 


Z4VH 332-11y 

35 Ncm 

Z4V7H 332-11y* 

35 N 

Z4V10H 332-11y* 

35 Ncm 


7 

255

258 

Safer 

by 

Design

SAFETY LIGHT CURTAINS & BEAMS 


Series Description Range Page 

SLB 200 Safety Category 2 Light Beam 4m 268 

SLB 400 Safety Category 4 Light Beam 15m 269 

SLC 220/SLG 220 Type 2 Safety Light Curtain & Grid 14m 276 

SLG 220-P Type 2 Safety Light Grid, Reflective 6m 277 

SLC 220 IP69K Type 2 Safety Light Curtain, IP69K Rated 14m 279 

SLC 420 Type 4 Safety Light Curtain & Grid 18m 280 

SLC 420 IP69K Type 4 Safety Light Curtain, IP69K Rated 10m 282 

SLG 422-P Type 4 Safety Light Grid, Reflective 7m 283 

SLC 430 Type 4 Safety Light Curtain, Compact housing 3.5m 284 

SLC 425I Type 4 Safety Light Curtain, Muting 10m 287 

Accessories Installation accessories — 290 

8 

259

Introduction – Optoelectronic safety sensors 

EN 61496 

The field of automation is 

subject to a permanent and 

innovative change of products 

and applications. The focus is 

on increasing the productivity 

and realizing a smooth-running 

production process with 

a minimum of human interventions 

on machinery and 

systems. The ideal, a fully 

automated and totally safe 

machine however will always 

remain a dream, though the 

robots used in production 

plants already are a big step 

towards this goal. 

Human intervention and 

knowledge will always be 

required for the commissioning, 

monitoring and maintenance 

of modern industrial 

systems. Man however is not 

infallible and ignorance or lack 

of information, thoughtlessness 

or negligence often 

leads to damages. 

For these reasons European 

directives such as the 

Machinery Directive 98/37/EC 

(2006/42/EG) and their corresponding 

standards were 

implemented at European 

level. These standards aim at 

detecting and constructively 

avoiding all possible risks and 

hazards during the planning 

and project phase of 

machines and systems. 

Safety components must be 

used to minimize or eliminate 

the residual risks. 

In this way, manufacturers 

and users are making equivalent 

efforts to set up an optimal 

process flow, which offers 

the highest possible protection 

to the operating staff. The 

challenge for all manufacturers 

of safety components is to 

design efficient and safe 

product solutions for mechanical 

engineers. Flaps and 

doors are the simplest means 

of access to the machine. 

These separating hardguarding 

safety solutions offer an 

efficient and effective protection 

against hazardous movements 

and products being 

ejected from the machine. 

When these safety guards are 

opened, the machine is 

brought to standstill (through 

the corresponding safety sensor 

transmitting the “stop” 

signal to the control), which 

interrupts and therefore slows 

down the production. In case 

of continuous processes, 

which must not be interrupted, 

solenoid interlocks protect 

man and the work piece 

against damages. 

Safety fences are not suitable 

for production processes 

requiring the material to be 

transported into the working 

area by means of conveyor 

belts, as it does not allow for 

an ergonomic and optimal 

work sequence. 

A “virtual safety guard“ in the 

form of an active optoelectronic 

device (AOPD), e.g. a 

safety light curtain, is a perfect 

solution, offering both an 

optimal protection of human 

life and uninterrupted production 

process. 

260

Typical applications: 

• Power-driven machines 

• Power-driven presses in 

metalworking, plastics, 

leather, stone working and 

rubber processing industry 

• Folding presses and cutters 

• Filter presses 

• Punching machines in 

leather, textile and plastics 

processing 

• Robots stations and welding 

booths 

• Printing and injection 

molding machines 

• Transportation systems 

• Pallet loaders and palletizers 

• Materials handling and 

storage technology 

• and so on 

Depending on the application, 

the AOPD are used for point of 

operation, danger zone and 

perimeter guarding. The user 

can choose from a large range 

of different optoelectronic safety 

solutions e.g. light barriers, 

light grids, light curtains and 

laser scanners. 

8 

261

Design and operating principle 

Optoelectronic 

Safety light barriers 

The safety light barrier systems 

of the SLB range are 

active optoelectronic protective 

devices (AOPD) fulfilling 

the Control Category 2 or 4 in 

accordance with EN 954-1 or 

EN 61496, or PL c or PL e in 

accordance with EN ISO 

13849-1. These systems are 

used as entry guards on hazardous 

zones, points of operation 

and entrances. They 

protect human life without 

restricting the production flow. 

Typical applications for safety 

light barriers are on robots, 

automatic-processing plants, 

transfer lines, rack storages 

and pallet loaders. 

The entire safety light barrier 

system includes a light emitter, 

a light receiver and a safety 

monitoring module. This 

module monitors the signals 

of the emitter. 

If the light beam is interrupted, 

a signal is emitted to bring 

the dangerous movement of 

the machine to standstill. The 

safety monitoring module 

integrates functions such as 

start and restart inhibit as well 

as a contactor monitoring. 

The maintenance-free safety 

sensors of the system with 

protection class IP 67 offer an 

integrated soiling check. 

Because of their small size, 

safety light barriers can be fitted 

almost everywhere. 

Safety light grids / 

light curtains 

The safety light curtains and 

safety light grids of the SLC 

and SLG meet the requirements 

of Control Category 2 or 

4 to EN 954-1 and Type 2 or 

Type 4 to EN 61496, or PL c or 

PL e in accordance with EN ISO 

13849-1. They safeguard 

points of operation and hazardous 

areas on different applications, 

e.g. presses, robot 

stations, injection molding 

machines, pallet machines, etc. 

In these active optoelectronic 

protective devices (AOPD), 

the emitter and receiver are 

fitted in two separate enclosures. 

An invisible infrared 

signal is sent from the emitter 

and monitored by the receiver. 

If the light beam is interrupted 

by an object or a person, a 

stop signal is emitted to bring 

the machine to standstill. 

The protection field is defined 

by the height and width of the 

protection field. The protected 

height is the range between 

the first and last infrared light 

beam of a light curtain. The 

protected height defines the 

physical size of the system to 

be used. 

The protected width or operating 

range is the distance 

between the transmitter and 

receiver unit. 

For an accurate detection of 

objects with different sizes in 

the hazardous area, the user 

can choose between light 

grids and light curtains with 

different resolutions. Here, the 

following rule applies: the 

smaller the distance between 

two adjacent light beams, the 

more accurate the detection 

sensitivity of the AOPD. 

For the detection of body 

parts, a distinction is made 

between finger, hand and 

body protection. 

EN 999 or DIN EN ISO 13857 

sets the biometric data for finger 

protection to 14 mm, for 

hand detection to 30 mm, for 

leg detection up to 70 mm 

and for body detection to over 

70 mm. 

Safety light grids with 2, 3 

or 4 individual beams are 

generally used to detect the 

penetration of the entire 

human body. Safety light 

curtains are multiple beam 

systems (> 5 individual 

beams) and can also detect 

smaller objects in case of 

intrusion into the protected 

field. The maintenance- free 

safety light curtains and light 

grids can be smoothly fitted 

using an M12 connector and 

are equipped a diagnostic 

interface and LED indication 

for status messages. 

Depending on the type of 

safety light curtain or light grid 

used, the components offer 

an integrated monitoring 

module with start/restart 

inhibit and external device 

monitoring. Additional functions 

such as blanking, muting 

and cascading of the light 

curtains are available as well. 

The SLC and SLG product 

series therefore offer a 

maximum of flexibility for 

safeguarding different points 

of operation. 

262

safety systems 

Important conditions for 

the use of optoelectronic 

safety devices: 

In order to choose the appropriate 

active optoelectronic 

protective device (AOPD) such 

as light barriers, light curtains/grids 

and laser scanners 

and to use them correctly, 

both the requirements of the 

standards (EN 61496, EN 999, 

EN 294, C standards etc.) and 

product-specific features 

(detection sensitivity, range, 

etc.) must be taken into 

account. AOPD’s can be 

used, provided that: 

• the dangerous movement 

can be stopped at all times 

and that it is ensured that 

the dangerous area can only 

be reached after the movement 

has come to standstill, 

• the dangerous movement 

can be stopped at all times 

and that it is ensured that 

the dangerous area can only 

be reached after the movement 

has come to standstill, 

• the run-out time of the 

machine and all safety components 

is known, 

• no objects (work pieces, 

sparks, liquids, etc.) can 

be ejected, 

• the AOPD meet the requirements 

of Type 2 or Type 4 

acc. to EN 61496, 

• the dangerous area can only 

be reached by passing 

through the protected field of 

the AOPD, 

• reaching over, under or 

through the protected field is 

impossible, 

• the start or restart command 

devices are fitted in such a 

way that the entire hazardous 

area is completely visible 

from the outside and that it 

cannot be activated from 

within the hazardous area 

• and the safety distance is calculated 

and constructively 

applied in accordance with 

EN 999. 

The effectiveness of the safety 

guard corresponds to the risk 

assessment, which was carried 

out during the planning and 

design phase, taking all important 

boundary conditions, e.g. 

environment, machine and 

function into account. 

Protected width (operating range) 

Protected height 

8 

Light beam 

263

Application 

Safety distance 

EN 999 

Safety distances for light 

curtains 

Between the interruption of a 

light beam and the standstill 

of the machine, a certain time 

expires. The safety light grid 

or light curtain must be sized 

and installed such that a stop 

would be signaled and the 

hazard ceased prior to a person 

or a body part accessing 

the hazard. 

The standard EN 999 provides 

the user with detailed information 

about the calculation 

of the minimum safety distances. 

These include the 

following important influencing 

factors: 

• run-out time of the entire 

system, taking the different 

reaction times of the individual 

systems into account 

(e.g. machine, safety monitoring 

module, AOPD etc.) 

• capacity of the AOPD to 

detect body parts (fingers, 

hand and entire human 

body) 

• set-up of the safety guard in 

normal condition (vertical fitting), 

parallel condition (horizontal 

fitting) or at an arbitrary 

angle in front of the 

safety guard and 

• the speed at which the protection 

field is approached. 

For the calculation of the minimum 

safety distance S to the 

hazardous area, EN 999 presents 

the following general formula: 

S = K x T + C 

Where: 

S the safety distance to the 

dangerous area (mm) 

K the approach speed of the 

body or the body part 

(mm/s) 

T the entire reaction time of 

the system(s) (including the 

machine’s run-out time, the 

reaction time of the safety 

guard and the safety monitoring 

module etc.) 

C additional distance (mm) in 

front of the safety guard 

Normal approach 

for light curtains: 

(Resolution: max. 40 mm) 

The minimum safety distance 

S is calculated in the following 

way: 

S = 2000 T + 8 (D-14) 

(D = Resolution) 

This formula applies to safety 

distances up to 500 mm. The 

minimum safety distance 

Smin may not be less than 

100 mm. 

If the calculation produces a 

distance larger than 500 mm 

for S, the calculation can be 

repeated with a lower 

approach speed: 

S = 1600 T + 8 (D-14) 

In this case, Smin may not be 

less than 500 mm. 

Light curtain 

Approach 

direction 

If the dangerous area of the 

machine is accessible from 

the top because of its particular 

construction, the height H 

of the topmost beam of the 

light barrier must be at least 

1800 mm above the base G 

of the machine. 


for light curtains: 

(Resolution: from 40 mm 

up to max. 70 mm) 


S is calculated in the following 

way: 

S = 1600 T + 850 

The height of the topmost 

light beam must be at least 

900 mm, the height of the 

lowermost light beam maximum 

300 mm above the bottom 

(for the protection of children 

younger than 14: 200 

mm). 

Point of 

operation 

Reference floor 

264


for light grids: 

(Resolution: > 70 mm) 


S is calculated using the 

following formula: 

S = 1600 T + 850 

For safety guards with 

multiple beams, height H (mm) 

above the reference floor of 

the individual beams must be 

applied in the following way: 

Number Height above the 

of beams reference floor 

2 400, 900 

3 300, 700, 1100 

4 300, 600, 900,1200 

When using light curtains or 

light grids, particular attention 

must be paid to the tampering 

possibilities of the safety 

guard and to the mechanical 

risks (e.g. crushing, shearing, 

cutting, ejection). 

Horizontal approach 

for light curtains/grids 

(resolution: > 50 mm) 


S is calculated using the 

following formula: 

S = 1600 T + 1200 – 0.4 H 

Here, Smin is 850 mm. 

The lowest authorized height 

H depends on the resolution 

D of the light curtain: 

H = 15 (D-50) 

For this type of safety guard, 

the maximum height H is 

1000 mm. 

In the risk analysis, special 

attention must be paid to the 

prevention of unintentional 

undetected access from 

underneath the protection 

field. 

Further calculation examples 

can be found in DIN EN 999 

as well as in the mounting 

instructions of the SLC/SLG 

safety sensors. 

Point of 

operation 

Point of 

operation 

Light 

curtain/grid 

Direction of 

approach 

Direction of 

approach 


Light 

curtain/grid 


8 

265

Modes of operation and functions 

Master/Slave cascading 

Muting 

Blanking /Floating Blanking 

For the SLC/SLG…M/S product 

series, the master light 

curtain can be extended with 

another (slave) light curtain 

(cascading). In this way, multiple 

protection fields can be 

generated. A protection field 

is created between the emitter 

and receiver and between the 

slave components. 

This device cascading provides 

for a comfortable and 

efficient protection of contiguous 

protection fields against 

reaching over or through the 

protection field. The slave 

light curtains are connected to 

the master by means of an 

M12 connector. 

The master and slave light 

curtains are available in 

different sizes and resolutions 

and allow for almost any combination. 

If goods or objects must be 

transported in or out of the 

hazardous area without 

stopping the machine, the 

safety light curtain must be 

automatically and temporarily 

suspended. 

To this end, two or four muting 

sensors are used to detect 

whether a person is approaching 

the hazardous area or a 

transport system enters or 

leaves the hazardous area. 

Suitable muting sensors are 

light barriers, proximity switches 

or position switches. 

The integrated safety-muting 

controller of the safety light 

curtain or light grid monitors 

and controls the muting 

process. 

The safety outputs are not disabled. 

Any malfunction of the 

monitored signal source will 

cause the OSSD’s to be 

switched off. Depending on 

the application, different light 

curtains with integrated muting 

function are available. Detailed 

product information can be 

found in this brochure from 

page 33. 

If continuity of the production 

process is required, a part of 

the protection field can be 

blanked without triggering a 

stop signal. 

In this way, objects such as 

work pieces can be fed or a 

conveyor belt can be 

positioned at a fixed position 

in the protection field. 

The integrated floating 

blanking function of the 

SLC…B light curtains enables 

a flexible blanking of up to 2 

adjacent light beams in the 

protection field of the light 

curtain. This function is 

required to ensure that one or 

two adjacent light beams can 

be interrupted at an undefined 

position in the protection field. 

In this way, objects such as 

fixtures or materials with 

slightly varying heights can be 

fed through the light curtain 

without triggering a stop 

signal. Different blanking 

functions are available. The 

distinguishing feature of the 

different modes is the number 

of light beams that can be 

interrupted by an object. In 

addition to that, it can be 

defined whether the object 

may interrupt the protection 

field permanently or only 

temporarily. The interrupted 

light beams can be at any 

position in the protection field. 

Except the first infrared light 

beam (the beam closest to the 

connector), any light beam can 

be used for blanking. 

When blanking is applied, the 

resolution of the light curtain 

changes. The technical 

documentation of the different 

light curtains includes the 

tables with the effective 

resolutions D to calculate the 

minimum safety distance to 

EN 999. 

Further technical product 

information can be found in 

this brochure. 

Master 

Slave 

1 2 

1 Floating-Blanking-Area 

2 Movable object 

266


System features: 

• PL c and PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1 

• Control Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 954-1 

or acc. to EN 61496, Type 2 and Type 4 

• Up to 4 pairs of one-way light barriers can 

be connected 

• Different functions: 

Start/Restart interlock 

Contactor monitoring 

Cyclic testing 

• Integrated soiling check 

• Status and error indication 

• Signalling outputs for external indications 

• Free of maintenance 

• Extremely compact design 

• Simple and flexible mounting and adjustment 

8 

267


SLB 200 

20 

30,8 

¤9,6 

24 

43,4 

50,3 

39,4 

5,5 

16,1 

10 

¤8,5 

¤10 

• Range to 4 m 

• LEDs visible from both sides 

• Protection class IP 67 

18,8 

¤4,4 

Technical data 

Standards: IEC/EN 61496 

Control Category: 2* 

Performance Level: e* 

Enclosure: 

ABS 

10 % GF 

Enclosure dimensions: 31 x 50.5 x 19 mm 

Connection: emitter: 10 cm conductor, 

M8, 3-pole coupler socket 

receiver: 10 cm conductor, 

M8, 4-pole coupler socket 

Max. cable length: 

50 m 

Protection class: IP 67 

Response time: 30 ms * 

Range: 

4 m 

Start/Restart interlock: * 

Contactor control: * 

Light emission 

wavelength: 

880 nm 

Ue: 24 VDC ± 20% 

Safety outputs: * 

Angle of radiation: ± 4° 

Min. size of object: 

9 mm Ø 

LED status indication: soiling, switching 

condition and 

power on 

Ambient temperature: – 10 °C ... + 55 °C 

Storage and 

transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 80 ºC 

System components 

SLB 200-C04-1R 

Connector plug 

* only in combination with safety monitoring 

module SLB 200-C04-1R 

Mounting angle BF 31 

Approvals 

Ordering details 

SLB 200-➀31-21 

No. Option Description 

➀ E Emitter 

R 

Receiver 

268 

Note 

The system components (safety monitoring 

module, cable, etc.) are not included in 

delivery. 

Mounting angle BF UNI 1 


Monitoring of safety light barriers 

SLB 200-C04-1R refer to page 270 

Connector plug (female) for emitter: 

Connector only 


2 meter cable 

A-K3P-M8-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-X-1 

5 meter cable 

A-K3P-M8-S-G-5M-BK-2-X-X-1 

Receiver: 



2 meter cable 

A-K4P-M8-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-X-X 

5 meter cable 

A-K4P-M8-R-G-5M-BK-2-X-X-1 

Mounting angles BF 31 

Mounting angles universal BF UNI 1


SLB 400 



63,5 

13,5 

17 

46 

44 

16 

4 

4,3 

50 

M12x1 

40 

44 

• Range to 15 m 

• Connecting plug can be rotated 

• LED switching conditions display 


4,3 

4 

Standards: IEC/EN 61496 

Control Category: 4* 

Performance Level: e* 

Enclosure: 

ABS 

Enclosure dimensions: 50 x 50 x 17 mm 

Connection: 

M12, 4-pole coupler 

socket, can be rotated 


100 m 


Response time: 

25 ms* 

Range: 

15 m 

Start/Restart interlock: * 

Contactor control: * 

Light emission 

wavelength: 

880 nm 

Ue: 24 VDC ± 20% 

Safety outputs: * 

Angle of radiation: ± 2° 

Min. size of object: 

13 mm Ø 

LED status indication: soiling, switching 

condition and 

power on 

Ambient temperature: 0 °C ... + 60 °C 

Storage and 


* only in combination with safety monitoring 

module SLB 400-C10-1R 

SLB 400-C10-1R 




Approvals 

H 


SLB 400-➀50-21P 


➀ E Emitter 

R 

Receiver 

Note 

The system components (safety monitoring 

module, cable, etc.) are not included in 

delivery. 


Monitoring of safety light barriers 

SLB 400-C10-1R refer to page 272 

Connector plug (female) for emitter/receiver: 


S-K4P-M12-S-G-X-X-X-X-B-1 

2 meter cable 

A-K4P-M12-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-A-1 

5 meter cable 

A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-BK-2-X-A-1 

8 

Mounting angles BF 50 

Mounting angles universal BF UNI 1 

269


SLB 200-C 

• Up to two pairs of light barrier devices can 

be connected 

• Co-ordinated for use with SLB 200 R/E 

safety light barriers 

• 1 safety contact, STOP 0 

• 1 signalling output 

• Operating voltage 24 VDC 

• Test input 

• LED display of switching conditions 

• Response time ≤ 30 ms 

• Start/Restart interlock can be switched 

active or inactive 

• Contactor monitoring can be switched 


• Additional cyclic testing 


Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, IEC 60947-5-3, IEC 61508 

Start conditions: 

Test button, start-resetbutton, on/off coding 

Feedback circuit (Y/N): 

yes 

Max. switching frequency: 

10 Hz 

Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC ± 20% 

Rated operating current Ie: 

180 mA 

Outputs: 

Stop category 0: 1 


Number of safety contacts: 1 

Number of auxiliary contacts: 0 

Number of signalling outputs: 1 

Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts: 

8 A 

Switching capacity of the signalling outputs: 

500 mA 

Max. fuse rating of the safety contacts: 

4 A gG D-fuse 

Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1: 

AC-15: 250 V / 2 A 

DC-13: 24 V / 2 A 

Ambient conditions: 

Environmental temperature: 

0°C…+50°C 

Storage and transport temperature: 

-20°C…+80°C 

Protection class: Enclosure: IP 40, Terminals: IP 20, Clearance: IP 54 

Mounting: Snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 60715 

Connection type: 

Screw connection 

max. cable section: 

4.0 mm 2 (incl. conductor ferrules) 

Dimensions (Height/Width/Depth): 

84 x 45 x 118 mm 

Safety Classifications: 

Performance Level (EN ISO 13849-1): 

up to c 

Control Category (EN954-1): up to 2 

Approvals 


SLB 200-C04-1R 

270


Note 

Wiring diagram 

• Monitoring two pairs of light barrier devices 

and the power contactor using the 

SLB 200-C safety monitoring module 

• Test push button I 

The test push button is connected to X13 

and X14 in order to carry out a check of 

the light barrier monitoring function. The 

terminals X15 and X16 must be bridged. 

• Contactor checkTo monitor an external 

contactor, the feedback circuit is connected 

to X17 and X18. The terminals X19 and X20 

must be bridged. 

• Start push button H 

The start push button can be used to start 

the monitoring of the light barriers for a new 

start or after an interruption. The terminals 

X3 and X4 must be bridged. 

• It is also possible to connect only one pair of 

light barrier devices. 

+24 VDC 

A1 

A2 

BN 

WH 

SLB-R SLB-E SLB-R SLB-E 

1 1 2 2 

BN 

BK 

BN 

WH 

BN 

BK 

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 13 

K3 

K4 

max. 

X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 Y1 X23 14 

L1 

SLB 200-C 

0V 

K1 

N 

3 

M 

Note 

In order to set for the desired mode of 

operation and number of light barriers 

connected, remove the front cover of the 

safety monitoring module. As supplied all 

switches are in Position 1. 

Note 

The required functions can be selected by means of the internal DIP switches. 

DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 

Position 1 With contactor check With start/restart interlock Connection of two 

light barriers 

Position 2 Without contactor check Without start/restart interlock Connection of one 

light barrier 

The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energized condition. 

Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit. 

271


SLB 400-C 

• Up to 4 light barrier pairs SLB 400 

can be connected 

• Co-ordinated for use with SLB 400 R/E 

safety light barriers 

• 2 safety contacts, STOP 0 

• 2 signalling outputs 

• Cross-wire monitoring 


• Operating voltage 24 VDC 

• Feedback circuit to monitor external 

contactors 

• Two short-circuit proof additional 

transistor outputs 

• Response time ≤ 30 ms 

• Start/Restart interlock can be switched 


• Contactor monitoring can be switched 


• Can be coded 


Standards IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, IEC 60947-5-3, IEC 61508 


Start-reset button, on/off coding 


yes 

Max. switching frequency: 

10 Hz 

Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC ± 15% 


0.3 A without additional transistor 

outputs and safety light barriers 

Max. fuse rating of the operating voltage: 

1 A 

Outputs: 







2 A 

Switching capacity of the auxiliary contacts: 

2 A 

Switching capacity of the signalling outputs: 

100 mA 

Max. fuse rating of the safety contacts: 

2 A gG D-fuse 


AC-15: 250 V / 2 A 

DC-13: 24 V / 2 A 

LED display: 

ISD 


Environmental temperature: 

0°C…+55°C 


-25°C…+70°C 




Screw connection 

max. cable section: 

4.0 mm2 (incl. conductor ferrules) 


75 x 99.7 x 110 mm 

Safety Classifications: 

Performance Level (EN ISO 13849-1): 

up to e 

Control Category (EN954-1): up to 4 

Approvals 

H 


SLB 400-C10-1R 

272


Note 

• Monitoring up to four pairs of light barrier 

devices and the power contactors using the 

SLB 400-C safety monitoring module 

• Connection of two pairs of safety light 

barrier devices: 

When two pairs of safety light barriers are 

connected, the terminals X9-X10 and 

X11-X12 must be bridged. 

• Restart push button J 

The restart function can be selected by 

means of the DIP switches. When a start 

push button is connected to X5 and X6, it 

must be operated for min. 250 ms and max. 

5 s after an interruption of the safety light 

barriers. 


SLB-E SLB-R SLB-E SLB-R 

+24 VDC 

1 234 1 234 1234 1234 

A1 

X1 

24V T0 

X2 

Q1 

X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 13 23 33 41 

T2 

R 

Q2 RESTART CONT.M 

Made in Germany 

+ - 

U OUT 

RESTART 

RELAY 

B 

L1 

0V 

A2 

T3 Q3 T4 Q4 PM INDIC. 

UB 

OUT 

+ 

X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 Y1 Y2 - 14 24 34 42 

0V 

0V 

1234 1234 1234 1234 

K4 

SLB-E 

SLB-R 

SLB-E 

SLB-R 

N 

K5 

3 

M 

Note 

The following faults are registered 

by the safety monitoring modules 

and indicated by ISD 

• Short-circuit on the connecting leads 

• Interruption of the connecting leads 

• Failure of the safety relay to pull-in 

or drop-out 

• Fault on the input circuits or the relay control 

circuits of the safety monitoring module 

• Mutual influence between the connected 

pairs of light barrier device and others on 

neighboring systems 

Note 

The ISD tables (Integral System Diagnostics) for analysis of the fault indications and their causes 

are shown in the manual. 


Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of a 

suitable circuit. 

8 

273

Safety light barriers accessories SLB 200 and SLB 400 



Mirror SLB 200/400 SMA 80 

Mounting post ST 1250 

Mounting angle BF SMA 80-1 

Floor-stand base STB 1 

Mounting angle BF SMA 80-2 

T-slot nut NST 20-8 


Mirror SMA 80 

Mounting angles for mirror BF SMA 80-1 

BF SMA 80-2 

T-slot nut NST 20-8 


Mounting post ST 1250 

Floor-stand base STB 1 

274

Safety light curtains and safety light grids 


• PL c and PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1 

• Control Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 61496, 

Type 2 and Type 4 

• Different integrated functions: 

Start/Restart interlock 

Contactor monitoring 

Muting 

Blanking 

Master/Slave configuration 

• Diagnostic display 

• Optical synchronisation 

• Maintenance-free 

• Compact design 

• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment 

8 

275


SLC 220 standard 

SLG 220 standard 


A 

¤40 

• Safety light curtain 

• Control category Type 2 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Resolution 30 and 80 mm 

• Protection field heights from 

175 mm to 1675 mm 

• Integrated start/restart interlock 

• Integrated contactor control † 

• Integrated blanking function † 

• Diagnostic and parametrization interface † 

• Range 0.3 m ... 14 m 

• Integrated self-test 

• Fail-safe transistor outputs 

• Status display 


• Signalling output 

Legend: 

A: Total length 

Protection field height 175 mm: A = 216 mm 

Protection field height 250 ... 1675 mm: 

A = 28.5 mm + Protection field height 

A 

• Safety light grid 

• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid 

• Range 0.3 ... 30 m 

¤40 

Legend: 


A = 78.5 mm + Distance between 

outermost beams 

Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2 

Type 2 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 

Enclosure dimensions: 

ø 40 mm 



M12, 8-pole 


100 m / 1Ω 

Protection class: IP 65 to EN 60529 


9 … 45 ms 

(depends on length 

and resolution) 

Detection sensitivity 

(Resolution): 

30 and 80 mm 

Protection field height: 

Resolution 30 mm 175 ... 1675 mm 


2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm 

Protection field width, 

Range: 

0.3 ... 6 m (Standard), 

SLC 

4 ... 14 m (High range) 

SLG 


Start/restart interlock: 

Integrated 

Contactor control: 

Integrated 

Blanking function: 

Integrated 

Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared) 

Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 

Safety outputs: 

2 x PNP, 200 mA 

Signalling output: 

PNP 100 mA 

Power consumption: Emitter 4 W, 

Receiver 8 W 

Data interface: RS 485 

Status and diagnostics: 

LED display 

Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC 

Storage and 


Classification: 

to IEC/EN 61508: SIL 2 

to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL d 

PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h 

to EN 954-1: Control Cat. 2 

Approvals 

Approvals 


SLC 220-E/R➀-➁RFB-➂ 


➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm) 

Available lengths: 

0175*, 0250*, 0325, 0475, 

0625, 0775, 0925, 1075, 

1225, 1375, 1525, 1675 

➁ 30 Resolution 30 mm 

80 Resolution 80 mm 

➂ 

Range 0.3 m … 6 m 

H 

High Range 4 m … 14 m 

276 

Notes 

* only for resolution 30 mm 


SLG 220-E/R➀RF-➁ 


➀ 

Distance between 

outermost beams: 

0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam 

0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam 

0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam 

➁ 

Range 0.3 m … 6 m 

H 


Mounting brackets are included in the delivery. 



Connector plug M12, 8-pole straight 

for emitter/receiver 

Cable length 5 m 



KA-0904 

KA-0905 

KA-0908 

Notes 

† 

Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned 

off — NSR 0700 required for programming 

these functions


SLG 220-P 

Technical Data 

734,5 

606 

¤ 49 50 50 


• Emitter and receiver in one enclosure 

(retro reflector) 

• Control category Type 2 

to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Protection field heights 500 mm 

• 2-beam light grid 



• Range 0.3 m ... 6 m 





Type 2 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 40 mm 

Deflecting mirror: 

50 x50 x 606 mm 



M12, 8-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 



12 ms 


(Resolution): 

500 mm 


2-beam 

500 mm 

Protection field width, Range: 

2-beam 

0.3 m ... 7 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 

Light emission wavelength: 

880 nm 

(infrared) 

Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 200 mA 


PNP 100 mA 

Power consumption: 

10 W 

Data interface: – 


LED display 


Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL d 

PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h 


Approvals 

F 


SLG 220-P-E/R0500-02RF 

ULS-P-0500 

Safety light grid 

Deflecting mirror 







KA-0904 

KA-0905 

KA-0908 


Notes 

† 



these functions 

8 

277


SLC 220 Master / Slave 





• Protection field height: 

Master from 175 mm to 1675 mm 

Slave from 325 mm to 775 mm 




• Cascading of Master and Slave devices 

• Range 0.3 m ... 6 m 






Approvals 


SLC 220-E/R➀-➁-RFB➂ 




0175*, 0250*, 0325, 0475, 

0625, 0775, 0925, 1075, 

1225, 1375, 1525, 1675 



➂ M Master function 

S 

Slave function** 

Different lengths and resolutions can be 

combined for Master/Slave. 

278 

A 


¤40 

Legend: 


Protection field height 175 mm: A = 216 mm 

Protection field height 250 ... 1675 mm: 




for emitter/receiver 




KA-0904 

KA-0905 

KA-0908 

for Master/Slave connection 

Female connector 2 x M12, 6-pole straight 

Cable length 0.3 m 

KA-0907 


Notes 


** only protected heights from 

325 mm to 775 mm 


Type 2 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 40 mm 



Master Emitter: 

M12, 8-pole, 

Master Receiver: 

M12, 8-pole 

Slave Emitter: 

M12, 6-pole, 

Slave Receiver: 

M12, 6-pole 


100 m / 1Ω 

Max. cable length: (Master/Slave) 0.3 m 



12 … 65 ms 




(Resolution): 

30 and 80 mm 




Protection field width, Range: 0.3 ... 6 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 

Cascading: (Master/Slave) 

possible 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 200 mA 


PNP, 100 mA 


Receiver 8 W 



LED display 


Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL d 

PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h 


Notes 

† 

Curtains are delivered with the EDM 

turned off — NSR 0700 required for 

programming these functions


SLC 220 IP 69K 

SLG 220 IP 69K 


A 



to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 



175 mm to 1675 mm 

• Protection class IP 69K 



• Integrated blanking function 


• Range 0.3 m ... 14 m 





¤60 

Legend: 


A = 54 mm + Protection field height 

A 

¤60 



• Range 0.3 ... 30 m 

Legend: 


A = 104 mm + Distance between 

outermost beams 


Type 2 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 60 mm 


Cable 8-pole 

with connector M12, 8-pole 

5 m long 


100 m / 1Ω 

Protection class: 

IP 69K 


9 … 45 ms 




(Resolution): 

30 and 80 mm 




2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm 

Protection field width, 

Range: 

0.3 ... 6 m (Standard), 

SLC 


SLG 



Integrated 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 200 mA 


PNP, 100 mA 


Receiver 8 W 



LED display 


Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL d 

PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h 


Approvals 

Approvals 


SLC 220-E/R➀-30-69-RFB-➂ 




0175*, 0250*, 0325, 0475, 

0625, 0775, 0925, 1075, 

1225, 1375, 1525, 1675 



➂ 

Range 0.3 m … 6 m 

H 


Notes 



SLG 220-E/R➀-30-69-RF-➁ 


➀ 



0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam 

0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam 

0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam 

➁ 

Range 0.3 m … 6 m 

H 


Mounting brackets (stainless steel) are included in the delivery. 

Notes 

† 

Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned off — NSR 0700 

required for programming these functions 

8 

279


SLC 420 standard 

SLG 420 standard 


A 

¤49 



to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Resolution 14, 30 and 50 mm 


170 mm to 1770 mm 



• Integrated blanking function (fixed and 

mobile blanking) † 


• Range 0.3 m ... 18 m 





Legend: 



Approvals 


A 



• Range 0.3 ... 40 m 

¤49 

Legend: 


2-beam 

A = 734.5 mm 

3 and 4-beam A = 1054.5 mm 


SLC 420-E/R➀-➁-RFB-➂ 

SLG 420-E/R➀-RF-➁ 



➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm) ➀ 




0170, 0250, 0330, 0410, 0490, 0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam 

0570, 0650, 0730, 0810, 0890, 0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam 

0970, 1050, 1130, 1210, 1290, 0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam 

1370, 1450, 1530*, 1610*, ➁ 

Range 0.3 m … 10 m 

1690*, 1770* 

H 





➂ 


Notes 

Range 0.3 m … 7 m** 

* only for resolution 30 mm and 50 mm 

Range 0.3 m … 10 m* 

** only for resolution 14 mm 

H High Range 0.3 m … 18 m*** ***only for resolution 30 mm 

280 

Approvals 


Type 4 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 49 mm 



Emitter: 

M12, 4-pole, 

Receiver: 

M12, 8-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 



10 … 27 ms 

(depends on length and resolution) 


(Resolution): 

14, 30 and 50 mm 



Resolution 30, 50 mm 170 ... 1770 mm 

2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm 


Resolution 14 mm 

0.3 m ... 7 m 

Resolution 30, 50 mm 0.3 m ... 10 m 

High Range 


0.3 m ... 18 m 

2-, 3-, 4-beam 0.3 m ... 10 m 

High Range 

2-, 3-, 4-beam 8 m ... 40 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Integrated 

Cascading: (Master/Slave) – 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 500 mA 


Receiver 8 W 



LED display 


Storage and 



to IEC 62061: SIL 3 

to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h 




Connector plug for emitter 

M12, 4-pole straight 




Connector plug for receiver 





KA-0804 

KA-0805 

KA-0808 

KA-0904 

KA-0905 

KA-0908 

Notes 

† 



these functions


SLC 420 Master / Slave 


Approvals 

A 


SLC 420-E/R➀-➁-RFB-➂➃ 




0170, 0250, 0330, 0410, 0490, 

0570, 0650, 0730, 0810, 0890, 

0970, 1050, 1130, 1210, 1290, 

1370, 1450, 1530*, 1610*, 

1690*, 1770* 




¤49 



• Resolution 14, 30 and 50 mm 

• Protection field height: 

Master from 170 mm to 1770 mm 

Slave from 170 mm to 650 mm 



• Integrated blanking function † 


• Cascading of Master and Slave devices 

• Range 0.3 m ... 7 m or 0.3 m ... 10 m 




Legend: 



➂ 

Range 0.3 m … 7 m** 

Range 0.3 m … 10 m* 

H High Range 0.3 m … 18 m* 

➃ M Master function 

S*** Slave function 


Type 4 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 49 mm 



Master Emitter: 

M12, 4-pole, 

Master Receiver: 

M12, 8-pole 

Slave Emitter: 

M12, 4-pole, 

Slave Receiver: 

M12 1, 8-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 

Max. cable length: (Master/Slave) 0.8 m 



10 … 37 ms 

(Depends on length and resolution) 


(Resolution): 

14, 30 and 50 mm 






0.3 m ... 7 m 

Resolution 30, 50 mm 0.3 m ... 10 m 

High Range 

0.3 m ... 18 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Integrated 

Cascading: (Master/Slave) 

possible 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 500 mA 


Receiver 8 W 



LED display 


Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h 




Notes 


** only for resolution 30 and 50 mm 

***Protection field heights from 170 ... 650 mm 

† 









KA-0804 


KA-0805 


KA-0808 




KA-0904 


KA-0905 


KA-0908 

Connector plug for Master/Slave connection 

Emitter 



KA-0810 

Receiver 



KA-0901 

281


SLC 420 IP 69K 

A 



to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Resolution 14 mm and 30 mm 


170 mm to 1450 mm 

• Protection class IP 69K 






• Range 0.3 m ... 10 m 




¤60 

Legend: 


A = 97 mm + Protection field height 

SLG 420 IP 69K 

A 

¤60 



• Range 0.3 ... 12 m 

Legend: 


2-beam 

A = 747 mm 

3 and 4-beam A = 1067 mm 



Type 4 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 60 mm 


Emitter/Receiver: Cable gland PG 9, 

Receiver 

Cable length 5 m, 8-pole 

Emitter 

Cable length 5 m, 4-pole 

Gore TM Membrane M12 


100 m / 1 Ω 



10 … 27 ms 




(Resolution): 

14, 30 mm 



2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm 



0.3 m ... 7 m 


0.3 m ... 10 m 

2-, 3-, 4-beam 0.3 m ... 10 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Integrated 

Cascading: (Master/Slave) – 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 500 mA 


Receiver 8 W 



LED display 


Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h 


Approvals 

Approvals 


SLC 420-E/R➀-➁-69-RFB 




0170, 0250, 0330, 0410, 

0490, 0570, 0650, 0730, 

0810, 0890, 0970, 1050, 

1130, 1210, 1290, 1370, 

1450, 1530, 1610, 1690, 

1770 

➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm with a 

range of 0.3 m … 7 m 

30 Resolution 30 mm with a 

range of 0.3 m … 10 m 

282 


SLG 420-E/R➀-69-RF 


➀ 



0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam 

0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam 

0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam 

Mounting brackets (stainless steel) are 

included in the delivery. 

Notes 

Delivered with cable gland and 5 meters cable 

pre-wired. 

† 



these functions


SLG 422-P 

734,5 

606 

¤ 49 50 50 





to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Protection field heightn 500 mm 




• Range 0.3 m ... 7 m 






Type 4 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 49 mm 

Deflecting mirror: 

50 x 50 x 606 mm 



Emitter/Receiver: 

M12, 8-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 



10 ms 


(Resolution): 

500 mm 


2-beam 

500 mm 


2-beam 

0.3 m ... 7 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 500 mA 


10 W 

Data interface: – 


LED display 


Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h 


Approvals 

F 


SLG 422-P-E/R0500-02-RF 

ULS-P-0500 

Safety light grid 








KA-0904 

KA-0905 

KA-0908 


Notes 

† 




8 

283

Miniaturized safety light grids and safety light curtains 

SLC 430 

NSR-0605 




to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Resolution 30 mm 


236 mm to 1804 mm 

• Slim design, size 12 x 20 mm 


• Integrated contactor control 

• Range 0.3 m ... 3.5 m 



• Safety Controller 

• Enclosure dimensions: 

240 x 160 mm 


Control Category: Type 4 

in combination with 

evaluation unit NSR-0605 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 

Enclosure dimensions: 12 x 20 mm 


Connector M8, 4-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 


Response time including 

relay output: 

50 ms 

Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 30 mm 

Protection field height: 236 ... 1804 mm 

Protection field width, Range: 0.3 m ... 3.5 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Ue: 

22 ... 30 VDC 

18 ... 25 VAC 


8 W 

System 


Status and diagnostics: LED display 

Ambient temperature: 0° C … + 50º C 

Storage and 

transport temperature: – 10° C … + 70º C 


2 x Relay contact 250 V / 4 A 


1 x Relay contact 42 V / 4 A 



to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 1.26 x 10-8 / h 


Approvals 


SLC 430-E/R➀-30-RF-SYS 




0236, 0460, 0684, 0908, 

1132, 1356, 1580, 1804 

* Range up to 5 m upon request 

Included in delivery 

Emitter and receiver including mounting set, 

controller NSR-0605, cable set KA-0610 

(cable length 5 m) 



Connector plug for emitter / receiver 




KA-0610 

KA-0611 

284

Safety light curtains with integrated muting-, blanking- and Cyclic-function 


• PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1 

• Control Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1 

or acc. to IEC 61496, Type 4 

• Integrated muting function 

• 2 plugs for muting sensors 

• Integrated override function 

• Integrated cyclic operation function 

• Diagnostics display 


• Compact design 

• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment 

8 

285


SLC/SLG 425I 

The SLC/SLG 415I is a system 

for universal use with 

integrated muting function. 

The M8 connectors allow a 

direct connection and flexible 

positioning of the different 

muting sensors (e.g. inductive, 

capacitive or optical sensors). 

In this way, a safe triggering 

of the muting function 

can be obtained for objects of 

different sizes. The additional 

integrated override function 

allows for a controlled restart 

of the machine to transport 

the accumulated material out 

of the protection field after a 

failure. The safety light curtains/grids 

with muting function 

enable a smooth and 

trouble-free material feeding 

(input and output), whilst 

offering a permanent protection 

of human life. 

• Integrated muting function 

for material transport in 

1 or 2 directions 

• Connection of 2 or 4 

external muting sensors 

• Connection of different 

muting sensors 

• Direct connection (M8) of 

the muting sensors to the 

SLC/SLG 

• Muting controller for crosswise 

or parallel arrangement 

of the external sensors 

• Adjustable muting time of 

30 s, 90 min or 100 h 

• Integrated override function 

• Range up to 12 m 

Cyclic operation 

Cyclic operation is a mode 

of operation, in which the 

machine automatically starts a 

work process, as soon as the 

operator releases the protection 

zone of the light curtain. 

A cycle is defined as the onetime 

interruption and release 

of the protection zone. 

In one-cycle operation, a new 

machine cycle is initiated, 

when the protection zone is 

interrupted one time. 

Example: 

The material is fed automatically 

without interruption of 

the protection zone. After initialization, 

the machine starts 

the first cycle. The operator 

now interrupts the protection 

zone to remove the material. 

The next cycle starts automatically. 

In two-cycle operation, a new 

machine cycle is started when 

the protection zone is interrupted 

twice. 

Example: 

The operator loads the 

machine and gives the start 

command. After the process 

is finished, the operator 

removes the processed material 

(1st cycle) and loads a 

new part for processing (2nd 

cycle). The next cycle starts 

automatically. 

The light curtain additionally 

monitors a signal (machine 

contact) of the machine, 

which signals the end of the 

hazardous movement. This 

signal is used for the cycle 

reset and enables an immediate 

intervention in the protection 

zone. 

286


SLC 425I 

A 




• Protection field heights from 170 mm to 1770 mm 



• Integrated muting and override function † 



• Cyclic operation (1 ... 8 Cycles) † 

• Range 0.3 ... 10 m 




• Different muting sequences can be programmed 


Legend: 


Emitter 


Receiver 


Approvals 


SLC 425I-E/R➀-➁-RFBC 




0170, 0250, 0330, 0410, 

0490, 0570, 0650, 0730, 

0810, 0890, 0970, 1050, 

1130, 1210, 1290, 1370, 

1450, 1530*, 1610*,1690*, 

1770* 

➁ 14, 30 Resolution 14 mm, 30 mm 

SLG 425I 

A 



• Protection field heights 500, 800 or 900 mm 

• Range 0.3 ... 18 m 

Legend: 


Emitter 2-beam A = 804 mm 


Receiver 2-beam A = 868 mm 


Approvals 


SLG 425I-E/R➀-RF 


➀ 



0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam 

0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam 

0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam 





Type 4 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 49 mm 



Emitter: 

M12, 4-pole, 

Receiver: 

M12, 8-pole, 

Muting sensors: 2 x connector plugs 

M8, 3-pole 

Muting lamp: 

M8, 3-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 



7 … 28.5 ms 

(Depends on length 



(Resolution): 

14 and 30 mm 




2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm 



0.3 m ... 7 m 


0.3 m … 10 m 

2-, 3-. 4-beam 0.3 m ... 18 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 

Muting- and Override-Function: Integrated 

Muting sensors: 2 or 4 external sensors 

Light emission wavelength: 880 nm 

(infrared) 

Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 500 mA 


Receiver 8 W 



Ambient temperature: –10° C … + 50º C 

Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h 







KA-0804 


KA-0805 


KA-0808 




KA-0904 


KA-0905 


KA-0908 

Notes 

† 

Curtains are delivered with the EDM 

turned off — NSR 0801 required for 

programming these functions 

8 

287


SLG425-IP 

A 

606 

¤49 50 50 





to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 

• Protection field height 500 mm 




• Range 0.3 m ... 7 m 






Type 4 

Enclosure: 

Aluminium 


ø 49 mm 

Deflecting mirror: 50 x 50 x 606 mm 



Emitter/Receiver: 

M12, 8-pole 


100 m / 1 Ω 



15 ms 


(Resolution): 

500 mm 


2-beam 

500 mm 


2-beam 

0.3 m ... 7 m 


Integrated 


Integrated 


Ue: 24 VDC ± 10% 


2 x PNP, 500 mA 


10 W 



Ambient temperature: –10° C … + 50º C 

Storage and 




to EN ISO 13849-1: 

PL e 

PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h 


Approvals 

F 


SLG 425IP-E/R0500-02-RF 

Safety light curtain 

ULS-P-0500 








KA-0904 

KA-0905 

KA-0908 


288 

Notes 

† 



these functions

Reflection light sensor (Muting sensor) 

LF 50-11P 



63,5 

13,5 

17 

46 

44 

16 

4 

50 

4,3 

M12x1 

40 

44 

4,3 

4 

Standards: EN 60974-5-2 

Laser protection class 1: EN 60825-1-10/03 

Enclosure: 

ABS 

Enclosure dimensions: 50 x 50 x 17 mm 



M12 4-pole, 

can be rotated 


100 m 


Switching frequency: 

2500 Hz 

Range: 

0 ... 5.5 m 

Infrared laser light: 

660 nm 

Ue: 

10 ... 30 VDC 

Switching output: 

2 x PNP 200 mA 

Beam diameter: 

5 ... 24 mm 

LED status display: 

soiling, 

switching condition 

and power on 

Ambient temperature: – 20° C ... + 45° C 

Storage and 


Reflector R 51 x 61-L 

Reflector R D83 

• Range 5.5 m 

• Connector can be rotated 

• LED status display 


• Antivalent switching outputs 

• Infrared light 670 nm 

• Laser protection class 1 


Approvals 



LF 50-11P 

Note: 

Mounting angles, reflectors, and cables are not 

included in the delivery. 


Connector plug M12, 4-pole 

Connector Only 

S-K4P-M12-S-G-X-X-X-X-B-1 

2 meter cable 

A-K4P-M12-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-A-1 

5 meter cable 

A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-BK-2-X-A-1 

Connecting plug for muting sensor 

to connect SLG 425I 

M12, 4-pole to M8, 3-pole, 

cable 2 m: 

KA-0965 


Reflector R 51 x 61-L 

Reflector 

R D83 


Mounting angle universal BF UNI 1 

8 

289

Safety light curtains and safety light grids – accessories 




Alignment kit EA5 

MS-1010 Mounting kit 

Mounting kit MS-1073 

Yellow lighting element with wall support 

MS-1031 Mounting kit for ULS-A4 


MS-1000 


Vibration damper MSD-2 / MSD-4 


Test rod PLS-01, PLS-02 


Laser alignment tool 

for SLC / SLG Series 

EA5 

Muting lamp with LED block 

MK2 

Operating conditions indication 

red, green, yellow LED 

MK3 

Operating conditions indication 

red, green 

MK4 

Signalling lamp with bulb 24 V 

yellow with wall mounting bracket MK5 

Mounting kit for SLC /SLG 220 

4 x angle incl. screws MS-1000 

2 x angle incl. screws MS 1072 

290 


Mounting kit for central fixation 

for SLC /SLG 220 

2 x angle MS-1010 

Mounting kit for ULS-A4 

2 x incl. screws MS-1031 


for SLC/SLG 420-425 in V2A 

4 x incl. screws MS-1036 

Mounting kit lateral fixation 

for SLC/SLG 420-425 

Consisting of 2 steel angles, 

4 screws and 4 T-slot nuts MS-1051 


Mounting kit for deflecting mirror ULS-M 

2 x mounting angle MS-1073 

Mounting kit for SLC 430 

2 x clamping profile MS-690 

Vibration damper 

8 x vibration damper 

for SLC/SLG 220 

MSD-2 

8 x vibration damper 

for SLC/SLG 420-425 

MSD-4 

Test rod for resolution 30mm PLS-01 

Test rod for resolution 14mm PLS-02

Safety light curtains and safety light grids – accessories 




NSR-0801 

Deflecting mirror ULS-A4, ø 49 mm 

Protective enclosure with deflecting mirror 

NSR-0700 

Mounting Stands 

Protective enclosure for light grids 

New! 

Deflecting mirror ULS-MLC 

Deflection Mirror Application Notes 

ULS-MLC: Should be used when range is 

greater than 6 m. With 1 mirror the range is 

reduced by 10%, with 2 or more mirrors the 

range is reduced by 15% per mirror. 

Muting Carrier Set 

Deflection Mirror Application Notes 

ULS-4A: Should be used when range is less 

than 6 m. The range is reduced by 20%, with 

each mirror; only 1 mirror is recommended per 

curtain/grid 

Aluminium profile for SLC 430 


Bus converter 

Converter for the programming 

of SLC/SLG 420-425 

USB 2.0 Interface NSR 0801 

Converter for the programming 

of SLC / SLG 220 

RS232 interface NSR 0700 

Deflecting mirror ULS-M incl. mounting angle 

Mirror height 200mm ULS-MLC-0200 










Deflecting mirror ULS-A4 incl. mounting angle 

Mirror height 200 mm ULS-A4-0200 






Mounting Stands 

Height including plinth 500mm MST-0500 







Muting Carrier Set 

2 x aluminium profile MT-0400 


Protective enclosure with deflecting mirror 

version for 2-beam light grids ULS-ST2 



Protective enclosure for light grids 

Height 1114mm hot-dip galvanised SG1 

Height 1334 mm hot-dip galvanised SG2 

Height 1114 mm RAL 1021 

SG3 

Height 1334 mm RAL 1021 

SG4 

Aluminium profile for SLC 430 

2 x profile, length 420 mm MS-1501 








291

292 

Safer 

by 

Design

Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components 

Besides the traditional safety relay controls, Schmersal 

offers CE-type tested safety controls or other safetyoriented 

bus systems (e.g. AS-i Safety at Work) for 

different levels of complexity and combination depths, 

which provide the user with many visualization and 

diagnostic possibilities. 

8 

293


SRB 301LC/B 

• Suitable for signal processing of potentialfree 

outputs, e.g. emergency stop 

command devices, position switches 

and solenoid interlocks 

• Suitable for signal processing from the 

outputs of magnetic safety switches (to 

this end, equipped with built-in current 

and voltage limitation) 

• Suitable for signal processing of outputs 

connected to potentials (AOPD’s), e.g. 

safety light grids/curtains 

• 1 or 2 channel control 


• 1 signalling output (NC) 

• Manual reset without edge detection 

• Automatic reset function 

• 4 LEDs to show operating conditions 

Approvals 

H 


SRB 301LC/B-24V 


Standards: 

IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-20 


Automatic or start button 


yes 

ON delay with reset button: 

≤ 20 ms 

Drop-out delay in case of emergency stop: 

≤ 25 ms 

Drop-out delay in case of power failure: 

≤ 50 ms 

Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC –15%/+20%, residual ripple max. 10%; 

24 VAC –15%/+10% 


0.08 A 

Frequency range: 

50 / 60 Hz 

Fuse rating for the operating voltage: 

0.5 A gG D fuse 

Internal electronic protection (Y/N): 

no 


2.1 W; 3.0 VA 

Monitored inputs: 

Short-circuit recognition: 

no 

Wire breakage detection: 

yes 

Earth connection detection: 

yes 

Number of NC contacts: 2 

Number of NO contacts: 0 

Max. conduction resistance: 

40 Ω 

Outputs: 






250 VAC, 6 A ohmic (inductive in 

case of appropriate protective wiring) 


AC-15: 230 V / 6 A; DC-13: 24 V / 6 A 

Mechanical life: 

107 operations 


Environmental temperature: – 25°C … + 45°C 

Storage and transport temperature: – 25°C … + 70°C 




Screw connection, solid strand or 

multi-strand (incl. conductor ferrules) 

min. cable section: 0.25 mm 2 

max. cable section: 2.5 mm 2 

Weight: 

230 g 


100 x 22.5 x 121 mm 


Standards: EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508; IEC 60947-5-3 

PL: 

up to e 

Category: up to 4 

PFH value: 5.0 x 10 -9 /h for max. 36,500 switching cycles/year and max. 60% contact load 

SIL: up to 3 

Mission time: 

20 years 

Note 

For some applications, the use of a monitored start button (reset with edge detection) is required. 

294


Note 


• Input level: The example shows a 

2-channel control circuit with a safety light 

grid, an external reset button J and a 

feedback circuit S. 

• The control system recognizes wirebreakage 

and earth faults in the 

monitoring circuit. 

• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel 

control, for increase in capacity or number 

of contacts by means of contactors or 

relays with positive-guided contacts. 

• Connect potential p-type outputs of 

safety light grids/curtains to S12/S22. 

The devices must have the same reference 

potential. 

• Automatic start: The automatic start is 

programmed by connecting the feedback 

circuit to the terminals X1/X2. If the 

feedback circuit is not required, establish 

a bridge 

A1 S12 S11 S21 S22 X1 X2 13 

A2 

F1 

Ui 

Ansteuerlogik/ 

Logic 

K1 

K2 

J 

K B 

S 

K A 

K1 

K2 

23 

33 41 

14 24 34 42 

L1 

K A 

K B 

K A 

K B 

N 

LED 

The integrated LED’s indicate the following 

operating conditions: 

• Position relay K1 


• Supply voltage UB 

• Internal operating voltage Ui 

Note 


Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of 

a suitable circuit. 

Additional safety monitoring modules available. Please consult factory. 

8 

295


SRB 301ST 

• Suitable for signal processing of 

potentialfree outputs, e.g. emergency 

stop command devices, position switches 

and solenoid interlocks 


connected to potentials (AOPDs), e.g. 

safety light grids/curtains 




• Optionally with short-circuit recognition 

(through switch) 

• With hybrid fuse 

• Reset with edge detection or automatic 

reset function 


• Plug-in screw connection 


Standards: IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 61508, IEC 60947-5-3, BG-GS-ET-20 




yes 

ON delay with automatic start: 

≤ 300 ms 


≤ 30 ms 

Drop-out delay in case of power failure: 

≤ 50 ms 

Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC –15%/+20%, residual ripple max. 10%; 

24 VAC –15%/+10% 


0.08 A 


50 / 60 Hz 


0.5 A gG D-fuse 


no 


2.1 W; 3.0 VA 



no 


yes 


yes 




40 Ω 

Outputs: 





Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts: 250 VAC, 6 A ohmic (inductive incase of 

appropriate protective wiring) 


AC-15: 230 V / 6 A; DC-13: 24 V / 6 A 


107 operations 


Environmental temperature: – 25°C … + 45°C 




Connection type: Screw connection, solid strand or multi-strand (incl. conductor ferrules) 



Weight: 

230 g 


100 x 22.5 x 121 mm 


Standards: EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508 

PL: 

up to e 


PFH value: 5,0 x 10 -9 /h for max. 36,500 switching cycles/year and max. 60% contact load 

SIL: up to 3 

Mission time: 

20 years 

Approvals 

H 


SRB 301ST 

296


Note 






• The control recognises cross-short, 

cable break and earth leakages in the 


• F1 = hybrid fuse 

• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel control, 

for increase in capacity or number of 

contacts by means of contactors or relays 

with positive-guided contacts. 

• Switch setting: 

The cross-wire short detection function 

(factory default) is programmed by means 

of the switch located underneath the front 

cover of the module: 

Position nQS (top): 

no cross-wire short protection, suitable 

for 1-channel applications and applications 

with outputs with potential in the control 

circuits. 

Position QS (bottom): 

cross-wire short protection, suitable for 

2-channel applications without outputs 

with potential in the control circuits. 

• Connect potential p-type outputs of 

safety light grids/curtains to S12/S22. 

The devices must have the same reference 

potential. (QS-switch = nQS) 

• Automatic start: 

The automatic start is programmed by 

connecting the feedback circuit to the 

terminals S12/X3. If the feedback circuit 

is not required, establish a bridge 

A1 

F1 

UB 

Ui 

S12 S11 S21 


Logic 

K1 

K2 

S22 

J 

K1 

K2 

13 23 

A2 14 24 

nQS 

QS 

K B 

K A 

X3 X2 

S 

K A 

33 

34 

K B 

L1 

41 

42 

N 

K A 

K B 

LED 





• Supply voltage UB 


Note 




Additional safety monitoring modules available. Please consult factory. 

8 

297


SCR 211 


connected to potentials (AOPDs), 

e.g. safety light grids/curtains 





• With hybrid fuse 

• Reset with edge detection or automatic 

reset function 


• Category 4 to EN 954-1 

• Plug-in screw connection 


Standards: IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 60947-5-3, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-14, BG-GS-ET-20 




yes 

ON delay with automatic start: 

≤ 40 ms 

Drop-out delay in case of emergency stop: 

≤ 50 ms 

Rated operating voltage Ue: 

24 VAC/DC 


50 / 60 Hz 

Fuse rating for the operating voltage: Internal electronic trip, tripping current > 1.0 A, 

Reset after disconnection of supply voltage 


yes 


5.1 W; 5.7 VA, plus signalling output 



no 


yes 


yes 




40 Ω 

Outputs: 







250 VAC, 4 A ohmic (inductive in 

case of appropriate protective wiring) 

Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1: 13-14, 23-24: AC-15: 230 V / 1.5 A, DC-13: 24 V / 1.2 A; 

37/38: AC-15: 230 V / 3 A, DC-13: 24 V / 2 A 


10 7 operations 


Ambient temperature: 

-25°C…+45°C 


-25°C…+70°C 




Screw connection, plug-in 



Weight: 

255 g 


100 x 22.5 x 121 mm 


Standards: EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508; IEC 60947-5-3 

PL: 

up to e 



SIL: up to 3 

Mission time: 

20 years 

Approvals 


SCR 211 

298


Note 






• The control system recognises wirebreakage 

and earth faults in the 


• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel 

control, for increase in capacity or number 

of contacts by means of contactors or 

relays with positive-guided contacts. 

• Automatic start: 

The automatic start is programmed by 

connecting the feedback circuit to the 

terminals X1/X3. If the feedback circuit 

is not required, establish a bridge 

A1 

F1 

UB 

Ui 

S11 

K1 K2 K3 

S 

S12 S11 S22 X1 X2 X3 


Control circuit 

A2 Y1 14 24 38 

K A 

K B 

K C 

K D 

J 

K4 

K1 

K2 

13 23 37 

K3 

K4 

L1 

K A 

K B 

K C 

K D 

K B 

K A 

K D 

K C 

N 

LED 






• Position relay K3/4 

Note 




8 

299

Glossary 

Definitions and terms: 

Start interlock: 

A device preventing the automatic 

release and therefore 

the automatic machine start 

when the power supply of 

the AOPD is switched on or 

interrupted and switched on 

again. 

AOPD: 

The abbreviation of Active 

Optoelectronic Protective 

Device. 

Resolution: 

The resolution or minimum 

object sensitivity represents 

the minimum size of an object 

that is detected in each 

part of the protection field. 

Optoelectronic safety 

devices: 

The here described are 

optoelectronic safety guards 

(AOPD), e.g. safety light 

barriers, safety light curtains 

and safety light grids as well 

as laser scanners and their 

corresponding safety relay 

modules 

Type 2 acc. to EN 61496-1: 

The Type 2 AOPD is a 

protective device, whose 

safety function is checked 

by means of regular tests. 

These devices must meet 

the requirements of PL c to 

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 2 acc. to EN 954-1. 

Type 4 acc. to EN 61496-1: 

The Type 4 AOPD is a protective 

device, whose safety 

function is not affected by a 

failure or error in the system. 

These devices must meet the 

requirements of PL e to EN 

ISO 13849-1, or Control 

Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1. 

Blanking: 

In this configurable operation 

mode a safety light curtain 

blanks out a precisely defined 

area in the protection field. 

The operation mode. “Blanking“ 

allows objects to be 

present in the sending area 

with out deactivating the light 

curtain safety outputs. “Fixed 

Blanking“ is when a fixed set 

of adjacent light beams are 

rendered inactive for the purpose 

of entering an object 

and pans into the protective 

area. “Floating Blanking“ is 

when a set member (one or 

more) of adjacent beams is 

allowed to ignore the presence 

of an object and not deactivating 

the OSSDs of the 

light curtain. 

Muting: 

Muting is a temporary 

automatic suspension of a 

safeguarding function by 

safety-related parts of the 

control system during 

otherwise safe conditions in 

the operation of a machine. 

The safeguarding function 

is realized through 2 or 4 

muting sensors, which can 

distinguish between persons 

and objects. The suspension 

condition is signalled by 

means of a muting signal 

lamp. 

OSSD: 

Output Signal Switching 

Device of the AOPD 

(to EN 61496) 

Protection field: 

The protection zone is an 

invisible, two-dimensional 

light curtain consisting of 

infrared light beams, installed 

between the emitter and 

receiver unit. 

Depending on the chosen 

resolution (detection sensitivity) 

objects of a specific size 

intruding this light curtain will 

be detected. 

Operating Range: 

The operating range is the 

maximum distance that may 

exit between the light curtain’s 

emitter and its receiver. 

Protected height: 

The protected height is a 

vertical area between the first 

and the last infrared light 

beam of an optoelectronic 

safety guard (not the total 

housing length). 

The beginning and the end 

of this area is marked with 

symbols on the SLC/SLG’s 

enclosure. 

Restart interlock: 

A device preventing the automatic 

restart of the machine, 

when the protection field is 

interrupted during a dangerous 

machine cycle or when 

the operating mode of the 

machine is set or changed. 

300

SAFETY PRESSURE MATS 

9 

GENERAL PRODUCT FEATURES 

SCHMERSAL’s Series SMS Safety Pressure Mats feature a 100% active area, 

low actuating force, rugged cable termination, durable “unibody construction” 

cable entry, IP67 submersible rating, highly chemical resistant mat material, CEcompliance, 

and a 3-year warranty. When properly installed with a compatible 

safety controller (described herein) they meet the stringent requirements of PLd 

to EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 3 to EN 954-1. 

301

SMS 4 / SMS 5 safety mats 

Safety mats are used for the 

protection of man on machinery 

and plants with hazardous 

movements. Typical fields of 

application are, for instance, 

the protection of hazardous 

areas and surfaces on woodprocessing 

machines, scissor 

lifts or punching presses. 

The safety mats build a 

uniplanar safety device, 

which detects the presence 

of persons. If a person steps 

onto the safety mat, the 

connected safety-monitoring 

module will immediately stop 

the hazardous movement. 

The safety mats are characterized 

by their very robust 

design and high resistance to 

acids, caustic solutions, oil 

and gasoline. In combination 

with the SRB 301HC/R or 

SRB 301HC/T safety-monitoring 

modules, the safety mats 

meet the requirements of PL d 

to EN ISO 13849-1, or control 

category 3 to EN 954-1. 


The safety mats can be connected 

in line with each other 

in order to provide for a 

smooth and fast protection of 

hazardous areas. To this end, 

different standard sizes are 

available. Furthermore, special 

sizes or special shapes 

can be realized upon request. 

The SMS 4 series is 

connected to the floor by 

means of an aluminium profile 

and special corner sections. 

As a result of the beveled 

form of the profile, tripping 

hazards are avoided. The 

aluminium profile additionally 

serves as edge protection, 

when fork-lift trucks or other 

floor conveyors drive over the 

safety mats. In the SMS 5 

series, the polyurethane 

actuating profile is directly 

molded to the active surface 

of the safety mat. 

The safety mat consists of 

two separate current-carrying 

steel plates. The plates are 

held apart by insulating strips. 

Upon actuation of the pressure-sensitive 

safety mat, an 

electrical cross-wire short is 

produced between the steel 

plates. The connected safetymonitoring 

module evaluates 

this signal and stops the hazardous 

movement. 

302

Calculation of the safety distance to the danger point 

9 


The proper arrangement of 

the safety mat with regard to 

the adjacent hazardous area 

mainly depends on the aftertravel 

time of the machine and 

the approaching speed of the 

operator. The standard EN 

999 (Safety of Machinery, 

Approaching Speed of Body 

Members) provides a formula 

to calculate the safety distance 

for this connection. 


S = K x (T1 +T2) + (1200 - 0.4 H) 

S Minimum safety distance in 

millimeters, measured from 

the hazardous area to the 

detection point, the detection 

line or the protected 

field 

K Constant in millimeters per 

second, derived from data 

through the approaching 

speed of the body or the 

body member (1600 mm/s) 

H Distance through the reference 

plane (e.g. the floor) 

in millimeters (for safety 

mats generally 0 mm) 

T1the maximum response 

time of the safety device 

between the triggering of 

the perceptive element (the 

safety mat) and the time, at 

which the safety guard 

(safety-monitoring module) 

has switched the output 

signal to the “OFF” state. 

T2the response time of the 

machine, i.e. the time 

required to shutdown the 

machine or to eliminate the 

risk, after the transmission 

of the output signal of the 

safety guard 

The safety distance therefore 

generally can be calculated 

in the following 

way: 

S = 1600 mm/s x (T1 +T2) + 

1200 mm 

Example: 

The safety distance must be 

calculated with a response 

time of 142.5 ms for the 

machine and a response time 

of 45 ms for the safety guard. 

The safety mat is installed at 

ground level. 

S = 1600 mm/s x (0.045 s + 

0.1425 s) + 1200 mm 

S = 1600 mm/s x (0.1875 s) 

+ 1200 mm 

S = 300 mm + 1200 mm 

S = 1500 mm 

303

Safety mats 

SMS 4 SMS 5 


A 

A 

Certified to EN 1760-1 

Response time max. 25 ms 

Robust design 

High resistance to chemicals 

Slip-free surface 

Cascading possible 

Special sizes and shapes available 

on request 

No additional terminating resistor required 

Aluminium frame and corner sections 

available 

35 

A 

35 

35 

35 

A 

Certified to EN 1760-1 

Response time max. 25 ms 

Robust design 

High resistance to chemicals 

Slip-free surface 

Cascading possible 

Special sizes and shapes available 

on request 

No additional terminating resistor required 

With molded ramp profile 

Standards: EN 1760-1, 

EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508, 

EN 954-1, IEC 60947-5-3 

Surface material: polyurethane, black 


Ambient temperature: 0° C … +60°C 

Fitting height: 

14 mm 

Weight: 17 Kg / m 2 

Actuating force: 

150N 

with round body ø 80mm 

Cable: 

4 x 0.34 mm 2 SMS4 

2 pc. 2 x 0.34 mm 2 SMS 5 

Cable length: 

6m 


≤ 25 ms 

Mechanical life: >1.5 million operations 

Admissible load: 

2000 N / 80 mm ø 

Inactive edge 

≤ 10mm 

Classification: (In combination with safety 

monitoring module SRB 301 HC) 

PL: 

up to d 


PFH value: 

1.0 x 10 -7 /h for max. 

52,500 switching cycles/year 

and max. 60% contact load 

SIL: 

up to 2 in combination with 

safety monitoring module 

Mission time: 

20 years 

Legend: 

A: active surface 

Legend: 

A: active surface 

Total size = A + 2 x 35 mm 

Approvals 

Approvals 


SMS 4-➀ 


➀ 

Active surface 

250-500 250 x 500 mm 

500-500 500 x 500 mm 

500-1000 500 x 1000 mm 

750-1000 750 x 1000 mm 

1000-1000 1000 x 1000 mm 

1000-1500 1000 x 1500 mm 


SMS 5-➀ 


➀ 

Active surface 

250-500 250 x 500 mm 

500-500 500 x 500 mm 

500-1000 500 x 1000 mm 

750-1000 750 x 1000 mm 

1000-1000 1000 x 1000 mm 

1000-1500 1000 x 1500 mm 

Note 

Chemical resistance: 

Water: 

Resistant 

10% acids: Resistant 

10% caustic solutions: Resistant 

Oils: 

Resistant 

Gasoline: 

Resistant 

Other on request 

304

67 

SMS 4 safety mats accessories 



7 


33,5 

90,0° 

90,0° 

9 

17,8 

15 

7 

3 

8,5 13 6 

18 

67 

17,8 

15 

8,5 

3 

13 

40 

18,5 

7,5 

67 15 

15 67 

Ramp rail SMS 4-RS-3000 

SMS 4-BS-3000 fixing rail 

Corner section SMS 4-EV 

40 

67 

SMS 4 




Ramp rail 

3000 mm long SMS 4-RS 3000 

Fixing rail 

3000 mm long SMS 4-BS-3000 

Corner section (1 pc) 

SMS 4-EV 

Ramp rail (includes 4 precut ramp rails and 4 

corner sections) 

250 x 500 mm SMS 4-RS 250-500 

500 x 500 mm SMS 4-RS 500-500 

500 x 1000 mm SMS 4-RS 500-1000 

750 x 1000 mm SMS 4-RS 750-1000 

1000 x 1000 mm SMS 4-RS 1000-1000 

1000 x 1500 mm SMS 4-RS 1000-1500 

305

Safety mats 

SRB 301HC 

• Safety-monitoring module for safety mats 

• 3 enabling contacts 

• 1 signalling contact 

• Cross-wire detection 

• Feedback circuit to monitor 

external contactors 

• Monitored start or automatic start 

• LED status indication 

• Plug-in terminals 

Approvals 

H 


SRB 301HC/➀-➁ 


➀ R Manual start 

T 

Automatic start 

➁ 230 V 48 … 240 VAC 

24 V 24 VAC/DC 


Standards: IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508; BG-GS-ET-20 


automatic or start button (optionally monitored) 

With feedback circuit (Y/N): 

yes 


≤ 50 ms 

Drop-out delay on “emergency stop”: 

≤ 20 ms 

Drop-out delay on “supply failure”: 

≤ 100 ms 

Rated operating voltage Ue: 

48 ... 240 VAC; 24 VAC/DC 


50 / 60 Hz 


230 VAC version: primary side: melting fuse, tripping current >1.0 A; 

secondary side: internal electronic fuse, tripping current > 0.12 A; 

24 VAC/DC version: internal electronic fuse, tripping current > 0.5 A 

Internal electronic fuse (Y/N): 

230 VAC version: no 

24 VAC/DC version: yes 

Current consumption: 

230 VAC version: 1.6 W; 4.2 VA 

24 VAC/DC version: 1.4 W; 3.3 VA 

Inputs monitoring: 

Cross-wire detection: 

yes 


yes 

Earth leakage detection: 

yes 



Max. total line resistance: 

40 Ω 

Outputs: 






250 VAC, 8 A ohmic (inductive 

with suitable protective circuit) 


AC-15: 230 V / 6 A; DC-13: 24 V / 6 A 


10 7 operations 


Operating ambient temperature: – 25°C … + 60°C 


Protection class: enclosure: IP 40, terminals: IP 20, terminal space: IP 54 

Mounting: snaps onto standard DIN rails to DIN EN 60715 


plug-in type screw terminals 



Weight: 

230 VAC version: 340 g; 24 VAC/DC version: 320 g 

Dimensions (height/width/depth): 

100 x 45 x 121 mm 


PL: 

up to e 



SIL: up to 3 

Mission time: 

20 years 

306

Safety mats 

Note 

• Protection of a safety mat 

• Start button with edge detection 

• Feedback circuit S to monitor 

the external contactors 

• Series-wiring of multiple 

safety mats possible 

• Reset button J 

Wiring example 

9 

Note 

The wiring example is shown with the safety mat in non-actuated and de-energised condition. 

Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be supressed by means of a suitable circuit. 

307

308 

Safer 

by 

Design

FAIL-TO-SAFE SAFETY EDGES 

9 


SCHMERSAL’s Series SE Safety Edges/Bumpers are available as sub-assembly 

components or as custom assemblies produced to user specifications. The following 

pages provide details regarding operation, construction and ordering details. Among 

the user options are safety edge profile, mounting frame profile and length. Please 

contact us if you have any questions, special needs or require assistance with 

properly specifying the safety edge which meets your requirements. 

309

SERIES SE 

Optical Safety Edges/Bumpers 


• Can be cut & mounted in the field … easy to fit and adjust 

length when placing the edge on the door 

• Safety controller SE 100 handles up to 2 safety edges … 

reduced cost in multiple door applications 

• Rugged corrosion & abrasion resistance rubber profiles 

… tolerant to most industrial environments 

• Watertight design … meets IP 68 environmental 

requirements. 

• Low operating force … assures reliable operation 

• Automatic gain control … tolerates slight bending 

• Simple field installation … low cost & easy to repair 


per EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of 

EN 954-1. 

Description 

The series SE Safety edge consists of a rugged high tear 

resistant rubber profile, an aluminum mounting rail, a plug-in 

optoelectronic transmitter and receiver pair and a 

compatible safety controller. The design features a high 

reflective internal rubber surface and a self-adjusting gain 

optical pair whose performance is uncompromised by slight 

bending … and predictable over the specified operating 

range. 

Units can be quickly and easily assembled (without special 

skills or use of adhesives) for lengths of 400 mm to 10 m. 

The self adjusting optical pair assure the same sensitivity 

and performance independent of chosen length. 

The mechanical design assures encapsulation of the 

transmitter and receiver ensuring reliable operation 

unaffected by environmental soiling. 

Operation 

In operation the transmitted IR beam is detected, by the 

receiver resulting in enabling of the safety controllers safety 

output(s). Deformation of the rubber profile interrupts/ 

weakens the signal between the transmitter and receiver. 

This is sensed by the safety controller disabling the outputs 

allowing the hazardous movement to be stopped. 

Depending upon the choice of safety controller the system 

meets the requirements of EN ISO 13849-1 (PL c , PL d or 

PL e ) as well as EN 954-1 (Safety control category 1, 3 or 4). 


Ideal wherever crushing or shearing points are to be 

safeguarded, such as on guard doors, elevating platforms, 

rising stages, moving stock shelving, operating process 

tables, loading ramps, hoists or tipping equipment. 

310 

® 


SERIES SE ORDERING & ASSEMBLY INFORMATION 

AVAILABLE ASSEMBLY* COMPONENTS 

40 mm Safety Edge 

SE-P40-1250 Rubber profile, 1.25 meter 

SE-P40-2500 Rubber profile, 2.5 meters 

SE-AL10-1250 Mounting Rail, 1.25 meter 

SE-AL12-1250 Mounting Rail with flange, 1.25 meter 

SE-T40 

Endcap (2 required) 

70 mm Safety Edge 

SE-P70-1250 Rubber profile, 1.25 meter 

SE-P70-2500 Rubber profile, 2.5 meters 

SE-AL20-1250 Mounting Rail, 1.25 meter 

SE-AL22-1250 Mounting Rail with flange, 1.25 meter 

SE-T70 

Endcap (2 required) 

IR Sensor Set 

SE-SET 

Emitter & Receiver set 

Safety Contollers 

SE-100C PL c Safety Control Category 1 (2 bumpers) 

SE-304C PL d Safety Control Category 3 (4 Bumpers) 

SE-400C PL e Safety Control Category 4 

Accessories 

SE- SC 

Rubber profile shears 

SE- WA 

Wiring aid 

SE- J1 

Junction Box 

* Note: Each assemby requires: 

Rubber profile 

Mouting rail(s) 

Endcaps (2) 

Sensor Set 


9 

1 

Cut 

Six steps to install the safety edge 

aluminum rail 

to desired length 

and fasten in place 

4 

Press 

the 

transmitter and 

receiver units 

into the ends of 

the rubber 

profile 

2 

Cut 

the rubber 

profile to desired 

length 

5 

Thread 

emitter or receiver cable through 

profile to desired cable exit end of rubber 

profile. 

3 

Clip 

the rubber 

profile into the 

aluminum rail 

6 

Connect 

to the desired safety controller 

It is ready! 

311

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA 

Aluminum Mounting Rail Profiles & Dimensions (mm) 

12 

12 

1,5 

2 

9 

centering groove 

9 


25 

30 

SE AL 10 

SE AL 20 

1,5 

12 

2 

12 

9 


9 


25 20 

30 20 

SE AL 12 

SE AL 22 

Rubber Mounting Rail Profiles & 

Dimensions (mm) 

Table of Properties 

Rubber Profile SE - P 40, SE - P 70 

EPDM (ethylene propylene diene 

Rubber Material 

Monomer), shore hardness 60 

–40°C to +170°C (short term) 


–30°C to +170°C (long term) 

Good against ozone, moderate 

Resistance 

against oils, acids, solvents, fuels 

Note: NBR (Nitrile butadiene rubber) profile also available. 

Consult factory. 

Ø13,4 

Ø 13,4 

Ø10,9 

Ø10,9 

10 

33 

25 

58,5 

31 

SE P 40 

30 

312 

SE P 70


9 

Force/Travel diagram for the rubber 

profiles with SE 100 C controller unit 

Force/Travel diagram for the rubber 

profiles with SE 400 C controller unit 

Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-100 C 

Force/Travel Fa [N] Sa [mm] Fn [N] Sn [mm] 

Testing Speed 100 mm/s 10 mm/s 

SE-P40 92 9 250 16 

400 18 

600 20 

SE-P70 22 8 250 46 

400 47 

600 48 

Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-400 C 

Force/Travel Fa [N] Sa [mm] Fn [N] Sn [mm] 

Testing Speed 100 mm/s10 mm/s 

SE-P40 140 11 250 14 

400 16 

600 18 

SE-P70 23 9 250 43 

400 44 

600 45 

Legend Fa Actuating force 

Sa Actuating travel 

Fn Overtravel force 

Sn Overtravel 

Sg Total deformation travel 

with the above test data. 

The measurements are carried out according to EN 1760-2* 

Sg = Sa + Sn 

The complete system is suitable for finger recognition in accordance 

Test conditions 

Measurement parameters 

Temperature: T = 20 °C 

Mounting position B (to EN 1760-2*) 

Place of measurement C 3 (to EN 1760-2*) 

* preliminary 

313


Transmitter and Receiver Pair 

Technical Data for SE-SET 

Technical Data 

SE-SET 

Material 

Polyurethane 

Protection class IP 68 

Dimensions 

11.5 mm dia., 37 mm long 

Connecting cable 3 x 0.14 mm2 stranded wire 

Cable length 

Transmitter 6.6 m 

Receiver 3 m 

Permissible 

Max. 200 m 

cable length 

Operating -25 °C to +75 °C 

temperature 

314


SE Series 

Safety Controllers 

9 

Electrical Specification 

SE - 100 C 

SE - 400 C 

Standards EN 1760-2, EN60947-5-1 EN1760-2, EN60947-5-1 

Performance Level/Safety Control Category “c” to EN ISO 13849-1/cc1 to EN 954-1 “e” to EN ISO 13849-1/cc4 to EN 954-1 

Enclosure PE (black), Crastin (grey) PE (black), Crastin (grey) 

Fixing DIN rail EN 50 022 DIN rail EN 50 022 

Screw terminals max. 2 x 2.5 mm 2 solid wire max. 2 x 2.5 mm 2 solid wire 

max. 2 x 1.5 mm 2 stranded wire with end thimble max. 2 x 1.5 mm 2 stranded wire with end thimble 

Protection class (terminals) (IP 20) Enclosure IP 40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 (IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 

Operational voltage 24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %) 24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %) 

Fuse rating (supply) 1A (surge-resistant) 1A (surge-resistant) 

Inputs 1 or 2 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver 1 pair SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver 

Outputs Changeover contacts Normally open contacts 

Safety contacts 11/14 13/14, 23/24 

Signalling contacts 21/22/24 Semiconductor X1, Connection to internal 

ground Umax. 36 V, Imax. 50 mA 

Max. switching capacity max. 1000 VA max. 1000 VA 

Utilization category AC-15; DC-13 AC-15; DC-13 

Rated operational current/voltage Ie / Ue 2 A/230VAC; 2 A/24VDC 2 A/230VAC; 3 A/24VDC 

Switching voltage 250V AC/DC 250V AC/DC 

Max. switching current 6A (resistive load) 4A (resistive load) 

Contact fuse rating 6A surge-resistant 4A surge-resistant 

Mechanical life 2 x 10 7 switching cycles 3 x 10 7 switching cycles 

Readiness time Max. 300ms Approx. 32ms 

Switch-on delay Max. 300ms Approx. 32ms 

Switch-off delay Typically 15ms Typically 15ms 

Ambient temperature +5 °C to +55 °C +5 °C to +55 °C 

Shock resistant < 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160) < 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160) 

Interference According to EMC Directive According to EMC Directive 

Weight Approx. 0.18kg Approx. 0.2kg 

Clearance and creepage distances Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160 Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160 

Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160 Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160 

Power consumption < 4 W < 4 W 

Note: Maximum distance to controller: 200m. Use 20AWG to extend bumper leads to safety controller. 

315


SE 304C 

Electrical Specification 

Standards 

Performance Level/Safety Control Category 

Enclosure 

Mounting 

Screwterminals 

Protection class (terminals) 

Operating voltage 

Fuse rating (supply) 

Inputs 

Outputs 

Safety contacts 

Signalling contacts 

Max. switching capacity 

Utilization category 

Rated operational current/voltage 

Switching voltage 

Max. switching current 

Mechanical life 

Switch-off delay 

Ambient temperature 

Shock resistant 

Interference 

Weight 

Power consumption 

SE - 304C 

EN 1760-2 

“d” to EN ISO 13849-1/cc3 to EN954-1 

Thermoplastic 

DIN rail EN50 022 

Max. 2x2.5mm 2 solid wire 

Max. 2x1.5mm 2 stranded with end thimble 

(IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 

24VDC (+20%/-10%) 

24VAC (+10%/-10%) 

1A (Slow-blow) 

1 to 4 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver 

NO contact 

13/14 

Semi-conductor XI, Imax. 50 mA 

Max. 1500VA 

AC-15, DC-13 

2A/230VAC, 2A/24VDC 

250VAC/60VDC 

2A 


Typically 17ms 

+5°C to +55°C 


Typical Wiring Diagram 

9 

Example with SE - 100 C 


SE1 S E 2 

SE-R SE-T SE-R SE-T 

bn 

bn 

gn 

gn 

wh 

wh 

+24V 

L1 

+24V- 

+24V- 

SE-R 

gn 

br 

SE-T 

L1 

S 

A1(+) 

A4(-) 

S12 

S22 

A3(+) 

21 

11 

A1(+) 

A4(-) 

S12 A3(+) 

X1 

X2 

X3 13 

23 

K1 

K1 

U- 

sensors input 

relay output 

K2 

K1 

U- 

K2 K2 

K1 

sensors input 

relay output 

K1 K2 

K2 

K1 

K2 

A2(-) 24 22 14 2 

SE-100C 

A2(-) 

SE-400C 

14 

24 

0V 

N 

M 

3 

N 

M 

3 

SE-R 

gn 

bn 

wh 


SE1 

SE-T 

wh gnbn 

SE-R 

SE4 

SE-T 

SE-R 

gn 

bn 

wh 

SE2 

SE-T 

SE-R 

gn 

bn 

wh 

SE3 

SE-T 

gn1 

S12 

gn2 

S22 

wh bn gn3 gn4 

A4(-) 

A3(+) 

S32 

S42 

317

318 

Safer 

by 

Design

GENERAL & SPECIFIC-PURPOSE 

SAFETY CONTROLLERS 

10 

GENERAL PRODUCT FEATURES 

SCHMERSAL’s PROTECT Series Safety Controllers have been designed to 

satisfy a wide range of application requirements. Features include: 

• Removable, plug-in screw terminals 

• Compact size 

• Electronic fuses 


• Convection-cooled housings 

• PNP and/or dry contact monitoring capability 

• Stop category 0 and Stop category 1 models 

• Cross short monitoring 

• Multiple-voltage operation 

• Models compliant with PLd/control category 3 or PLe/control category 4 

• Monitored manual reset 

319

Model 

SRB 201 ZH 

SRB 301 HC/R 

Operating 

Voltage (UB) 

24V DC 

24V AC/DC or 

48-230V AC 

Types of Inputs 

Monitored 

Two-hand control 


Two-hand control 


SERIES 

SAFETY CONTROLLERS 


*Suitable for use in systems designed for up to PL d per EN iSO 13849-1 or Safety Control Category 3 per EN954-1. 

All others are suitable for use in systems up to PL e per EN iSO 13849-1 or Safety Control Category 4 per EN954-1. 

***Please see selection chart on page 342. 

Number of 

Input Devices 

Monitored** 

Number of 


Number of 

Auxiliary 

Outputs 

Feedback 

Monitoring 

Type of Reset 

Cross-short 

Monitoring 

Page 

Number 

2 2 1 N.C. Yes Automatic Yes 322 

2 3 1 Yes 

Monitoredmanual 

Yes 322 

SRB 202 MSL 24V DC Muting module 2 2 2 Yes Automatic Yes 324 

SRB 206 ST* 

SRB 206 SQ* 

SRB 211 AN 

SRB 211 ST 

SRB 301 LC or 

SRB 301 LCI 

SRB 301 LC/B 

SRB 301 MC 

SRB 301 ST 

SRB 301 ST- 

230V 

SRB 301 SQ- 

230V 

SRB 324ST 

24V AC/DC or 

48-230V AC 

24V AC/DC or 

48-230V AC 

24V AC/DC 

24V AC/DC 

24V AC/DC 

24V AC/DC 

24V AC/DC 

24V AC/DC 

Dry contacts 6 2 

Dry contacts 6 2 

Dry contacts 

Coded Magnets 

Dry contacts or 

PNP-type outputs 













1 

1 

2 (stop category 0) 




Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

1 3 1 N.C. Yes 

1 3 1 N.C. Yes 

1 3 1 Yes 

1 3 1 N.C. Yes 

48V-230V AC Dry contacts 1 3 1 N.C. Yes 

48V-230V AC Dry contacts 1 3 1 N.C. Yes 

24V AC/DC 




1 



1 N.C. plus 

3 semiconductors 

SRB 401 LC 24V AC/DC Dry contacts 1 4 1 Yes 

SRB 504 ST 

24V AC/DC 




Yes 

1 5 4 Yes 

6 

(Semiconductor) 

6 


1 


1 



or Automatic 


or Automatic 


or Automatic 


or Automatic 

Manual or 

Automatic 

Manual or 

Automatic 

Manual or 

Automatic 


or Automatic 


or Automatic 


or Automatic 


or Automatic 

Manual or 

Automatic 


or Automatic 

DIFFERENTIATED-INPUT SAFETY CONTROLLERS 

SRB 202 C 24V DC Dry Contacts 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 

SRB 400 C 24V DC Dry Contacts 2 4 None Yes 

Depends upon 

model*** 

Depends upon 

model*** 

SAFETY OUTPUT EXPANSION MODULE 

No 326 

Yes 326 

Yes 

(selectable) 

Yes 

(selectable) 

Yes 

(selectable) 

Yes 

(selectable) 

Yes 

(selectable) 

Yes 

(selectable) 

328 

330 

332 

334 

336 

338 

No 338 

Yes 338 

Yes 340 

Yes 344 

Yes 348 

**Without daisy-chaining 

Depends upon 

model*** 

Depends upon 

model*** 

SRB 402 EM 24V AC/DC N/A N/A 4 2 N.C. Yes Automatic N/A 346 

SRB 401 EM 115V AC N/A N/A 4 1 Yes Automatic N/A 346 

INPUT EXPANSION MODULE 

Protect-IE 24V DC Dry contacts 4 N/A 4 N/A N/A Yes 350 

Protect-PE 24V DC Dry/PNP contacts 4 N/A 4 N/A N/A Yes 352 

342 

342 

320 

NOTE: For FWS and AZS Series, please refer to the Safe Speed section on page 363. 

For AES Series, please refer to the BNS section on page 147. 

For SRB 301 HC/T and /R Series, please refer to the Safety Mat section on page 306.

SAFETY CONTROLLER SELECTION CRITERIA 

It helps the selection process to view a safety controller as 

having four basic characteristics, each determined by the 

application requirements. This approach can be 

applied to any safety controller. 

FOUR BASIC SAFETY CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS 

10 

SUPPLY VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS 

Select your supply voltage. While many voltages are possible 

(24VDC, 24VAC, 24VAC/DC, 115VAC and 230VAC), 

24 VDC gives the most flexibility since virtually all controllers 

are available in this voltage. Also, since a transformer 

and rectifier are not required, this unit generally is 

less expensive and smaller than a 115VAC model. 

It is important to recognize that the safety controller 

supply voltage is always converted by the controller 

electronics to 24VDC for internal operation and for 

powering monitored input devices. Hence monitored 

input devices need only be rated for 24VDC. 

INPUT MONITORING REQUIREMENTS 

The first step is to determine whether you need single 

channel (up to Safety Control Category 2) or dual-channel 

(Control Category 3 & 4) operation. 

Single-channel systems must monitor one N.C. positivebreak 

contact. Dual-channel systems can monitor 

1 N.O./1 N.C. or 2 N.C. contacts. Generally, these need 

to be isolated dry contacts since most controllers will view 

C-form contacts as a short circuit. Remember that 24VDC 

is supplied by the safety controller for monitoring these 

contacts. 

Safety controllers are also available for monitoring 

non-potential free contacts (such as PNP outputs from 

light curtains). Models are also available that allow users 

to field select the monitored contact configuration. 

Another consideration is crossed wire detection (a short 

between channels). This requires special circuitry in the 

safety controllers and is required for Safety Control 

Category 4 safety control systems. 

FEEDBACK & RESET CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS 

Safety controllers with feedback capability can also 

monitor control relays and motor contactors with positiveguided 

contacts. Such feedback is required for Safety 

Control Category 3 & 4 systems. A NC auxiliary contact is 

wired into the feedback loop (with or without a reset (start) 

button) to detect welded contacts in these external control 

devices. The safety controller detects the existence of a 

weld when the relay shuts down due to a power loss or 

open machine guard and prevents a restart. 

In order to reset the controller, the feedback loop must be 

closed (at least temporarily). If the NC auxiliary contact 

stays open due to a contact weld, the controller cannot be 

reset. 

Safety Control reset can be automatic or be achieved 

using the edge of a 24VDC reset signal. With automatic 

reset the controller will automatically reset (outputs close) 

when the machine guard is closed. Alternately, a reset or 

start button (manual reset) can be added to the feedback 

loop if desired. The controller only needs to momentarily 

see a 24VDC signal at the feedback terminals to reset. 

With a monitored-manual reset, some type of pushbutton 

is required. For monitored-manual resets, the feedback 

loop circuitry is designed so that it needs to see a 24V to 

0V transition (trailing edge) in order to reset. This method 

of reset is generally required when a person can actually 

get inside a machine guard (where they would be at risk if 

the equipment should automatically restart when the 

guard closes). 

OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS 

Determine the number and type of safety controller outputs 

required for machine control elements and signaling. 

Following are the typical types of safety controller outputs: 

A. N.O. safety enable circuits — either 

instantaneous or timed. 

B. N.O. or N.C. auxiliary relay contacts — these 

are not to be used for safety functions, but 

only for annunciation/signaling. 

C. Semiconductor outputs for annunciation. 

321

SERIES SRB 201 ZH & 

SRB 301 HC/R 

Two-Hand Control Safety Controller 

TECHNICAL FEATURES* 

Description 

The Model SRB 201 ZH is designed expressly for use 

with two-hand control units. It is equipped for connection 

to two actuators … each with 1Normally-Open (N.O.) and 

1 Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Both actuators 

(inputs) must be operated simultaneously (that is, within 

500ms as required by EN574 type III/C requirements for 

machine operation to be enabled. Should the input actuators 

not be simultaneously operated within this specific 

500ms period, both must be released before a start cycle 

can be initiated. 

Input Voltage 

24 VDC 

# Discrete Input 2 

Devices Monitored 

Compatible Input Device 

1 N.O. & 1 N.C. 


(Dry Contacts) 

Number & Type Safety Outputs 2 N.O. (Dry Contacts) 


1 N.C. (Dry Contact) 

(Non-Safety or Signalling Output) 

Typical Input Devices Monitored Two-hand control 

Type of Reset 

Automatic 


Yes 

LED Displays 







Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1 

Category 4, per EN 954-1 




• Electronic fuse 


• Automatic reset 

Front View* 

Model Number 

SRB 201 ZH 

SRB 301 HC/R-24V** 

SRB 301 HC/R-230V** 


24V DC 

24V AC/DC 

48-240V AC 

* For model SRB 201 ZH only 

**Please refer to page 320 in the SMS section for specifications on 

the SRB 301 HC/R 

322

SERIES SRB 201 ZH & SRB 301 HC/R 

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS* 





Weight 

Mounting 

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM* 

22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 

10 7 switching cycles 

200 gm 

DIN rail 

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS* 

Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, 

residual ripple max. 10% 






1.2 W (max.) 

Internal electronic fuse* 

F1, F2 : tripping current >.02 A 

F3 : tripping current >.06 A 

(Hybrid) 




suppressor circuit) 




Pick-up Delay 

≤ 50 ms 


≤ 30 ms 

Contact Type & Materials AgSnO self cleaning, positively driven 




Cable Connections • Plug-in self-lifting screw terminals 





*Resets automatically after a short time-delay. 

10 

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS* 


(24VDC) 


(N.O. Contact) 


(N.C. Contact) 


(N.O. Contact) 

A1 

A2 

A2.1 S12 

A1.1 S11 

A1.1 S22 


(N.C. Contact) 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 


with Automatic Reset 

A2.1 S21 

13 14 

23 24 

X1 

X2 


(N.C.) 

31 32 

323

SERIES SRB 202 MSL 

Muting Safety Controller 

(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoring) 


Description 

A muting safety controller permits the safety function to be 

temporarily disabled for reasons related to equipment or 

machine work cycles. Disabling the safety function for a limited 

period of time is referred to as “muting.” Muting is used 

to permit the access of materials of production and prevent 

access by personnel. A typical muting application is for pallet 

entrance and/or exit from a hazardous area (palletizing). 

Activation and subsequent de-activation of the muting function 

must be achieved using two or more hard-wired and 

independent signals (i.e., limit switches, optical or proximity 

sensors) activated by a proper time or space sequence. 

Input Voltage 

24V DC 

# Discrete Input Devices 2-4 (muting sensors) 

Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.C. (dry contacts) or 

Contact Configuration PNP switching 

Number & Type Safety 2 N.O. (dry contacts) 

Outputs 

Number & Type Auxiliary 2 (24V / 50mA max.) 

(non-safety or signalling 

outputs) 

Typical Input Devices • Limit switches 

Monitored 

• Devices with PNP outputs 

Type of Reset 

Automatic 


LED Displays 


• LA (muting lamps) 


•UB-Ui (voltage at input terminals 

& beyond fuse) 


Stop Category 


Function of master safety controller 






• Automatic reset 



Front View 


Model Number 


SRB 202 MSL 

24V DC 

324

SERIES SRB 202 MSL 







Weight 

Mounting 


45mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


400 gm (0.88 lbs.) 

DIN rail 



Fuse (input power) 

Fuse (safety outputs) 


(safety outputs) 

• 24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripple 

max. 10% 

5.6 W, plus power consumption of muting 

sensors and muting indicator lamps 

Internal electronic fuse, 


4 A slow-blow (recommended) 

230V AC, 4 A Resistive 

(inductive with suppressor circuit) 

Switching Capacity L54, L84: max. 50mA 

(auxiliary contacts) 

Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60947-5-1 

Pick-up Delay 

≤ 200 ms 


Contact Type & AgSnO, self-cleaning, positive-guided & 

Material 

AgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided 


Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1, 4 kV/2 


Cable Connections • Self-lifting screw terminals 





Muting Lamps LA1 / LA2: 24V / 50mA-500mA 

NOTE: Use of muting lamps is a requirement in Europe. 

Should muting lamps not be used, an equivalent 

resistance of approximately 220 ohms (3 watts) is 

necessary. A version without this lamp monitoring 

circuit will be available in the near future. 

10 

Terminal Connections (shown with dry-input contacts) 


Monitored Input 1-3 

Monitored Input 2-4 

Safety Output #1* 

(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S22 

S23 

13 14 

Safety Output #2* 

(N.O.) 

Muting Lamps 


Manual (leading-edge) 

Reset 

23 24 

LA1 

LA2 

X1 

X2 

X1 

MR 


#1 


#2 

L54 

Simultaneity 

L84 

Lamp Current 

* Safety outputs connected to master controller 

325

SERIES SRB 206 ST & 

General Purpose Safety Controllers 

SRB 206 SQ 

(for dry contact input monitoring) 


Input Voltage 

Description 

The Model SRB 206 ST/SQ family are “general purpose” 

units designed for use with safety devices having 

Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Each is equipped for 

connection with up to six input devices such as E-stop 

push button and safety interlock switches. In addition it 

features user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic 

reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor outputs for signalling/annunciation, 

and two safety outputs. SRB 206 SQ 

and SRB 206 SQ-230 also feature cross-short recognition. 

Front View 

SRB 206 ST (SQ) 

24 VAC / DC 

SRB 206 ST (SQ) - 230 V 48 - 230 V AC 

# Discrete Input Devices 6 (Single or Dual-Channel) 

Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.C. (Dry Contacts) 


Number & Type 



Number & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type 


semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA 



Monitored 


Type of Reset 


(Selectable) 


• Automatic 


LED Displays 









Safety Classification PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1 





(SRB 206 SQ models only) 

• Up to 6 monitored devices 

• Six auxiliary outputs 




Model Number 


SRB 206 ST 

SRB 206 ST - 230V 

SRB 206 SQ* 

SRB 206 SQ-230* 

24V AC/DC 

48 - 230 VAC 

24V AC/DC 

48 - 230 VAC 

*Feature cross-short recognition. 

326

SERIES SRB 206 ST & SRB 206 SQ 






Weight 

Mounting 

45mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


300 gm 

DIN rail 

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input) 

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 206 ST shown) 


Monitored Input #1A 






max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

48 VAC-240VAC, 50/60 Hz 

3.6 W (max.), 3.6 VA 




230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping 

current > 1.0 A 

Secondary : Internal electronic fuse, 




Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 20 mA 



(Safety Outputs) (inductive with suitable supressor circuit) 


Pick-up Delay 

≤ 200 ms 


≤ 40 ms 

Contact Type & Materials AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guided 









Monitored Input #1B 


10 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S71 

S72 

S11 

S22 





S72 

S82 

S31 

S32 

S82 

S92 

S31 

S42 





S92 

S102 

S51 

S52 

S102 

S112 

S51 

S62 


Safety Output #1 (N.O.) 


Feedback Monitoring with 

Monitored-manual Reset 

S112 

S122 

13 14 

23 24 

X1 

X2 



PNP-Semiconductor Outputs #1 through #6 

X1 

X3 

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 

327


General Purpose Safety Controller 

(for dry 1 NO/1 NC contact input monitoring) 


Description 



and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is 

equipped for connection of one monitored input device in 

dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable 

monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop 

category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring 

of positive-guided controlled loads. 

Front View 

Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts) 


Number & Type 

3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.) 






Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.) 

Monitored 

• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.) 

• Coded magnets 

Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 


LED Displays 


Stop Category 



• Automatic 

Yes 



















• Resetable electronic fuse 



Model Number 

SRB 211 AN 


24 V AC/DC 

328








Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


255 gm 

DIN rail 




max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 


output Y1 


Tripping current > 1.5 A 

(Resets approx. 1 second) 







10 




Pick-up Delay 

≤ 40 ms 


Contact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided 

Materials 









TERMINAL CONNECTIONS 



(N.O.) 


(N.C.) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S13 

S14 

S21 

S22 

13 14 


(N.O.) 


(Stop Category 1, N.O.) 



Feedback Monitoring with Manually- 

Monitored (Trailing Edge) Reset 

23 24 

37 38 

X1 

X3 

X1 

X2 


(PNP-Semiconductor) 

Y1 

329

SERIES SRB 211 ST 


(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring) 


Description 

The Model SRB 211 ST is a “general purpose” unit 


Closed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs. It 

is equipped for connection of one monitored input device in 

single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it features 

user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop 

category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring of 

positive-guided controlled loads. 

Front View 

Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.C. (Dry Contacts) or 

Contact Configuration PNP-switching 

Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (1 delayed: 1-30 sec.) 

Outputs 




Signalling Output) 


Monitored 



outputs 


Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 


LED Displays 


Stop Category 



• Automatic 

Yes 






•UB (voltage at input terminals) 













• Hybrid fuse 



Model Number 


SRB 211 ST 

24V AC/DC 

330








Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


255 gm 

DIN rail 




max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 


output Y1 

Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1, 












Pick-up Delay 

≤ 40 ms 


Contact Type & AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided 

Materials 









10 

Terminal Connections 



(N.C. or PNP) 


(N.C. or PNP) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S21 

S22 

13 14 


(N.O.) 


(Stop Category 1, N.O.) 





23 24 

37 38 

X1 

X3 

X1 

X2 



Y1 

331

SERIES SRB 301 LC & 


SRB 301 LCI 



Description 

The Model SRB 301 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose” 

unit designed for use with safety devices having Normally- 

Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equipped 

for connection of one input device in single- or dual-channel 

configuration. In addition it features feedback monitoring of 

positive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual reset 

and optional cross-short recognition. 

Front View 

Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 

Monitored Contact 

N.C. (Dry Contacts) or 


PNP-switching 


Outputs 

Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts) 




Monitored 



outputs 

Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 


LED Displays 




• Automatic 

Yes 











(Field-wired option) 

• Screw terminals (LC) 

• Detachable terminals (LCI) 


• Electronic fuse (LCI) 

• Glass fuse (LC) 


Model Number 


SRB 301 LC 

SRB 301 LCI 

24V AC/DC 

24V AC/DC 

332

SERIES SRB 301 LC & SRB 301 LCI 







Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


230 gm (0.5 lbs.) 









max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA 

• Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.50 A 

(SRB 301 LC) 

• Internal electronic fuse* 

(SRB 301 LCI) 








Pick-up Delay 

≤ 30 ms 


≤ 50 ms 

Contact Type & 


Materials 




Cable Connections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for 

13 to 20 AWG 





10 




(N.C.) 


(N.C.) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S21 

S22 

13 14 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 





(N.C.) 

23 24 

33 34 

X1 

X2 

41 42 

333

SERIES SRB 301 LC/B 

Description 

The Model SRB 301 LC/B is a lower cost “general-purpose” 








Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 



PNP-switching 


Outputs 


(Non-Safety or Signalling 

Output) 


Monitored 


• Coded Magnets 


outputs 

Type of Reset 


(Selectable) 

• Automatic 


LED Displays 








Safety Classification Up to PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1 

Up to Category 4, per EN 954-1 

Model Number 



SRB 301 LC/B 

24V AC/DC 

334

SERIES SRB 301 LC/B 


Dimensions (W x H x D) 22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 





Expectancy 

Weight 

230 gm (0.5 lbs.) 

Mounting 











max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA 

Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A 





24 VDC, 2 A 


(Auxilliary Contacts) 


Pick-up Delay 

≤ 30 ms 


≤ 50 ms 




Air Cleaner & 

DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 



• Screw terminals for 

13 to 20 AWG 




10 

Terminal Connections 



(N.C.) 


(N.C.) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S12 

S22 

13 14 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 





(N.C.) 

23 24 

33 34 

X1 

X2 

41 42 

335

SERIES SRB 301 MC 




Description 

The Model SRB 301 MC is a “general-purpose” unit 







Front View 

Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 




PNP-switching 


Outputs 





Monitored 



outputs 


Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 


LED Displays 




• Automatic 

Yes 











(Selectable w/dip-switch) 

• Screw terminals 




Model Number 


SRB 301 MC 

24V AC/DC 

336

SERIES SRB 301 MC 







Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


230 gm (0.5 lbs.) 









max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

2.0 W (max.), 4.9 VA 

Internal electronic fuse* 

Tripping current > 0.5 A 








Pick-up Delay 

≤ 400 ms 


≤ 25 ms (emergency stop); 

≤ 80 ms (power failure) 



Materials 





13 to 20 AWG 




*Resets after a 1 second time-delay. 

10 




(N.C.) 


(N.C.) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S21 

S22 

13 14 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 





(N.C.) 

23 24 

33 34 

X1 

X2 

41 42 

337


SERIES SRB 301 ST - 230V 

SERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230V 

General Purpose 

Safety Controllers 

(for dry contact and 

PNP-type input monitoring) 

Model SRB 301 ST shown. 

Description 



Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each is 

equipped for connection of one input device in singleor 

dual-channel configuration. In addition they feature 

plug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanual 

or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of 

positive-guided controlled loads and cross-short 

recognition (on selected models). 

Front View 


Input Voltage 

SRB 301 ST 

SRB 301 ST - 230 V 

SRB 301 SQ - 230 V 

24 VAC / DC 

48 - 230 V AC 

48 - 230 V AC 


Monitored 

(SRB 301 SQ Dual-Channel Only) 



Number & Type 





Typical Input Devices 

Monitored 

Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 


LED Displays 



N.C. (Dry Contacts) PNP-switching 


1 N.C. (Dry Contacts) 

• E-stops (N.C.) 



outputs (SRB 301 ST-24V only) 


(SRB 301 ST-24V only) 



• Automatic 

Yes 





•UB (voltage at input terminals, 

SRB 301 ST only) 




Type Fuse 


Hybrid 

• Cross-short recognition (SRB 

301ST 24 VAC / DC & 

SRB 301 SQ only) 





338 

Model SRB 301 ST shown. 


Model Number 


SRB 301 ST* 

24V AC/DC 

SRB 301 ST - 230 V 48-230VAC 

SRB 301 SQ - 230 V* 48-230VAC 

*Feature cross-short recognition.


SERIES SRB 301 ST - 230V 

SERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230V 






Weight 

SRB 301 ST 

SRB 301 ST - 230V 

Mounting 


TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 301 ST shown) 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


240 gm (0.5 lbs.) 

250 gm 


Monitored Input #1 (N.C.) 



SRB 301 ST 

24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual 

ripple max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 48 VAC - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 


SRB 301 ST 

2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA 

SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 2.8 VA 



Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after 


230 V F1 : glass bulb, tripping current 0.5 A 

Secondary : electronic fuse, tripping 

current 0.12 A 










Pick-up Delay 

SRB 301 ST 

≤ 200 ms 

SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 ms 


SRB 301 ST 

≤ 20 ms 

SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 ms 












10 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S21 

S22 

13 14 







23 24 

33 34 

X3 

S12 

X2 

S12 

Auxiliary Output (N.C.) 

41 42 

339



(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoring 


Description 

The Model SRB 324 ST is a “general purpose” unit 


Closed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs. 

It is equipped for connection of one monitored input device 

in single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it features 

user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic 

reset, stop category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback 

monitoring of positive-guided controlled loads. 

Front View 

Input Voltage 

24V AC/DC 


Monitored 

Compatible Input Device N.C. (Dry Contacts) or 

Contact Configuration PNP-switching 

Number & Type 

5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.) 



Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (dry contact) 


3 - PNP 



Monitored 


• Devices with PNP outputs 


Type of Reset (Selectable) 


LED Displays 


Stop Category 


• Automatic 

Yes 
















• Hybrid fuse 

• Feed back monitoring 


Model Number 

SRB 324 ST 


24 V AC/DC 

340







Weight 

Mounting 


45mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


480 gm 






max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

4.8 W, 7.8 VA max. 


Fuse (Input Power) • Internal electronic Fuse F1, 


(reset approx. 1 second) 

• Internal hybrid fuse F2, 


(reset after interruption of 

supply voltage) 



(Safety Outputs Stop 0) 





(inductive with suitable supressor circuit) 

Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP) 

61/62: 24 VDC, 2 A max. (Dry) 

Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1 

Pick-up Delay 

≤ 30 ms 

Drop-out Delay ≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34) 

Contact Type & Material 







DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 

• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals 





10 






A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S21 

S22 

13 14 







23 24 

33 34 

47 48 

57 58 


Monitored-Manual Reset 


Jumper 

Auxiliary PNP Output 

X1 

X2 

X3 

X4 

X4 

X5 

S31 

S32 

Y1 Y2 Y3 

341

SERIES SRB 202 C & 

SRB 400 C 

Differentiated-Input Controllers 

Description 

The Series SRB202C and SRB400C are (general purpose) 

units designed for use with safety devices having two 

Normally-Closed (N.C.) and/or one Normally-Open (N.O.) 

and one Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Uniquely, 

they provide for differentiated switching of the safety outputs 

depending on the input that is actuated. 

For example, actuating an E-Stop as Input #1 would disable 

all of the unit’s safety outputs. Conversely, actuation 

of Input #2 (e.g., a safety guard interlock switch) would 

only disable half of the available safety outputs (safety 

output #2 on SRB202C units and safety outputs #3 & #4 

on SRB400C units). 

Thus this functionality, which would normally require 

two discrete safety controllers, can be achieved 

with a single unit (controller). 

Front View 


Input Voltage 

24 VDC 

# Discrete Input Devices 2 

Monitored 

Compatible Input Device Input #1: 2 N.C. (Dry contacts) 

Contact Configuration Input #2: 2 N.C. or 1 N.O./1 N.C. 

Number & Type Safety 2 N.O. (SRB202 models) 

Outputs 

4 N.O. (SRB400 models) 

Number & Type Auxiliary SRB202: 2 N.C. 


SRB400: None 



Monitored 


Type of Reset 


(Depends on model) (24 VDC trailing edge) 

• Automatic or Manual 


LED Displays 














Selection Chart 



(“Q” models only) 



Outputs Input #1 Input #2 

Cross- 

Model # Safety Aux Contacts Reset short Contacts Reset 

SRB202CA 2 2 2 N.C. 

Auto 

No 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

Auto 

SRB202CS 2 2 2 N.C. or No 2 N.C. or 

Manual 

Manual 

SRB202CA/Q 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

SRB202CA/T 2 2 2 N.C. No 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

Auto 

SRB202CS/T 2 2 2 N.C. 


Manual 

No 2 N.C. or 

SRB202CA/QT 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

342 

SRB400CA 4 0 2 N.C. 

Auto 

No 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

SRB400CS 4 0 2 N.C. or No 2 N.C. 

SRB400CA/Q 4 0 2 N.C. 

Manual 

Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

SRB400CA/T 4 0 2 N.C. No 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

SRB400CS/T 4 0 2 N.C. 


No 2 N.C. 

SRB400CA/QT 4 0 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.* 

*Suitable for use with BNS coded-magnet switches. 

Auto 

or 

Manual 

Auto 

or 

Manual

SERIES SRB 202 C & SRB 400 C 






Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


235 gm 






max. 10% 

4.4 W 

Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic fuse* F1, 

Tripping current > 1 A 






(inductive with suitable suppressor 

circuit) 




Pick-up Delay 

≤ 40 ms 


Contact Type & AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided 

Materials 










10 


Input Power 

Monitored Input #1A (N.C.) 

Monitored Input #1B (N.C.) 

Monitored Input #2A (N.C.) 

A1 

A2 

A1 

S12 

A1 

S22 

S31 

S32 

Monitored Input #2B (N.C.) 

Monitored Input #2B (N.O.)* 

Feedback and Reset 

Input #1 

Feedback and Reset 

Input #2 

S41 

S42 

S43 

S44 

A1 

X1 

A1 

X2 

Output #1 

Output #2 

Output #3 (SRB400 only) 

Output #4 (SRB400 only) 

13 14 

13 24 

33 34 

33 44 

Auxiliary Output #1 

(SRB202 only) 


(SRB202 only) 

31 32 

31 42 

*For models having 1 N.O./1 N.C. contacts on Input #2. 

343

SERIES SRB 401 LC 


(for dry contact input monitoring) 


Description 

The Model SRB 401 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose” 


Closed (N.C.) switching outputs. It is equipped for connection 

of one input device in single- or dual-channel configuration. 

In addition it features feedback monitoring of positive-guided 

controlled loads, automatic or manual reset and cross-short 

recognition when monitoring in dual-channel. 

Front View 

Input Voltage 

24 V AC/DC 


Monitored 


N.C. (Dry Contacts) 



Outputs 





Monitored 


Type of Reset 


(Selectable) 

• Automatic 


LED Displays 









Safety Classification PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1 




• Screw terminals 


• Glass fuse 


Model Number 


SRB 401 LC 

24V AC/DC 

344

SERIES SRB 401 LC 







Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


210 gm (0.47 lbs.) 









max. 10% 

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

2.5 W (max.), 4.2 VA 

Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A 








Pick-up Delay 

≤ 15 ms 


≤ 30 ms 


AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guided 

Materials 





13 to 20 AWG 




10 

Single-channel configuration shown 

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Single-channel configuration) 



(N.C.) 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

13 14 

23 24 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 





(N.C.) 

33 34 

43 44 

S33 

S34 

51 52 

345

SERIES SRB 402 EM & 

SRB 401 EM-115V 

Safety Output Expansion Module 


Input Voltage 

Number & Type Safety Outputs 

SRB 402 EM: 24V AC/DC 

SRB 401 EM-115V: 115V AC 



SRB 402 EM: 2 N.C. 

(Non-Safety or Signalling Outputs) SRB 401 EM-115V: 1 N.C. 

LED Displays 



Safety Classification 



• K1/K2 (safety relay 1 & 2) 


Function of Master Safety 

Controller (mounted in same 

control cabinet) 


• Compatible with all SRB 

PROTECT SM Series models 

Description 

The Models SRB 402 EM and 401 EM are designed for 

use as an accessory for SCHMERSAL’s PROTECT SM 

Series safety controllers. It provides additional safety 

(enabling) outputs where required to satisfy the system 

control requirements. 


Model Number 


SRB 402 EM 

24V AC/DC 

SRB 401 EM-115V 115V AC 

Front View 

Model SRB 402 EM shown 

346

SERIES SRB 402 EM & SRB 401 EM-115V 






Weight 

Mounting 


22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(0.9" x 3.94" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +45°C 

(-13°F to +113°F) 


SRB 402 EM: 215 gm (0.47 lbs.) 

SRB 401 EM: 260 gm (0.57 lbs.) 



Operating Voltage: 

SRB 402 EM 

SRB 401 EM-115V 



(for SRB 402 EM only) 




24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripple 

max. 10% 

24V AC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

115V AC -15% / +6%, 50/60 Hz 

1.0 VA (max.) / 1.0 W (max.) 

Glass fuse F1: 1.0 A / 250 V 

(Slow-blow) 



(inductive with suitable supressor) 

Switching Capacity 24V DC, 2 A 


Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN IEC 60947-5-1 

Pick-up Delay 

≤ 30 ms 


≤ 35 ms 






13 to 24 AWG 




10 

Model SRB 402 EM shown 




(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 


(N.O.) 

A1 

A2 

13 14 

23 24 

33 34 


(N.O.) 

Feedback Monitoring to 

Main Module 


(N.C.) 

Auxiliary Output #2* 

(N.C.) 

43 44 

X1 

X2 

51 52 

61 62 

*Featured on SRB 402 EM model only 

347




Description 



Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each is 

equipped for connection of one input device in singleor 

dual-channel configuration. In addition they feature 

plug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanual 

or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of 

positive-guided controlled loads and optional crossshort 

recognition. 

Front View 


Input Voltage 

24 VAC / DC 


Monitored 




PNP-switching 

Number & Type 



Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts) & 3-PNP 




Monitored 



outputs 

Type of Reset 

(Selectable) 


LED Displays 




(24V DC trailing edge) 

• Automatic 

Yes 











Type Fuse 


Hybrid 






• Resetable (hybrid) fuse 


Model Number 


SRB 504 ST 

24V AC/DC 

348







Weight 

Mounting 


45mm x 100mm x 121mm 

(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75") 

-25°C to +60°C 

(-13°F to +140°F) 


420 gm (0.93 lbs.) 





24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripple 

max. 10% 

24V AC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz 

3.2 W (max.), 7.1 VA, plus signalling 

outputs 


Tripping current > 2.5 A (Resets 

after interruption of supply voltage) 







Switching Capacity 24V DC, 2 A 



Pick-up Delay 

≤ 400 ms auto start 


≤ 30 ms (at emergency stop) 

≤ 80 ms (at power failure) 

Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, AgNi self cleaning, 







DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 

• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals 





10 






A1 

A2 

S11 

S12 

S21 

S22 

13 14 





23 24 

33 34 

43 44 

X1 

X2 


Manually-monitored 

(Trailing Edge) Reset 


Auxiliary Output (N.C.) 

53 54 

X3 

X4 

X4 

X5 

61 62 



Jumpers 

Y1 Y2 Y3 

S31 

S32 

349

SERIES PROTECT-IE 

Input Expansion Module 


Description 

The Protect-IE is designed for use as an accessory for 

Schmersal’s Protect Series Safety Controllers. It provides 4 

additional sensor inputs where required to satisfy the system 

control requirements. Depending on the version, the Protect- 

IE monitors 1 NO/1NC or 2 NC contacts. It is possible to 

cascade multiple units to monitor up to 80 sensors. 

Input Voltage 

Number & Type of 

Outputs 



outputs) 

Reset & Feedback 

Monitoring 


Monitored 

LED Displays 





24 VDC 

2 N.O. (dry contacts) to master 

safety controller 

4 – 24 VDC (Y1-Y4) 

Performed by master controller 

• E-stops 

• Interlocks 

• Coded-magnets 



• Y1-Y4 (signalling output) 


(In preparation) 

A function of the master safety 

controller (mounted in same 

control cabinet), with a maximum 

of PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1 


• Cage-clamp terminals 




Protect Series models with 

2 N.C. inputs 

Front View 

Model Number 

Protect-IE-02 

Protect-IE-11 


Monitoring Configuration 

of Sensors 

2 NC 

1 NO/1 NC 

Operating 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

Note: Screw terminals are also available. Add -SK to the Model 

Number. 

350

SERIES PROTECT-IE 






Weight 

Mounting 

48mm x 126mm x 61mm 

(1.89" x 4.96" x 2.4") 

-25°C to +55°C 

(-13°F to +131°F) 


140 gm 

DIN rail 

Typical Wiring Diagram (Model Protect-IE-02 shown) 





Fuse (outputs) 


(outputs) 



Pick-up Delay 







max. 10% 

1.7 W max.; plus Y1-Y4 


tripping current > 100 mA 

2 A slow-blow 

24V, 2 A Resistive 

(inductive with suitable suppressor) 

24 VDC, 100 mA (Y1-Y4) 

≤ 20 ms 

≤ 20 ms 


DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2 

• Cage-clamp terminals for 

min. 0.08mm 2 & max. 2.5mm 2 




10 

Terminal Connections (Model Protect-IE-02 shown) 


Output #1 

(N.O.) 

Output #2 

(N.O.) 

Signalling Outputs 

(24 VDC) 

A1 

A2 

13 14 

23 24 

Y1 

Y2 

Y3 

Y4 

Monitored Input 

#1A (N.C.) 


#1B (N.C.) 


#2A (N.C.) 


#2B (N.C.) 

+ S1 

– S2 

+ S3 

– S4 


#3A (N.C.) 


#3B (N.C.) 


#4A (N.C.) 


#4B (N.C.) 

+ S5 

– S6 

+ S7 

– S8 

351

SERIES PROTECT-PE 

Input Expansion Module 


Description 

The Protect-IE is designed for use as an accessory for 

Schmersal’s Protect Series Safety Controllers. It provides 4 

additional sensor inputs where required to satisfy the system 

control requirements. Depending on the version, the Protect- 

IE monitors 1 NO/1NC or 2 NC contacts, as well as PNPtype 

devices (AOPDs or CSS). It is possible to cascade 

multiple units to monitor up to 80 sensors. 

Input Voltage 

Number & Type of 

Outputs 



outputs) 

Reset & Feedback 

Monitoring 


Monitored 

LED Displays 





24 VDC 

• 2 N.O. (dry contacts) to master 

safety controller 

• -AN: 1 NO/1NC (dry contacts) to 

master safety controller 

4 – 24 VDC (Y1-Y4) 

Performed by master controller 

• E-stops 

• Interlocks 

• Coded-magnets 

• PNP-type devices 



• Y1-Y4 (status of inputs) 

• Y5 (overall system status) 


A function of the master safety 

controller (mounted in same 

control cabinet), with a maximum 

of PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1 


• Cage-clamp terminals 

• Cross-short recognition (selectable) 



Protect Series models with 

2 N.C. inputs 

• -11-AN model is compatible with 

AES Series 

Model Number 

Protect-PE-02 

Protect-PE-11 

Protect-PE-11-AN* 


Monitoring Configuration 

of Sensors 

2 NC 

1 NC & 1 NO 

1 NC & 1 NO 

Operating 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

Note: Screw terminals are also available. Add -SK to the end of the 

Model Number. 

*-AN version has 1 NO/1NC Safety Outputs. 

352

SERIES PROTECT-PE 






Weight 

Mounting 

65.5mm x 126mm x 61mm 

(2.58" x 4.96" x 2.4") 

-25°C to +55°C 

(-13°F to +131°F) 


140 gm 

DIN rail 

Typical Wiring Diagram (Model Protect-IE-02 shown) 





Fuse (outputs) 


(outputs) 


max. 10% 

1.7 W max.; plus Y1-Y5 


tripping current > 300 mA 

2 A slow-blow 

24V, 2 A Resistive 

(inductive with suitable suppressor) 

Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 100 mA (Y1-Y5) 


Pick-up Delay 

≤ 20 ms 



Air Clearance & 4 kV/2 to IEC/EN 60664-1 


Cable Connections • Cage-clamp terminals for 

min. 0.08mm 2 & max. 2.5mm 2 




10 

Terminal Connections (Model Protect-PE-02 shown) 


Output #1 

(N.O.) 

Output #2 

(N.O.) 

Signalling Outputs 

(24 VDC) 

A1 

A2 

13 14 

23 24 

Y1 

Y2 

Y3 Y4 Y5 


#1A (N.C.) 


#1B (N.C.) 


#2A (N.C.) 


#2B (N.C.) 

+ S1 

– S2 

+ S3 

– S4 


#3A (N.C.) 


#3B (N.C.) 


#4A (N.C.) 


#4B (N.C.) 

+ S5 

– S6 

+ S7 

– S8 

353

354 

Safer 

by 

Design

Protect PSC 

10 


The Protect PSC is a modular, programmable safety control system designed to accept 

emergency stop command devices, safety switches, and optoelectronic protective devices. 

The modular design gives the user the ability to select individual input and output modules 

to configure a system to meet their individual requirements, with future expansion possible. 

Unique to the PSC is the ability to build a complex safety system without programming. This 

is accomplished using the Mode 1 operating mode, a “hard-wired” version where the system 

functions result from the arrangement or order of the individual modules at the master/submaster 

module. The different system modules provide the user with a fixed number of inputs 

and outputs. Mode 3 is the free programmable operating mode, where different inputs 

and outputs of the entire system can be assigned by means of an IEC 61 131-compliant 

programming language. The smallest system includes 8 inputs and 6 outputs, with over 250 

inputs/outputs available when the system is fully extended. The Protect PSC is suitable for 

Control Category 4 to EN 954-1, PL e to EN13 849-1 or SIL 3 to IEC 61 508. 

355

Brief Description 

PROTECT PSC – Programmable 

The PROTECT PSC 

programmable modular safety 

control system is primarily 

designed for use in modern 

production systems or in 

complex individual machines. 

PROTECT PSC is suitable 

both for the safe evaluation 

and linking of several safetyoriented 

signals such as 

emergency stop control 

equipment, guard monitoring, 

safety light curtains (AOPDs) 

or safety sensors from the 

Schmersal CSS, MZM or 

AZM200 ranges. 

A significant advantage of 

the PROTECT PSC lies in 

its modular and therefore 

extremely flexible construction. 

This enables the user to 

achieve an optimal solution 

for the respective task from 

the point of view of costs 

without leaving unnecessary 

numbers of inputs or outputs 

unused. In addition the very 

high packaging density of 

connecting terminals helps 

to save space in the switch 

cabinet. 

PROTECT PSC enables 

applications to be realised 

in control category 4 to 

EN 954-1, Performance 

Level “e” to EN 13 849-1 or 

SIL 3 to IEC 61 508. 

As a special feature the 

PROTECT PSC also offers 

the possibility of carrying out 

(non safe) signal processing 

under operating conditions in 

addition to safety-oriented 

signal processing. 

If programming is to be 

completely eliminated, a 

safe zone section shut-down 

can be achieved with the 

PROTECT PSC, similar to 

a system of safety relay 

modules, determined only by 

the sequence of modules on 

the DIN rail. 

A summary of the most 

important features: 

• Modular design 

• Integration of safe signals 

under operating conditions 

• Free programming to 

IEC 61 131 via standard 

USB interface or 

• Signal interlinking via 

external wiring without 

programming 

• Connection facility for 

external gateway (Profibus, 

DeviceNet or CC link) 

• Reaction time 22 ms 

(semi-conductor outputs) 

or 37 ms (relay outputs) 

• Visualisation and status 

display on module or PC 

• Simple DIN rail assembly 

Connectable devices 

(sensor level) 

• EMERGENCY-STOPcontrol 

units with dry 

contacts 

• Safety switch with 

dry contacts, ditto 

interlocking devices 

(with and without 

latching), enabling 

switch or similar. 

• Electromagnetic safety 

switch, e.g. Schmersal- 

BNS 

• Protective devices with 

non-floating contacts, 

for example optoelectronic 

protective devices 

(AOPDs) or similar. 

• Safety sensors from 

Schmersal CSS range 

and contact-free interlocking 

devices from 

the Schmersal-AZM 2xx 

range. 

356

Modular Safety System 

Representation of 

modular design 

with dimensioning 

10 

Module 

Number of single channel inputs 

Standard 

signals with 

dry contacts 

Safe 

Dry 1 

Nonfloating* 

Number of single channel outputs 

Standard Safe 

Selectable* 

signals with 

dry contacts 

Transistor Relay 

0.3 A** 

0.5 A** 0.3 A** 4 A** 

PSC-CPU-MON — 4 — 4 — 6 — — 

PSC-SUB-MON — 4 — 4 — 6 — — 

PSC-S-STP-E 4 — 2 4 — — 

PSC-S-STP-LC — 4 2 — 4 — — 

PSC-S-STP-ELC 2 2 2 — 4 — — 

PSC-S-Relay — — — — — — — 2 x 2 

PSC-S-IN-E — 16 — — — — — — 

PSC-S-IN-LC — — 16 — — — — — 

PSC-S-OUT — — — — — — 16 — 

PSC-NS-IN 16 — — — — — — — 

PSC-NS-OUT — — — — 16 — — — 

* The dry or non-floating information refers to the technical properties of the input signals: 

• Dry-contacts input signals, e.g. from emergency stop control devices, safety switches, interlocking devices, safety solenoid switches and similar. 

• Non-floating input signals, e.g. PNP outputs from optoelectronic protective devices such as safety light curtains, laser scanners etc. but also from safety sensors 

from Schmersal CSS or AZM200 ranges. 

• Selectable, input signals are monitored without cross short recognition. Outputs from optoelectronic protective devices can be directly connected, or dry contacts 

can be monitored up to a PL d. 

** Maximum current per output with resistive load. 

357

General 


In addition to the central 

unit (Fig. 1), a power supply 

module (Fig. 2) and various 

input and output modules 

(see Table Page 3) form part 

of the PROTECT PSC system. 

A minimum configuration 

consists of a CPU module 

and a power supply module. 

The CPU can trigger up to 15 

modules so that additional 

input and output modules can 

be added at a later date as 

required and integrated into 

the complete system with little 

effort. All modules can be 

easily assembled on DIN top 

hat rails and are connected 

via backplane bus (Fig. 3). 

This means the user can 

freely determine the extension 

stage of the system and 

therefore also the number of 

available inputs and outputs – 

from 8 inputs and 6 outputs in 

Fig. 1: Central Unit PROTECT 

PSC-CPU-MON 

the most simple version to 

over 250 inputs/outputs when 

the system is fully extended. 

In addition the safety controller 

also offers interfaces to 

Fig. 2: Power supply module 

PROTECT PSC-POWER 

various gateways (Fig. 4) in 

order to be able to perform a 

data exchange via Profibus 

DP, DeviceNet or CC link. 

Fig. 3: Backplane bus 

Fig. 4: Gateway 

Possible operating mode 

a) “Hardwired” version 

The operation of the 

PROTECT PSC in Operating 

Mode 1 is intended for 

applications in which a zone 

section shut-down is to be 

performed without software 

programming. This is, of 

course, possible in a much 

simpler and more elegant 

manner in Mode 3 with free 

programming. 

Submaster 

system 1 

Submaster 

system 2 

358 

The application represented 

in Fig. 5 serves as an explanatory 

example. A safety request 

(here emergency-stop contact) 

to the CPU (master system) 

switches all outputs of the 

entire system to the safe state. 

A safety request (here guard 

contact) to the SUB-CPU only 

switches the outputs of the 

submaster system (Sub-CPU 

and subsequent input/output 

modules) to the safe state. 

Fig. 5: Example of application


Possible operating mode 

b) Freely programmable 

version 

This operating mode allows 

the real capacity and 

flexibility of PROTECT PSC 

to be demonstrated. All 

inputs and outputs of the 

entire system are assigned 

via a programming language 

(ladder) corresponding to 

IEC 61 131. Logic functions, 

e.g. AND and OR, as well as 

other dependencies can be 

freely programmed. 

Fig. 6: Programming environment 

10 

Fig. 7: Con-figuration 

of the I/O modules: 

clear differentiation between 

safe and operational area 

USB 

Fig. 8: Free programming to IEC 

61 131 with the opportunity to 

incorporate functional blocks into 

the program. The user is provided 

with various functional modules in 

a library. The user also has the 

possibility of designing own 

functional modules. 

359

Visualization 


Diagnosis 

and visualization 

A fast diagnosis can be 

achieved via the LED display 

on the modules or the PC 

in monitoring mode or by 

reading out the error reports 

from the central control unit. 

Fig. 9: Clear display on the CPU 

module of which input and output 

signals connected 

Fig. 10: Online visualization: active 

contacts are displayed in color 

Fig. 11: Diagnosis: clear problem 

solutions are provided in the event 

of an internal or external error 

360

Terminal Assignment 


10 

Fig. 12: External circuitry Mode 3 (freely programmable mode) 

Fig. 13: Example of external wiring 

Terminal assignment 

In general two different 

options for terminal 

assignment are available 

depending on operating 

mode. The freely programmable 

operating mode offers 

the user the greatest possible 

flexibility. All input signals can 

be freely connected to each 

other and outputs can be 

activated with the desired 

mutual dependence (Fig. 12). 

By contrast the terminal 

connection in operating mode 

1 has a completely different 

design in which it is possible 

to achieve a zone section 

shut-down entirely without 

software programming. In a 

similar way to safety relay 

module circuitry, here the user 

is given exact specifications 

for how the terminal assignment 

of the input and output 

signals should look (Fig. 13). 

361

362 

Safer 

by 

Design

SAFE SPEED CONTROL 

10 


Model Description Page 

PDMS Modular Drive Monitor System 364 

AZS 2305 Fail to Safe timer 368 

FWS 1205 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 370 






SSW301HV Sensorless Stand Still Monitor 382 

AZR31S1 Sensorless Stand Still Monitor 384 

363

Brief description 

PDMS – Protect Drive 

Safe speed monitoring 

of drives 

With the modular system 

PDMS, which is short for 

Protect Drive Monitoring 

system, there are new 

possibilities for a user to 

monitor any drive systems. 

This system enables the 

machine builder monitoring 

the speed of, for instance, 

spindle or axle drives in a 

safe manner. To detect the 

movement, encoders, 

resolvers or two proximity 

switches can be used. The 

system monitors the signals 

from rotary and linear movements. 

The drive speed to be 

monitored can be individually 

programmed. 

Similar to PROTECT PSC, 

the functional components 

of PDMS are based on a 

modular system. The monitoring 

electronics, which is 

connected to the signal 

generator signal through a 

drive-specific cable adapter, 

is located on an input card. 

Every axle is monitored by 

means of its proper plugable 

input card. Inside the system 

rack, multiple and even 

different cards can be combined. 

Safe output cards 

transmit the signal to 

PROTECT PSC, where 

they are further processed. 

Appropriate cable adapters 

are available for a multitude 

of drive systems. 

364 

In this way, the maximum 

speeds for the special operating 

modes of, for instance 

NC machining centers, e.g. 

operating mode 1 (“automatic 

mode”), operating mode 2 

(“set-up mode”), operating 

mode 3 (“process monitoring 

with enabling device”) 

and operating mode 4 

(“process monitoring without 

enabling device”)*, can 

be individually set and safely 

monitored in accordance 

with DIN EN 13 128. 

The PDMS system extends 

and completes the features 

of the modular PROTECT 

PSC safety system with 

monitoring functions for 

machinery and plants. 

The system meets all the 

requirements set forth for 

safety-related electronic 

components. The selfmonitoring 

circuitry has a 

redundant structure, which 

means that the safety device 

remains safe, even in case 

of failure of a component. 

The machine builder 

therefore has a flexible and 

individually programmable 

system for the safe 

monitoring of drives at his 

disposal. This system not 

only increases the safety, 

but also enhances the 

productivity of the machine 

concerned: the PDMS only 

transmits the enabling signal 

for the safety guard when the 

dangerous movement has 

come to standstill or at least 

has slowed down to such 

extent that the movement 

no longer involves any risk. 

In case of time-controlled 

monitoring, a specific time 

buffer must be provided, 

so that the safety guard is 

enabled at a later time. 

PL “e” 

* Although the European Standard does not handle 

an operating mode 4, it is not excluded in situation 

of particular safety reasons (item 2 of the preliminary 

notes to the machinery directive)

Examples of assembly 

Monitoring System 

Example 1: Drive monitoring of a 2-axis 

portal machine with resolver signals 

• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1RG V1 


• 1 × output card PDMS-O PMG 

10 

Example 2: Drive monitoring of a 4-axis 

packaging machine with resolver and 

sinus/cosinus signals 



• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1EG V7A 

• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1EG V9 

• 1 × output card PDMS-O PMG 

Drive system data acquisition sheet 

With determining of different monitoring 

speeds in the order form, PDMS will be delivered 

in a configured way. After connecting 

encoder and output signals, the user is able 

to start up the system immediately. 

(A careful starting up procedure is assumed.) 

365

Application 

• Standstill monitoring 

• Detection of maximum permitted speed of the drive, depending on the 

selected operating mode 

• Possible to connect sensors directly like i.e. emergency stop control 

devices, operating mode switches or guard door safety switches 

Racks Input cards Output cards 

here: 

Protect PDMS-R 4M R1G 

for 4 input cards 

and 1 output card 

here: 

• 2 × Protect PDMS-I 1EG V7A 

• 1 × Protect PDMS-I 1RG V2 

• 1 × Protect PDMS-I 1EG V9 

here: 

• Protect 

PDMS-O PMG 

Evaluable encoder signals 

• Resolver 

• Sinus/Cosinus 

• TTL 

• HTL 

• PNP-proximity switch 

366

10 

Safer 

by 

Design 

367

AZS 2305 

Fail-To-Safe Timer 

Features 

• Time can be set between 0.1s and 99min. 

• To EN 1088 

• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, Control Category 

3 to EN 954-1 


• Recognition of short-circuit between 

connections 

• 2 short-circuit proof additional 

transistor outputs 

• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD) 

• 2 channel microprocessor control 

Dimensions 

55 x 75 x 110 mm 

ISD 




drop-out 

• Short-circuits between the input connections 

• Interruption of the input connections 

• Difference in time setting between channel I and 

channel II 

• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the timer 

Model 

Designation 

AZS 2305-24VDC 

AZS 2305-110VAC 

AZS 2305-230VAC 

Function 

Table 


output Y 


AZS 2305 Y1 Enable, enabling circuits closed 

Y2 

No Enable, enabling circuits open 


368

AZS 2305 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 

• Achieves up to PL d/category 3 per 

EN ISO 13849-1, control category 

3 per EN954-1. 

• PL d or control Category 3 can be 

achieved. Exclusion of faults due 

to “Breakage or release of the 

actuator, fault in the solenoid 

interlock” is to be substan tiated 

and documented. 

• Monitoring of a sliding, hinged or 

removable guard device using an 

AZM range solenoid interlock. 

• The solenoid interlock releases the 

guard device only when the set 

time has elapsed. The time begins 

to run when the power contactors 

have dropped out. 

• The AES range guard door controller 

checks the position of the 

guard device. 

• The coil of the solenoid interlock 

is energized by operation of the 

pushbutton E 

• After release has taken place, the 

guard device must be opened if 

is not connected. 

• The wiring diagram is with the 

guard device closed and shows 

the de-energized condition. 

369

FWS 1205 

Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors 

Features 

• Confirmation of standstill using 2 impulse 

sensors 


3 to EN 954-1 


• Reset input 

• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs 



• Customer-specific standstill frequencies 

possible 

• 2 enabling paths 

Dimensions 

22.5 x 75 x 110 mm 

ISD 



• Interruption of the connections to one of the 

inductive proximity switches 

• Failure of the proximity switches 

• Failure of one channel being evaluated 


drop-out 

• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety 

controller 

Model 

Designation 

FWS 1205A-24VDC (Execution A) 

FWS 1205B-24VDC (Execution B) 

FWS 1205C-24VDC (Execution C) 

Standstill 

Frequencies 

Execution A Execution B Execution C 

Function 

Table 

Additional 

transistor output Y 

Function of 

output Y 

Input X1 1Hz 2Hz 1Hz 

Input X2 2Hz 2Hz 1Hz 

Y1 

Enable, Enabling 

circuits closed 

Y2 

Fault, high signal 


370

FWS 1205 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 

• The solenoid interlock can be 

opened when the FWS 1205 has 

registered standstill of the motor by 

means of the two PNP inductive 

proximity switches. The coil of the 

solenoid interlock is then energized 

by operation of the pushbutton E 

• The AES controller checks the 

position of the guard device. 

• Monitoring of the guard device 

using a solenoid interlock and a 

safety switch with separate 

actuator. 

• PL d or control category 3 can also 

be achieved without using the safety 

switch by connecting the NO and 

NC contacts of solenoid interlock to 

the guard door monitor. Exclusion 

of faults due to “Breakage or 

release of the actuator, fault in the 

solenoid interlock” is to be 

substantiated and documented. 

• Release is only possible when the 

run-down movement has come to 

an end. 




371

FWS 1206 


Features 

• Confirmation of standstill using 1 or 2 

impulse sensors 

• Uses additional standstill signal, e.g. PLC 

as second input channel 


3 to EN 954-1 







possible 

• 2 enabling paths 

Dimensions 

22.5 x 75 x 110 mm 

ISD 








drop-out 


controller 

Model 

Designation 



Standstill 

Frequencies 

Execution A 

Execution C 

Function 

Table 

Additional 


Function of 

output Y 

Input X1 1Hz 1Hz 


Y1 

Y2 





372

FWS 1206 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 





proximity switches and the additional 

standstill signal H7. The coil of the 








actuator. 







release of the actuator, fault in 

the solenoid interlock” is to be 




an end. 

• When 1 sensor is used, the standstill 

frequencies must be identical 

and inputs X1 and X2 must be 

bridged (Version C). 




373

FWS 2505 


Features 


sensors 


3 to EN 954-1 




• 1 N/C auxiliary contact 




possible 

• 24-230VAC/DC 

Dimensions 

45 x 100 x 121 mm 

ISD 



• Interruption of the connections to the inductive 

proximity switches 




drop-out 


control unit 

Model 

Designation 

FWS 2505A 24-230V AC/DC (Execution A) FWS 2505C 24-230V AC/DC (Execution C) 

Standstill 

Frequencies 

Execution A 

Execution C 

Function 

Table 

Additional 


Function of 

output Y High (24V) 



Y1 

Y2 




Other frequencies on request. 


374

FWS 2505 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 





prox imity switches. The coil of the 



• The AES guard door controller 

checks the position of the guard 

device. 


using a solenoid interlock. 

• To achieve PL d or control category 

3 the exclusion of faults due to 

“Breakage or release of the actuator, 

fault in the solenoid interlock” 

is to be substan tiated and documented. 



an end. 




375

FWS 2506 


Features 






3 to EN 954-1 




• 1 N/C auxiliary contact 




possible 

• 24-230VAC/DC 

Dimensions 

45 x 100 x 121 mm 

ISD 








drop-out 


control unit 

Model 

Designation 


Standstill 

Frequencies 

Execution A 

Execution C 

Function 

Table 

Additional 


Function of 




Y1 

Y2 






376

FWS 2506 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 





prox imity switches and the additional 

standstill signal H7 . The coil of the 





device. 



• To achieve PL d or control category 

3 the exclusion of faults due to 


fault in the solenoid interlock” 

is to be substan tiated and documented. 



an end. 

• When 1 sensor is used, the 

standstill frequencies must be 

identical and inputs X2 and X4 



guard device closed and 


condition. 

377

FWS 2105 


Features 


sensors 


3 to EN 954-1 

• Operational voltage 24-230 VAC/DC 






possible 

• enabling path 

Dimensions 

45 x 75 x 110 mm 

ISD 








drop-out 


controller 

Model 

Designation 



Standstill 

Frequencies 

Execution A 

Execution C 

Function 

Table 

Additional 


Function of 

output Y 



Y1 

Y2 





378

FWS 2105 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 





proximity switches. The coil of the 








actuator. 







release of the actuator, fault in the 

solenoid interlock” is to be 




an end. 




379

FWS 2106 


Features 






3 to EN 954-1 







possible 

• 24-230VAC/DC 

Dimensions 

45 x 100 x 121 mm 

ISD 

The following faults are recognized by the safety controller 

and indicated by means of ISD 






drop-out 


control unit 

Model 

Designation 


Standstill 

Frequencies 

Execution A 

Execution C 

Function 

Table 

Additional 


Function of 




Y1 

Y2 






380

FWS 2106 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Application 

Notes 





prox imity switches and the additional 

standstill signal H7. The coil of the 





device. 



• To achieve PL d or control category 3 

the exclusion of faults due to 


fault in the solenoid interlock” is to be 

substan tiated and documented. 



an end. 

• When 1 sensor is used, the 

standstill frequencies must be 

identical and inputs X2 and X4 



guard device closed and 


condition. 

381

SSW 301HV 


Features 

• Sensor-free detection of standstill by 

measuring the EMF of the motor 

• Motor voltage range: 0 – 690 V 

• No adjustment work necessary 

• Connection to frequency inverters possible 

• Speed frequency: 0 – 1000 Hz 

• 3 enabling outputs; Stop Category 0 


• No set point necessary 

• Wire break monitoring of the measuring 

inputs 

• Self testing with fault memory 

• Cyclic self monitoring 

• 5 LEDs to display operating conditions 

• PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, Control Category 

4 to EN954-1 

Dimensions 

90 x 83 x 127 mm 

LED 

Functions 

• UB: Status operating voltage (LED on when 

power is on) 

• A: Channel A (on when frequency at channel A) 

• B: Channel B (on when frequency at channel B) 

• OUT: Enabling signal (on when 13-14, 23-24, 

33-34 closed) 

• ERR: Error (on in case of fault) 

Model 

Designation 

SSW301HV-115V 

SSW301HV-230V 

Description 

of the 

terminals 

Voltages: A1 115 VAC/230 VAC 

A2 N 

Outputs: 13-14 First safety enabling circuit 

23-24 Second safety enabling circuit 

33-34 Third safety enabling circuit 

Start: X1-X2 Feedback circuit 

41-42 Auxillary contact 


382

SSW 301HV 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Operating 

Principle 

The safety monitoring module checks 

the correct position of all internal 

relay contacts. During startup, every 

motor generates an induced voltage 

caused by residual magnetism, 

which is evaluated by the safety 

monitoring module. Any interruption 

of the motor cable is detected and 

recognized as well. To activate the 

SSW301HV, the connected motor 

must be standing still and the 

feedback input X1-X2 must be 

closed. 

• When the SSW301HV is connected 

to cable lengths >10 m, failures can 

occur. The following is recommended: 

Short and shielded connecting 

cables between the safety monitor - 

ing module and the motor; lay 

cables to other high capacity 

consumers (motor, etc) or strong 

interference sources (frequency 

converters) at sufficient distance 

and if possible not parallel to the 

signal input lines (L1, L2, L3) of 

the safety monitoring module. 

• When using frequency converters, 

please observe that: 

the terminal stage of the frequency 

converter is switched off when the 

motor is at standstill; there is no 

position control when the motor is 

at standstill 

• In order to avoid any inadvertent 

switch off or malfunction (ERR- 

LED) of the safety monitoring 

module please ensure that: 

external influences do not trigger 

any movement of the motor; no 

rotary movement of the motor can 

occur as soon as the self test is 

started (i.e. motor at standstill, 

LEDs A and B simultaneously 

flashing). 

383

AZR31S1 


Features 

• Sensor-free detection of standstill by 

measuring the EMF of the motor 

• Motor voltage range: 0 – 690 V 

• No adjustment work necessary 

• Connection to frequency inverters possible 

• Speed frequency: 0 – 1000 Hz 

• 3 enabling outputs; Stop Category 0 


• No set point necessary 

• Wire break monitoring of the measuring 

inputs 

• Self testing with fault memory 

• Cyclic self monitoring 

• 5 LEDs to display operating conditions 


4 to EN954-1 

Dimensions 

45 x 100 x 121 mm 

LED 

Functions 

• UB: Status operating voltage (LED on when 

power is on) 

• A: Channel A (on when frequency at channel A) 

• B: Channel B (on when frequency at channel B) 

• OUT: Enabling signal (on when 13-14, 23-24, 

33-34 closed) 

• ERR: Error (on in case of fault) 

Model 

Designation 

AZR31S1 - 24VDC 

AZR31S1 - 24VAC 



Description 

of the 

terminals 

Voltages: A1 115 VAC/230 VAC +24V DC 24V AC 

A2 N 0V DC 24V AC 

Outputs: 13-14 First safety enabling circuit 

23-24 Second safety enabling circuit 

33-34 Third safety enabling circuit 

Start: X1-X2 Feedback circuit 

41-42 Auxillary contact 


384

AZR31S1 

Typical 

Applications 

10 

Typical 

Wiring 

Diagram 

Wiring diagram above show with guard doors closed and in de-energized condition 

Operating 

Principle 

The safety monitoring module checks 

the correct position of all internal 

relay contacts. During startup, every 

motor generates an induced voltage 

caused by residual magnetism, 

which is evaluated by the safety 

monitoring module. Any interruption 

of the motor cable is detected and 

recognized as well. To activate the 

AZR31S1, the connected motor must 

be standing still and the feedback 

input X1-X2 must be closed. 

• When the SSW301HV is connected 

to cable lengths >10 m, failures can 

occur. The following is recommended: 

Short and shielded connecting 

cables between the safety monitor - 

ing module and the motor; lay 

cables to other high capacity 

consumers (motor, etc) or strong 

interference sources (frequency 

converters) at sufficient distance 

and if possible not parallel to the 

signal input lines (L1, L2, L3) of 

the safety monitoring module. 

• When using frequency converters, 

please observe that: 

the terminal stage of the frequency 

converter is switched off when the 

motor is at standstill; there is no 

position control when the motor is 

at standstill 

• In order to avoid any inadvertent 

switch off or malfunction (ERR- 

LED) of the safety monitoring 

module please ensure that: 

external influences do not trigger 

any movement of the motor; no 

rotary movement of the motor can 

occur as soon as the self test is 

started (i.e. motor at standstill, 

LEDs A and B simultaneously 

flashing). 

385

386 

Safer 

by 

Design

APPENDICES 

Topic 

Page 

• Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 

• Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 

• Selected Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

• NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 

A NEW APPROACH TO MACHINE SAFETY 

The European manufacturing community is currently in transition to a new standard, EN ISO 

13849-1:2006 which will take full effect December 31, 2011. 

EN ISO 13 849-1:2006 represents a major change in the philosophy of safety-related parts of 

machine control systems. It is a movement from the sole reliance on the proven-in-use 

deterministic approach of standards such as EN 954-1, to include probabilistic considerations. 

The new standard uses risk assessment to determine a required Performance Level (PLr). 

Achievement of the Performance Level is based on four aspects: 

• Control Reliability of circuit architecture — Almost identical to the structures established by 

EN 954-1, this deals with circuit redundancy, fault detection, and use of tried and tested 

components. It uses the same Control Categories. 

• Mean Time to Dangerous Failure (MTTFd) — Fundamentally this is a statement about the 

quality and reliability of the safety-related components utilized in the system. It is a statistical 

mean representing the expected working time without a safety-critical down time, per year. 

• Diagnostic Coverage — the quantification of the effectiveness of measures to discover 

failures. It is primarily concerned with the ratio of detected dangerous failures to the failure 

mode of all dangerous failures. 

• Common Cause Failure Abatement — The standard also requires measures to combat 

failures that can simultaneously affect both channels of Control Category 2 structures and 

higher. The eight measures identified include electromagnetic compatibility, surge protection, 

and diversity of components. 

The drafters of EN ISO 13 849-1:2006 strived to achieve a delicate balance between deterministic 

and probabilistic thinking — breaking down the new aspects into a requisite and practicable size for 

the “average user.” 

If you are interested in more information regarding EN ISO 13849-1:2006, please request a copy of 

our 140 page guide: Specific Background Information on EN ISO 13849-1: 2006. 

387

SELECTED MACHINE SAFEGUARDING 

TERMINOLOGY 

Authorized Output: an output from a safety controller’s 

positive-guided relays (used to “authorize” or “enable” a 

machine’s start circuit when safety system conditions 

exist). Also known as “safety output.” 

Automatic Reset: a safety controller reset circuit that 

automatically resets the safety controller when safe 

system conditions (no system faults) exist. A manual 

reset button is optional. 

Auxiliary output: a non-safety related contact closure 

or semiconductor output primarily used for signaling 

component or system status to a PLC, audible alarm 

or visual indicator (such as a stack light). Also called a 

“signaling contact” or “auxiliary monitoring contact”. 

ANSI (American National Standards Institute): an 

association of industry representatives who, working 

together, develop safety and other technical standards. 

Auxiliary monitoring contact: See “auxiliary output”. 

BG (Berufgenossenschaft): an independent German 

insurance agency whose legislative arm 

recommends industry safety practices. 

One of many “notified bodies” authorized 

to certify that safety products comply with 

all relevant standards. 

CE (Conformité Europeéne) mark: a symbol (CE) 

applied to finished products and machinery indicating 

it meets all applicable European Directives. For electrical 

and electronic “finished products”, such as a safety relay 

module, these include the Low Voltage 

Directive and, where relevant, the 

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 

Directive. 

Coded-Magnet Sensor: a two-piece position sensor 

consisting of an array of reed switches and a multiple 

magnet array-actuating element. Such devices will only 

deliver an output signal when the reed switch element 

is in the presence of a matched, multiple-magnetic 

field array. Coded-magnet sensors cannot be actuated 

using a simple magnet. Hence they are far more difficult 

to defeat/bypass than a simple magnetic switch or 

proximity sensor. 

Control Reliability: A term applied to safety devices or 

systems which are designed constructed and installed 

such that the failure of a single component within the 

device or system does not prevent normal machine 

stopping action from taking place…but does 

388 prevent a successive machine cycle from 

being initiated. 

CSA (Canadian Standards Association): an independent 

Canadian testing and standards-making 

organization similar to Underwriters 

Laboratories (UL) in the U.S. “CSA-certified” 

products meet relevant CSA electrical and 

safety standards. 

Declaration of Conformity: a manufacturer’s self-certified 

document, signed by a highly-positioned technical 

manager, which lists all the Standards and Directives to 

which a product conforms. A Declaration of Conformity 

is mandatory for all CE-marked products, and for 

machine components which, if they fail, could lead to a 

dangerous or hazardous situation on a machine. 

Defined Area: a predetermined area scanned by a light 

beam within which the presence of an opaque object of 

specified minimum size will result in the generation of a 

control signal. 

Direct-Action Contacts: See “positive-break” contacts. 

Diverse Redundancy: the use of different components 

and/or different microprocessor instruction sets written 

by different programmers in the design and construction 

of redundant components/circuits. Its purpose is to 

increase system reliability by minimizing the possibility 

of common-mode failure (the failure of like components 

used in redundant circuits). 

Dual-Channel Safety System: a safety control system 

characterized by two inputs; each connected to one of 

two independent safety circuits. Dual-channel systems 

are typically capable of detecting interconnection wiring 

faults such as open circuits, short-circuits and ground 

faults. As such they provide a higher level of safety than 

single-channel systems. 

E-Stop (Emergency Stop): the stopping of a machine 

by actuation of an “emergency stop” switch (such as a 

safety interlock switch, emergency push button switch, 

rope-pull switch, foot switch, or other actuating device. 

European Machinery Directive (EMD) 2006/42/EC: 

a set of machine safety design requirements which must 

be satisfied to meet the Essential Health and Safety 

standards established by the European Economic 

Community. This Directive, and other relevant European 

Directives (such as the Low Voltage Directive, EMC 

Directive, et al) must be satisfied for the machine to 

bear the CE mark.

Fail-to-Danger: a component or system failure which 

allows a machine to continue operating, exposing 

personnel to a hazardous or unsafe condition. 

Fail-to-Safe: “Fail-to-Safe” safety devices are designed 

such that a component failure causes the device/system 

to attain rest in a safe condition. 

Fault Detection: the monitoring of selected safety system 

components whose failure would compromise the 

functioning of the safety system. The detection of such 

failures is known as “fault detection.” Examples are: 

• a short-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnection 

wiring 

• an open-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnection 

wiring 

• a welded contact in the safety controller’s positiveguided 

relays 

• an open machine guard 

Fault Exclusion: the ability to minimize known possible 

component failures (“faults”) in a safety system by 

design criteria and/or component selection. Simple 

examples of “excluded faults” are: 

• The use of an overrated contactor to preclude the 

possibility of contact welding. 

• Design of a machine guard such that the safety 

interlock switch actuator cannot be damaged. 

• Selection of a suitable safety interlock switch. 

• Use of positive-break safety interlock switches 

together with a self-monitoring safety relay module, 

such that the possibility of a contact weld resulting 

in the loss of the safety function is eliminated. 

The elimination of such faults are generally a compromise 

between the technical safety requirements and 

the theoretical probability of their occurrence. Design 

engineers are permitted to exclude such faults when 

constructing the machine’s safety system. However, 

each “fault exclusion” must be identified, justified, and 

documented in the Technical File submitted to satisfy 

the European Machinery Directive. 

Feedback Loop: an auxiliary input on a safety controller 

designed to monitor and detect a contact weld in the 

primary machine-controlled device (e.g. motor contactor, 

relay, et al) having positive-guided contacts. 

Force-Guided Contacts: See “Positive-Guided 

Contacts”. 

Fixed Barrier Guard: See “Hard Guarding”. 

Guard: a barrier that prevents entry of an individual’s 

hands or other body parts into a hazardous area. 

Hard Guarding: the use of screens, fences, or other 

mechanical barriers to prevent access of personnel to 

hazardous areas of a machine. “Hard guards” generally 

allow the operator to view the point-of-operation. 

Hazardous Area: an area of a machine or process 

which presents a potential hazard to personnel. 

Interlock: an arrangement in which the operation of 

one device automatically brings about or prevents the 

operation of another device. 

Interlocked Barrier Guard: a fixed or movable guard 

which, when opened, stops machine operation. 

Machine Primary Control Element (MPCE): an 

electrically powered component which directly controls 

a machine’s operation. MPCE’s are the last control 

component to operate when a machine’s motion is 

initiated or stopped. 

Machine Secondary Control Element (MSCE): a 

machine control element (other than an MPCE) capable 

of removing power from the hazardous area (s) of a 

machine. 

Manual Start-Up Test: a term applied to safety controllers 

designed such that at least one of the system’s 

interlocked machine guards must be manually-opened 

and closed (after applying power) before machine operation 

is authorized. All SCHMERSAL’S even numbered 

Series AES microprocessor--based safety controllers 

(e.g. AES 1136, AES 1146, AES 1156, AES 3366, et al) 

are designed to require a manual start-up test. 

Manually-monitored Reset: a safety controller reset 

circuit requiring the presence of a discrete “trailing-edge” 

signal (24V to 0V) to activate the controller’s authorized 

outputs. A reset button is mandatory. 

Muting: the ability to program a monitoring and/or 

control device to ignore selected system conditions. 

Negative Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singlepiece 

safety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) such 

that the force applied to open the normally closed (NC) 

safety contact is provided by an internal spring. (See 

Figure 1.) 

In this mounting mode the NC contacts may not open 

when the safety guard is “open”. Here welded/stuck 

contacts, or failure of a contact-opening spring, 

may result in exposing the machine operator to a 

hazardous/unsafe area. 

When mounted in the “negative-mode”, single-piece 

safety interlock switches can be easily circumvented/ 

defeated by the operator…simply by taping down the 

switch actuator when the safety guard is open. 

389

Performance Level: outlined in EN ISO 13849-1, a 

required level of safety for SRPCS. Designated PL a 

through PLe. 

Point-of-Operation: the area(s) of a machine where 

material or the workpiece is positioned and a process is 

performed. 

Figure 1 

NEGATIVE-MODE INSTALLATION 

OSHA (Occupational Safety Health Administration): 

a U.S. Department of Labor Federal agency responsible 

for monitoring and regulating workplace safety. OSHA 

enforcement may reference their own regulations, as 

well as those of other industry standards-making groups 

(e.g. ANSI, NFPA, UL, et al). 

CONVENTIONAL SPRING-DRIVEN 

CONTACTS 

Point-of-Operation Guarding: a device or guard 

installed at the interface between the operator and the 

point-of-operation which is intended to protect personnel 

from hazardous areas. 

Positive-Break Contacts: normally-closed (NC) contacts 

which, upon actuation, are forced to open by a 

non-resilient mechanical drive mechanism. Also called 

“positive-opening” or “direct-action” contacts. (See 

Figure 2.) 

Positive-Guided Contacts: Normally-open (NO) and 

normally-closed (NC) contacts which operate interdependently 

such that the NO and NC contacts can never 

be closed at the same time. They are designed such 

that if one of the contacts welds/sticks closed, 

CONTACTS 

Figure 2 

CONVENTIONAL VERSUS POSITIVE-OPENING 

CONTACTS 

390 

Figure 3 

the other contacts cannot change state. (See Figure 3.) 

The interdependent operation between NO and NC 

contacts permits self-checking/monitoring of the functioning 

of relays and contactors featuring positive-guided 

contacts. Hence they are desirable in machine safety 

circuits where “fail-to-safe” or “control reliability” is 

desired. Also called “force-guided contacts”. 

Positive Linkage: a term applied to roller lever, rocking 

lever and other switch actuating members designed 

such that the integrity of the linkage between the actuator 

and the shaft is heightened (beyond a set screw on a 

smooth shaft) by its mechanical design. Examples of 

positive-linkages are pinned, square and serrated 

shafts. (See Figure 4.)

hazards present to the machine operator and/or maintenance 

personnel. This assessment is usually done in 

the early stages of the machine’s design to permit such 

hazards to be designed-out or alternatively determine 

the scope of the safety system needed to protect personnel 

from possible injury. One approach suggested in 

EN ISO 13849-1 is summarized in Figure 6. 

Figure 6 

Pinned 

Actuator 

Square 

Serrated 

Positive Linkage 

Figure 4 

Positive-Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singepiece 

safety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) such 

that the non-resilient mechanical mechanism which 

forces the normally-closed (NC) contacts to open is 

directly driven by the interlocked machine safety guard. 

In this mode (as opposed to “negative-mode mounting”) 

the safety guard physically forces the NC contacts to 

open when the guard is opened. (See Figure 5.) 

Selection of the Required Performance Level (PL r ) 

Here the safety 

category is 

determined by the 

following parameters: 

• S Severity of injury 

• ■ S1 Slight injury 

• ■ S2 Serious injury 

• F Frequency 

and/or exposure 

time to the hazard 

• ■ F1 Seldom to 

quite often 

• ■ F2 Frequent to 

continuous 

• P Possibility of 

avoiding the 

hazard 

• ■ P1 Possible 

under specific 

conditions 

• ■ P2 Scarcely 

possible 

Safeguarding: protecting personnel from hazards using 

guards, barriers, safety devices and/or safe working 

procedures. 

Figure 5 

Positive-Opening Contacts: See “Positive-Break 

Contacts”. 

Push/Pull Operation: a term applied to emergency 

rope-pull switches designed to actuate when the 

rope/trip-wire is pulled and when it is pushed (goes 

slack). Such rope-pull switches provide a higher level 

of safety than units which only actuate when the tripwire/rope 

is pulled. 

Redundancy: the duplication of control circuits and/or 

components such that if one component/circuit should 

fail the other (redundant) component/circuit will ensure 

safe operation. 

Risk Assessment: a systematic means of quantifying 

the relative level of danger different types of machine 

Safety Controller: an electronic and/or electromechanical 

device designed expressly for monitoring the integrity 

of a machine’s safety system. Such controllers are 

designed using positive-guided (force-guided) relays. 

Depending upon the model, SCHMERSAL’s safety 

controllers are capable of detecting the following types 

of potential safety system faults: 

• Machine guard(s) open 

• Guard monitoring switch/sensor failure 

• Interconnection wiring “open circuit” 

• Interconnection wiring “short circuit” 

• Interconnection wiring “short-to-ground” 

• Welded contact in controlled output device 

• Failure of one of the safety controller’s positiveguided 

relays 

• Fault in the safety controller’s monitoring circuit 

• Insufficient safety controller operating voltage 

Upon detection of a system fault, the safety controller will 

initiate a “machine stop” command and/or prevent the 

restarting of the machine until the fault has been corrected. 

The “stop” command may be immediate or time-delayed 

depending upon the model safety controller selected. 

391

Safety Enable: (See “Authorized Output.”) 

Safety Interlock Switch: a switch designed expressly to 

safely monitor the position of a machine barrier guard. 

Such switches typically feature positive-break contacts 

and are designed to be more tamper-resistant than conventional 

position/presence-sensing switches. 

Safety Output: (See “Authorized Output.”) 

Safety Relay: an electromechanical relay designed with 

positive-guided contacts. 

Self-Checking: the performing of periodic self-diagnostics 

on the safety control circuit to ensure that critical 

individual components are functioning properly. 

Self-Monitoring: see “Self-Checking”. 

Single-Channel Safety System: a safety control system 

characterized by one safety interlock switch whose 

normally-closed contact is the sole input to a safety controller 

or a motor contactor. Such systems are unable to 

detect a short circuit failure in the interconnection wiring 

and are only recommended for addressing Safety 

Categories B, 1 and 2 (see “Risk Assessment”). 

Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch: 

a two-piece safety interlock (actuating key and switch 

mechanism) whose design prevents the removal of 

the actuating key until released by an integral latching 

solenoid. Solenoid latching is typically controlled by a 

time-delay, motion detector, position sensor or other 

control components. 

Stop Categories: 

“0” Requires immediate removal of power from the 

controlled devices. 

“1” Allows for a time delay up to 30 seconds for removal 

of power. This is commonly used with drive systems 

where immediate removal of power may result in a 

longer stop time. 

SRPCS: Safety Related Parts of Control Systems — 

(sub)systems which perform a safety function. 

Tamper-Resistant: a term applied to safety interlock 

switches referring to their relative ability to be defeated 

or bypassed using simple, readily available means such 

as a screwdriver, paper clip, piece of tape or wire, etc. 

Switches and sensors designed expressly for use as 

machine guard safety interlocks are designed to be 

more “tamper-resistant” than conventional switches/ 

sensors (e.g. proximity switches, reed switches, conventional 

limit switches). 

Time-delayed Authorized Outputs: a safety controller’s 

authorized outputs whose activation is delayed (up to 30 

seconds) to satisfy Stop Category 1 requirements. 

Trailing-edge Reset: (See “Manually-monitored Reset.”) 

Two-Hand Control: a machine control system which 

requires “simultaneous” use of both of the operator’s 

hands to initiate a machine cycle. 

UL (Underwriters Laboratories): an independent 

testing and standards-making organization. 

UL tests products for compliance to 

relevant electrical and safety standards/ 

requirements. 

392

MACHINE SAFETY STANDARDS 

European Machinery Directive & CE Marking 

The European safety requirements for man and machine 

are established in the European Machinery Directive 

(EMD). According to the EMD, machinery must be 

designed and built to meet the Directive’s requirements 

as defined by existing and emerging European standards. 

These “European Norms”, prepared by representatives 

of the European Economic Community (EEC) 

member states and produced by the European standards 

committees CEN and CENELEC, provide a harmonized 

baseline for the design and construction of safe 

machinery. 

As of January 1, 1997, machinery sold into or within the 

EEC must comply with the requirements of the 

European Machinery Directive. Equipment which complies 

may be affixed with the CE mark (for “Conformité 

Europeene”). The CE mark on a machine signifies that it 

conforms to the essential health and safety requirements 

defined by the relevant European Norms. 

EUROPEAN STANDARDS 

These “Norms” form a hierarchical structure which 

include: 

Type A Standards: Fundamental Safety Standards 

which contain basic concepts, principles of design, and 

general aspects applicable to all machinery. 

Type B Standards: Group Safety Standards, each of 

which focuses on a specific subject applicable to a 

range of machinery types. “B1 Standards” cover a specific 

safety aspect defined in the Fundamental 

Standards. “B2 Standards” cover the requirements of 

specific safety related devices such as two-hand controls, 

interlocking devices, movable guards, etc. 

Type C Standards: Specific Machine Safety Standards, 

each of which define protective measures required for 

hazardous areas of a specific machine or group of 

machines. 

Type A and Type B Standards are intended to assist in 

the machinery design process, and eliminate the need 

to repeat these general requirements in the machinespecific 

(Type C) Standards. 

Many product standards are still in the planning stage 

and the number of Type C Standards is continuously 

increasing. Some are still in draft form (designated as 

“prEN” standards). Others exist as finished (“EN”) standards. 

Where no machine-specific standard exists, the requirements 

of the Machinery Directive can be satisfied by 

observing existing European Standards and relevant 

national standards/specifications. Draft standards (prEN) 

published by the European Union are also accepted and 

used as a basis for evaluating products for compliance 

to the Directives. It is important to note that such draft 

standards may change before being finalized and adopted 

as EN standards. 

Selected European Standards 

Type “A” Standards: 

EN ISO 12100-1, Safety Machinery – Basic Concepts, 

General Principles of Design, Parts 1 & 2. 

Type “B1” Standards: 

EN ISO 13849-1 Safety of Machinery – Safety-Related 

Parts of Control Systems – Part 1: General Principles for 

Design 

EN ISO 13857 Safety of Machinery – Safety Distances to 

Prevent Danger Zones from Being Reached by Upper 

and Lower Limbs. 

EN349 Safety of Machinery – Minimum Gaps to Avoid 

Crushing of Parts of the Human Body. 

EN954-1 Safety of Machinery – Safety-Related Parts of 

Control Systems – Part 1. General Principles of Design. 

EN ISO 13855 Safety of Machinery – The Positioning of 

Protective Equipment in Respect of Approach Speeds of 

the Human Body. 

EN ISO 12100 Safety of Machinery – Principles of Risk 

Assessment. 

Selected Type “B2” Standards: 

EN ISO 13850 Safety of Machinery – Emergency Stop 

Devices, Functional Aspects – Principles for Design. 

EN 574 Safety of Machinery – Two-Hand Control 

Devices, Functional Aspects – Principles for Design. 

EN1088 Safety of Machinery – Interlocking Devices 

Associated with Guards – Principles for Design & 

Selection. 

EN 953 Safety of Machinery – General Requirements 

for the Design and Construction of Guards. 

393

EN1760-1 Safety of Machinery – Pressure Sensitive 

Safety Devices – Mats & Floors. 

EN1760-2 Safety of Machinery – Pressure Sensitive 

Safety Devices – Edges & Bars. 

prEN61496 Safety of Machinery – Electrosensitive 

Protective Equipment. 

Type “C” Standards: 

EN415 Packaging Machines 

EN692 Mechanical Presses 

EN693 Hydraulic Presses 

EN746 Thermoprocessing Machines 

EN931 Footwear Manufacturing Machines 

EN1114-1 Rubber & Plastics Machines 

EN1762 Food Processing Machines 

US STANDARDS: 

In the United States, the protection of workers is the 

primary concern of OSHA, the Occupational Health and 

Safety Administration, a division of the Department of 

Labor. OSHA’s role is to assure safe and healthful 

working conditions for working men and women; by 

authorizing enforcement of the standards developed 

under the Occupational Safety & Health Act; by assisting 

and encouraging the States in their efforts to assure 

safe and healthful working conditions; by providing for 

research, information, education, and training in the field 

of occupational safety and health. OSHA is the primary 

regulatory agency for safety and health, setting national 

standards and providing for the enforcement thereof. 

OSHA also relies on consensus standards. These are 

guidelines and standards created by standards-making 

organizations, trade associations, and third party testing 

facilities. In the machinery industry, these include: 

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Robotics 

Industry of America (RIA) Instrument Society of America 

(ISA) National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) 

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Selected US 

Standards and Guidelines 

OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212 

General Requirements for (Guarding of) All Machines 

OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217 

(Guarding of) Mechanical Power Presses 

394 

ISA S84.01 

Safety Instrumented Systems 

ANSI B11.1 

Machine Tools – Mechanical Power Presses – Safety 

Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of 

ANSI B11.2 

Hydraulic Power Presses – Safety Requirements for 

Construction, Care, and Use of 

ANSI B11.3 

Power Press Brakes – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.4 

Shears – Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, 

and Use of 

ANSI B11.5 

Machine Tools – Iron Workers – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.6 

Lathes – Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, 

and Use of 

ANSI B11.7 

Cold Headers & Cold Formers – Safety Requirements 

for Construction, Care, and Use of 

ANSI B11.8 

Drilling, Milling , and Boring Machines – Safety 


ANSI B11.9 

Grinding Machines – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.10 

Metal Sawing Machines – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.11 

Gear Cutting Machines – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.13 

Machine Tools – Single- and Multiple-Spindle Automatic 

Bar and Chucking Machines – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.14 

Coil Slitting Machines/Systems – Safety Requirements 

for Construction, Care, and Use of 

ANSI B11.15 

Pipe, Tube, and Shape Bending Machines – Safety 

Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of

ANSI B11.16 

Metal Powder Compacting Presses – Safety 


ANSI B11.17 

Horizontal Extrusion Presses – Safety Requirements for 


ANSI B11.18 

Machinery and Machine Systems for the Processing of 

Coiled Strip, Sheet, and Plate – Safety Requirements for 

ANSI B11.19 

Performance Criteria for the Design, Construction, Care, 

and Operation of Safeguarding when Referenced by 

Other B11 Machine Tool Safety Standards 

ANSI B11.20 

Machine Tools – Manufacturing Systems/Cells – Safety 


ANSI B183 

Roll Forming and Roll Bending Machines – Safety 


ANSI/RIA 15.06 

Safety Requirements for Industrial Robots and Robot 

Systems 

NFPA 79 

Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 1994 Edition 

CANADIAN STANDARDS: 

In Canada, each province has its own regulatory body 

for occupational health and safety, such as the Ministry 

of Labour in Ontario. There are fourteen jurisdictions – 

one federal, ten provincial, and three territorial – each 

governing the way industrial safety is implemented and 

enforced in their specific province or territory. Federal 

legislation covers employees of the federal government 

and Crown agencies and corporations across Canada. 

In each province or territory, there is an act (typically 

called the Occupational Health and Safety Act, or 

something similar) which applies to most workplaces in 

that region. 

Duties of Employers and Other Persons 

The various Occupation Health and Safety Acts impose 

duties on those who have any degree of control over 

the workplace, the materials and equipment in the 

workplace, and the direction of the work force. There is 

a general duty on employers to take all reasonable 

precautions to protect the health and safety of workers. 

In addition, the Act and regulations set out many 

specific responsibilities of the employer. For example, 

there are duties that specifically relate to toxic 

substances, hazardous machinery, worker education, 

and personal protective equipment. There is a duty on 

all officers and directors of corporations to ensure that 

their corporations comply with the Act and regulations. 

The duties of workers are generally to work safely, in 

accordance with the Act and regulations. 

Canadian Regulatory Agencies 

Please find the regulatory agency in each province and 

territory as below: 

Alberta 

Workplace Health and Safety, Alberta Employment and 

Immigration 

British Columbia 

WorkSafeBC 

Manitoba 

SAFE Manitoba 

New Brunswick 

WorkSafeNB 

Newfoundland and Labrador 

Occupational Health and Safety Branch, Department of 

Government Services 

Northwest Territories and Nunavut 

Workers’ Compensation Board of the Northwest 

Territories and Nunavut 

Nova Scotia 

Occupational Health & Safety Division, Nova Scotia 

Labour and Workforce Development 

Ontario 

Occupational Health and Safety Branch, Ministry of 

Labour 

Prince Edward Island 

Occupational Health and Safety Division, Workers’ 

Compensation Board 

Quebec 

Commission de la santé et de la sécurité du travail du 

Québec (Occupational Health and Safety Commission of 

Quebec) 

Saskatchewan 

Occupational Health and Safety Division, Saskatchewan 

Ministry of Advanced Education, Employment and 

Labour 

Yukon 

Yukon Workers’ Compensation Health and Safety Board 

395

Resources: 

There is also a national Canadian Standards 

Association that sets safety standards which are 

voluntary and represent best practices. CSA standards 

may be enforced by law when referenced in provincial, 

territorial or federal legislation or regulations. These 

standards are designed to be complementary to the 

actions of government in tackling the issue of worker 

safety and can provide tools to help organizations 

comply with regulations and demonstrate due diligence. 

Relevant Canadian Standards 

CAN/CSA-Z142-10 

Code for Power Press Operation: Health, Safety, and 

Guarding Requirements 


Safeguarding of Machinery 


Industrial Robots and Robot Systems – General Safety 

Requirements 


Control of Hazardous Energy – Lockout and Other 

Methods 

CAN/CSA-Z615-87 (R2006) 

Code for Hot Forging Producers, Health and Safety 

Requirements 

CAN/CSA-Z462 

Workplace Electrical Safety 

CAN/CSA-Z1002 

Injury Risk Assessment and Management 

SOURCES FOR STANDARDS: 

EN & IEC Standards are available from: 

Global Engineering Documents 

15 Inverness Way East 

Englewood, CO 80112 

Telephone: (800) 854-7179 

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

11 West 42nd Street 

New York, NY 10036 

Telephone: (212) 642-4900 

ANSI & NFPA Standards are available from: 

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

11 West 42nd Street 

New York, NY 10036 

Telephone: (212) 642-4900 

OSHA Regulations are available from: 

Superintendent of Documents 

Government Printing Office 

Washington, DC 20402-9371 

Telephone: (202) 783-3238 

CSA Standards are available from: 

CSA Head Office – Mississauga 

5060 Spectrum Way, Suite 100 

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5N6 CANADA 

CAN/CSA-Z1006 

Work in Confined Spaces 

CAN/CSA-Z1004 

General Workplace Ergonomics 

CAN/CSA Z1000-06 

Occupational Health and Safety Management 

CAN/CSA-Z1600 

Emergency Management and Business 

Continuity Programs 

DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY 

Each SCHMERSAL safety product has been 

certified to conform to all relevant Standards and 

Directives. Copies of the Declaration of Conformity 

for any product in this catalog are available upon 

request. 

396

SELECTED CONVERSION FACTORS 

TO CONVERT 

TO CONVERT 

foot pounds hp-hours 5.05 × 10 -7 pounds oz (troy) 1.458 × 10 1 

Parameter From To Multiply by Parameter From To Multiply by 

Temperature °C °F (°C × 9/5) + 32 Force centigrams grams 0.01 

°F °C (°F–32) × 5/9 

dynes grams 0.00102 

°C °K °C + 273.18 

dynes newtons 1.0 × 10 -5 

dynes kg 1.02 × 10 -6 

Distance cm inches 0.3937 

dynes pounds 2.248 × 10 -6 

mm inches 0.03937 

grams kilograms 1.0 × 10 -3 

cm feet 0.03281 

grams milligrams 1.0 × 10 3 

inches mm 25.4 

grams oz (avdp) 3.527 × 10 -2 

feet cm 30.48 

grams oz (troy) 3.215 × 10 -2 

meters feet 3.281 

grams pounds 2.205 × 10 -3 

meters inches 39.37 

kilograms dynes 9.80665 × 10 5 

kilograms grams 1.0 × 10 3 

Energy btu gram calories 2.52 × 10 2 

kilograms newtons 9.807 

btu hp-hours 3.927 × 10 -4 

kilograms pounds 2.2046 

btu joules 1.055 × 10 3 

kilograms oz (avdp) 3.5274 × 10 1 

btu kW-hours 2.928 × 10 -4 

newtons dynes 4.448 × 10 5 

btu ergs 1.055 × 10 10 

newtons pounds 0.2248 

ergs btu 9.486 × 10 -11 

pounds dynes 1.0 × 10 5 

ergs joules 1.0 × 10 -7 

pounds grams 4.5359 × 10 2 

ergs watt-hours 2.773 × 10 -11 

pounds newtons 4.448 

foot pounds btu 1.286 × 10 -3 

pounds kilograms 4.536 × 10 -1 

foot pounds gm-calories 3.241 × 10 -1 

pounds oz (avdp) 1.6 × 10 1 

397

NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC 

INGRESS PROTECTION RATINGS 

NEMA, UL, CSA and IEC have each established 

ratings systems intended to identify an enclosure’s 

ability to repel elements from the outside environment. 

These rating systems address the enclosure’s ability to 

protect against a variety of environmental conditions. 

These include: 

• Incidental contact 

• Rain, sleet and snow 

• Windblown dust 

• Hosedown and splashing liquids 

• Falling dirt 

• Oil or coolant spraying/splashing 

• Corrosive agents 

• Occasional temporary submersion 

• Occasional prolonged submersion 

While these ratings are intended to help you make a 

more informed product selection, there are some 

differences between each organization’s system. 

As shown in Table 1, the NEMA, UL and CSA ratings 

most commonly used in North America are based on 

similar application descriptions and expected performance. 

However, while UL and CSA require testing in the 

laboratories (and periodic manufacturer site inspections 

to ensure continued adherence to prescribed standards), 

NEMA leaves compliance and certification up to the 

manufacturer. 

While the European IEC (IP) ratings summarized in 

Table 2 are based on similar test methods, their 

performance has some slight and subtle differences in 

interpretation. For example, selected IP ratings permit 

limited ingress of water, while UL/CSA ratings do not. 

For your reference and convenience we have 

attempted to provide an approximate cross-reference 

between North American enclosure ratings (NEMA, UL 

and CSA) and selected IEC (IP) enclosure ratings (Table 

3). Please recognize that these are nearest-equivalents 

only and should not be considered as direct comparisons. 

TABLE 1: 

IEC (IP) Enclosure Ratings 

IP Tests IP Tests 

0 No protection 0 No protection 

1 Protected against solid 

objects up to 50mm, 

e.g. accidental touch by 

hands 


objects up to 12mm, 

e.g. fingers 


objects over 2.5mm, e.g. 

tools and wires 


objects over 1mm 

5 Protected against dust 

(limited ingress, no 

harmful deposit) 

6 Totally protected against 

dust 

Example: 

Characteristic letters 

1st characteristic numeral 

(Protection against solid objects) 

2nd characteristic numeral 

(Protection against liquids) 

1 Protected against vertically 

falling drops of water, e.g. 

condensation 

2 Protected against direct 

sprays of water up to 15° 

from vertical 

3 Protected against sprays to 

60° from vertical 

4 Protected against water 

sprayed from all directions 

(limited ingress permitted) 

5 Protected against low 

pressure jets of water from 

all directions (limited ingress 

permitted) 

6 Protected against strong jets 

of water 

7 Protected against the effects 

of immersion between 1 cm 

and 1 m 

8 Protected against the effects 

of immersion beyond 1 m 

9K** Protection against high 

pressure high temperature 

washdown applications 

IP 2 3 

TABLE 2: 

NEMA, UL & CSA vs. IEC (IP) Ingress Protection Ratings* 

NEMA, 

UL, 

CSA 

Rating 

1 • 

IEC Rating 

IP23 IP30 IP32 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67 IP68 

2 • 

3 • 

3R 

• 

3S 

• 

4 • 

4X 

• 

6 • • 

6P 

• 

12 • 

13 • 

IP69K** 

* These are nearest equivalents only, and should not be used to 

make direct conversions from IEC to NEMA classifications. 

** Designed to meet DIN 40050, Part 9 (1983) Protection Type Test. 

• 

• 

• 

• 

An enclosure with this designation is protected against the penetration 

of solid objects greater than 12mm and against spraying water. 

398

GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF SALE 

ORDERS & BLANKET ORDERS 

All orders must include proper description, pricing, quantity and 

shipping requirements. Buyer must contact the Seller’s headquarters 

for terms and conditions associated with blanket 

orders. 

PRICES 

Unless otherwise stated, prices are firm for thirty days. Seller 

reserves the right to revise price if there is a change in quantity, 

size, finish, or method and time shipment differing from those 

indicated herein. Prices and terms on this quotation and/or 

acknowledgement of order are not subject to verbal changes or 

other agreements unless approved in writing by the Seller’s 

headquarters’ staff. Unless otherwise negotiated, prices for 

orders for future delivery will be invoiced at the prevailing price 

at the time of shipment. 

DELIVERY 

All material is sold and priced F.O.B. Tarrytown, NY, USA. 

Unless otherwise specified by the Buyer, all shipments will be 

made via UPS Ground. 

MINIMUM ORDER & PACKAGING CHARGES 

Unless otherwise agreed upon, the minimum order billing is 

$100 per shipment exclusive of shipping, insurance or other 

miscellaneous charges. 

PAYMENT TERMS 

Payment terms are net 30 days. Seller reserves the right to hold 

shipments to firms with unpaid past due balances. Seller also 

reserves the right to charge interest at the rate of 1 1 ⁄2% interest 

per month for accounts in arrears more than 30 days. This interest 

will never be greater than that allowed by local law. 

TITLE 

Title to material, priced at Seller’s shipping point, shall pass to 

Buyer upon shipment. Any charges by carrier for switching, 

demurrage or other services shall be paid by the Buyer. 

CHANGES & CANCELLATIONS 

Should Buyer desire to cancel, revise or suspend this order for 

reasons beyond the Buyer’s control, Seller shall discuss the 

matter promptly with the Buyer and do all possible to make a 

mutually satisfactory agreement. In cases where the material 

has been manufactured partially or completely for Buyer’s 

requirements, Seller will advise Buyer of charges incurred to 

Buyer’s account. 

CLAIMS FOR DEFECTIVE MATERIALS 

All material is warranted to be free from defects in quality and 

workmanship, and to meet the specifications to which ordered. 

The Seller’s obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing 

or replacing defective material, or crediting the Buyer with the 

price of the defective material. If Buyer believes the material to 

be defective, Buyer must notify Seller within 30 days after delivery. 

Seller has the right to reinspect any goods before determination 

of a reasonable settlement. Toward this end, Buyer must 

contact Seller’s headquarters requesting a formal Return 

Material Authorization (RMA). Seller will not accept any material 

returns without reference to the RMA number of the Buyer’s 

returned goods packing list. 

ORDERS FOR NON-STANDARD/SPECIAL ITEMS 

Unless otherwise negotiated and confirmed in writing by the 

Seller, orders for non-standard and special items made to the 

Buyer’s specifications are non-cancelable. Seller reserves the 

right to bill Buyer for materials purchased for the production of 

such items, and for all goods fully or partially manufactured at 

the time of notice of the Buyer’s desire to cancel the order. 

SPECIAL TOOLING 

Special tooling required and paid for by the Buyer shall become 

the property of the Buyer. Where such tooling incorporates trade 

secrets, it shall be held in perpetuity at the manufacturer’s premises 

for the exclusive use of the Buyer. 

GENERAL 

All agreements are contingent upon strikes, accidents, fires, 

availability of materials and all other causes beyond the Seller’s 

control. Typographical, accounting and other administrative 

errors are subject to correction. Buyer assumes the liability for 

patent and copyright infringement for goods made to Buyer’s 

specifications. When Buyer furnishes material for use in production, 

ample allowance must be made for reasonable 

spoilage. Such materials must be of suitable quality to facilitate 

efficient production. Conditions not specifically stated herein 

shall be governed by established trade customs. Terms inconsistent 

with those stated herein that may appear on the Buyer’s 

formal order will not be binding on the Seller. 

SUSPENSIONS & CANCELLATIONS 

Unless otherwise negotiated and agreed to by the Seller, the 

Buyer must accept final and/or complete delivery on all orders 

within 90 days from date of first shipment. Should the Buyer fail 

to accept the complete order within this or the negotiated period 

for order, the Seller reserves the right to cancel the order and 

re-bill the Buyer at the price schedule covering the total quantity 

of parts shipped through the date of cancellation. 

WARRANTY AND LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTY: 

SCHMERSAL INC agrees to replace or repair products which 

have been found defective due to workmanship or material. 

This warranty is made only for a period within one year of the 

date of the invoice to the Buyer. This warranty applies to 

products which have been subjected to normal and proper 

usage, and to which inspection of the product by the 

SCHMERSAL INC shows it to be thus defective. THE AGREE- 

MENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE SUCH PRODUCT IS LIMIT- 

ED TO F.O.B. SHIPPING POINT AND IS IN NO WAY A 

LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL, 

OR FOR DELAYS, INSTALLATION, TRANSPORTATION, 

ADJUSTMENT OR OTHER EXPENSES ARISING IN 

CONNECTION WITH SUCH PRODUCT. SCHMERSAL INC is 

not responsible in this warranty for product which is repaired or 

altered. Nor is SCHMERSAL INC responsible in this warranty 

for products subject to misuse, negligence, or accident. 

SCHMERSAL INC IS IN NO WAY LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE 

FOR INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPER- 

TY ARISING FROM OR OUT OF USE OF THE PRODUCT 

WITHIN DESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS. Except for the 

warranty hereinbefore stated, THERE ARE NO EXPRESS 

WARRANTIES AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER- 

CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR 

PURPOSE, OTHER THAN THOSE EXPRESSLY SET FORTH 

ABOVE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND 

EXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE, BOTH 

EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, UNLESS SET FORTH IN WRITING 

AND SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED EXECUTIVE OF THE 

SCHMERSAL INC. 

399

400 

NOTES

NOTES 

401

402 

NOTES

Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?